Home

Block Parameters

Contents

1. xITBUtils Layout optionStruct Automatically places and routes a Simulink model optionStruct is a MATLAB struct data type that contains the parameters for Layout The optionStruct argument is optional Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 410 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xITBUtils Layout expects circuits to be placed left to right After placement Layout uses Simulink to autoroute the wire connections Simulink will route avoiding anything visible on screen including block labels Setting ignore_labels will allow Simulink to route over labels after which it is possible to manually move the labels to a more reasonable location Note that field names are case sensitive Field Names Description Default values X_pitch The gaps pitch between block pixels x_pitch specifies the y_pitch amount of spacing to leave between blocks horizontally and y_pitch specifies vertical spacing 30 x_start Left x_start and top y_start margin spacing pixels The amount of y_start spacing to leave on the left and top of a model 10 autoroute Turns on Simulink auto routing of lines 1 0 1 ignore_labels When auto routing lines Simulink will attempt to auto route around text labels Setting ignore_labels to 1 will minimize text label size during the routing process sys Name of the system to layout gcs verbose When set to 1 a wait bar is shown dur
2. Tool Blocks Table 1 11 Tool Blocks Tool Blocks Clock Probe Description The Xilinx Clock Probe generates a double precision representation of a clock signal with a period equal to the Simulink system period Configurable Subsystem Manager The Xilinx Configurable Subsystem Manager extends Simulink s configurable subsystem capabilities to allow a subsystem configurations to be selected for hardware generation as well as for simulation FDATool The Xilinx FDATool block provides an interface to the FDATool software available as part of the MATLAB Signal Processing Toolbox Indeterminate Probe The output of the Xilinx Indeterminate Probe indicates whether the input data is indeterminate MATLAB value NaN An indeterminate data value corresponds to a VHDL indeterminate logic data value of X ModelSim The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate existing HDL files into a model When the model is simulated co simulation can be used to allow black boxes to participate The ModelSim HDL co simulation block configures and controls co simulation for one or several black boxes Pause Simulation The Xilinx Pause Simulation block pauses the simulation when the input is non zero The block accepts any Xilinx signal type as input PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller The Xilinx PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller block implements an 8 bit microcontroller Vivado Desi
3. XILINX BitBasher a2 holds bits 7 through 3 of input b in the reverse order in which they appear in bit b for example if b is 110100110 then a2 is 00101 a3 b5 51 a3 holds bit 5 of input b a4 b 7 5 c 3 9 d e The above expression makes use of a combination of slice and concat constructs Bits 7 through 5 of input b bits 3 through 9 of input c and all the bits of d and e are concatenated Repeat output_var N bitbasher_expr N A positive integer that represents the repeat factor in the expression The following are some examples of this construct al 4 b 7 31 The above expression is equivalent to a1 b 7 3 b 7 3 b 7 3 b 7 3 a2 b 7 31 21c d The above expression is equivalent to a2 b 7 3 c d c d Constants Binary Constant N bbin_const Octal Constant N ooctal_const Decimal Constant N doctal_const Hexadecimal Constant N hoctal_const N A positive integer that represents the number of bits that are used to represent the constant bin_const A legal binary number string made up of 0 and 1 octal_const A legal octal number string made up of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 decimal_const A legal decimal number string made up of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 hexadecimal_const A legal binary number string made up of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e and f Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 61 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX BitBash
4. XILINX PG API Examples mode where you need to have a physical M function file and pass that function to the xBlock constructor 1 First create the top level PG API M function file MACC_sub m with the following lines function MACC_sub latency nbits a b xInport a b mac xOutport mac if latency lt 0 error latency must be positive elseif latency 1 a_in a b_in b else a_in b_in xSignal dblock1 xBlock Delay struct latency latency 1 a fa_in block2 xBlock Delay struct latency latency 1 b b_in end m xSignal mult xBlock Mult struct latency 0 use_behavioral_HDL bin m acc xBlock Accumulator struct rst off n_bits use_behavioral_HDL on m mac EA Uilin dsplaols 110 4 yspee nde samp cs praprummal qcralisnexamp 3 mare musk 51 brysler WACC Ple Edt Test Go Cel Took Orbug Dedtmp Window Help eE A IEE I A LEE EAEE BAH AB sxx a se L10 f e leat a function MACC eub latentg mits Ca p xInpoct a D 5 mac ODTportT m c if Lateocy lt D error latency must be positive gt elseif latency 1 ein a bin b else a_in B_in xS5igael dolocki xBlock Deloy atruct latency lat ocy 1 ceg_retimiog on lab block xBlock Delsy atruct latenos latemey l ceg retiwiog 0n Bt end m xSignal
5. CORDIC 5 0 The Xilinx CORDIC 5 0 block implements a generalized coordinate rotational digital computer CORDIC algorithm and is AXI compliant Counter The Xilinx Counter block implements a free running or count limited type of an up down or up down counter The counter output can be specified as a signed or unsigned fixed point number DDS Compiler 5 0 The Xilinx DDS Direct Digital Synthesizer Compiler 5 0 block implements high performance optimized Phase Generation and Phase to Sinusoid circuits with AXI4 Stream compliant interfaces for supported devices Delay The Xilinx Delay block implements a fixed delay of L cycles Depuncture The Xilinx Depuncture block allows you to insert an arbitrary symbol into your input data at the location specified by the depuncture code Divide The Xilinx Divide block performs both fixed point and floating point division with the a input being the dividend and the b input the divisor Both inputs must be of the same data type Divider Generator 4 0 The Xilinx Divider Generator 4 0 block creates a circuit for integer division based on Radix 2 non restoring division or High Radix division with prescaling Down Sample The Xilinx Down Sample block reduces the sample rate at the point where the block is placed in your design DSP48 Macro 2 1 The System Generator DSP48 macro 2 1 block provides a device independent abstraction of the blocks DSP48 DSP48A
6. XILINX Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes correspond to multiple clock cycles in the corresponding FPGA implementation for example when the hardware is over clocked with respect to the Simulink model System Generator does not perform extensive pipelining additional latency is usually implemented as a shift register on the output of the block Provide Synchronous Reset Port Selecting the Provide Synchronous Reset Port option activates an optional reset rst pin on the block When the reset signal is asserted the block goes back to its initial state Reset signal has precedence over the optional enable signal available on the block The reset signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving the reset port must be Boolean Provide Enable Port Selecting the Provide Enable Port option activates an optional enable en pin on the block When the enable signal is not asserted the block holds its current state until the enable signal is asserted again or the reset signal is asserted Reset signal has precedence over the enable signal The enable signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving the enable port must be Boolean Sample Period Data streams are processed at a specific sample rate as they flow through Simulink Typically each block detects the input sample rate and produces the correct sample rate on its output Xilinx blocks Up Sample and Down Samp
7. Number of Coefficients Sets The number of sets of filter coefficients to be implemented The value specified must divide without remainder into the number of coefficients Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 169 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 e Use Reloadable Coefficients Check to add the coefficient reload ports to the block The set of data loaded into the reload channel will not take action until triggered by a re configuration synchronization event Refer to the FIR Compiler V6 3 Product Specification starting on page 25 for a more detailed explanation of the RELOAD Channel interface timing This block supports the xlGetReloadOrder function See xlGetReloadOrder for details Filter Specification Filter Type e Single_Rate The data rate of the input and the output are the same e Interpolation The data rate of the output is faster than the input by a factor specified by the Interpolation Rate value o Decimation The data rate of the output is slower than the input by a factor specified in the Decimation Rate Value o Hilbert Filter uses the Hilbert Transform o Interpolated An interpolated FIR filter has a similar architecture to a conventional FIR filter but with the unit delay operator replaced by k 1 units of delay k is referred to as the zero packing factor The interpolated FIR should not be confused with an interpolation filter Interpolated filters are si
8. There are many ways to implement such state machines in System Generator e g using the MCode block to implement the transition function and registers to implement state variables This reference block provides a method for implementing a Mealy machine using block and distributed memory The implementation is very fast and efficient For example a state machine with 8 states 1 input and 2 outputs that are registered can be realized with a single block RAM that runs at more than 150 MHz in a Xilinx Virtex device The transition function and output mapping are each represented as an N x M matrix where N is the number of states and M is the size of the input alphabet e g M 2 for a binary input It is convenient to number rows and columns from 0 to N 1 and0toM 1 respectively Each state is represented as an unsigned integer from O to N 1 and each alphabet character is represented as an unsigned integer from 0 to M 1 The row index of each matrix represents the current state and the column index represents the input character For the purpose of discussion let F be the N x M transition function matrix and O be the N x M output function matrix Then F ij is the next state when the current state is i and the current input character is j and O i is the corresponding output of the Mealy machine Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 348 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mealy State Machine E
9. XILINX ModelSim is also discussed in the topic Importing a Verilog Module E black_box_ex4 of gt File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help Dia S BEAS tl 2e gt po Normal A ane Black Box Tutorial Example 4 Mixed Mode Simulation System Generalor to Bool VHDL Parity Block ModelSim Ready 100 lode45 When the above model is run the following waveforms are displayed by ModelSim Fa Syshan Gorcralar Lu Simulalivr AA A ETT Be Edt Yew Format se Hap l CECILIO NL Woes EL ER Ek DDR ql q haa 1945 8 NFR isu Gaclulsirelis Pando LB dal tu p A on A A LAT La lo Ll Mera le s LUJIL LU LU LUTE E Now 29 004 ma Deha 0 sim black_bax ex4_casim_cw Limited Visibility Region 0 ps to 764360463 _ At the time scale presented here the above shows a time interval of six seconds the rising clock edge at three seconds and the corresponding transmission of data through each of the two black boxes appear simultaneous much as they do in the Simulink simulation Looking at the model however it is clear that the output of the first black box feeds the second black box Both of the black boxes in this model have combinational feed throughs for example changes on inputs translate into immediate changes on outputs Zooming in Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 228 UG958 v2012 3 November
10. Gateway Out1 gt phase_tdata WE System Generator DDS Compiler 5 0 Terminating Open Inputs Consider the following model with an open input port untitled1 Ol x File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help OSHS SSW SS tl fico Noma Bs Gateway Out Gateway In Gateway Outl phase_tvalid gt phase_treacdy a System Generator DDS Compiler 5 0 Right click on the DDS Compiler 5 0 block and select Xilinx Tools gt Terminate gt Inputs Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 428 E XILINX Xilinx Tools gt Terminate The following graphic illustrates the resulting terminated input untitled1 Of x File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help DI U Bles Tla 10 0 Normal e data_tready Gateway In Gateway Outl phase_tvalid Cm phase_tready a phase_tdata j gt System Generator DDS Compiler 5 0 Verifying Input Port Data Type Requirements System Generator connects each open input port to a Xilinx Constant Block The new Constant blocks are set to the following default values Type Signed 2 s comp Constant value 0 Number of bits 16 Binary point 14 This terminate tool does not do data type checking on the input ports If an open port requires a different data type for example a Boolean data type you ll need to double click on the Constant block and change the
11. Input configuration Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 143 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 A or ACIN input specifies if the A input should be taken directly from the a port or from the cascaded acin port The acin port can only be connected to another DSP48 block B or BCIN input specifies if the B input should be taken directly from the b port or from the cascaded bcin port The bcin port can only be connected to another DSP48 block DSP48E1 data path configuration SIMD Mode of Adder Subtractor Accumulator this mode can be used to implement small add subtract functions at high speed and lower power with less logic utilization The adder and subtracter in the adder subtracted logic unit can also be split into Two 24 bit Units or Four 12 bit Units Do not use multiplier when selected the block is optimized in hardware for maximum performance without using the multiplier If an instruction using the multiplier is encountered in simulation an error is reported Use dynamic multiplier mode When selected it instructs the block to use the dynamic multiplier mode This indicates that the block is switching between A B and A B operations on the fly and therefore needs to get the worst case timing of the two paths Use preadder Use the 25 bit D data input to the pre adder or alternative input to the multiplier The pre adder implements D A as determined by the INMODES3 signal P
12. v xl_state init precision maxlen returns a vector object The vector is initialized with init and will have maxlen for the maximum length it can be The vector is initialized with init For example v xl_state zeros 1 8 prec 8 creates a vector of 8 zeros v xl_state prec 8 creates an empty vector with 8 as maximum length v xl_state 0 prec 8 creates a vector of one zero as content and with 8 as the maximum length Conceptually a vector state variable is a double ended queue It has two ends the front which is the element at address 0 and the back which is the element at length 1 Methods available for vector are val v idx Returns the value of element at address idx v idx val Assigns the element at address idx with val f v front Returns the value of the front end An error is thrown if the vector is empty v push_front val Pushes val to the front and then increases the vector length by 1 An error is thrown if the vector is full v pop_front Pops one element from the front and decreases the vector length by 1 An error is thrown if the vector is empty b v back Returns the value of the back end An error is thrown if the vector is empty v push_back val Pushes val to the back and the increases the vector length by 1 An error is thrown if the vector is full v pop_back Pops one element from the back and decreases the vector length by 1 An err
13. 110 B stages 1 to 4 stages Sample rate Ts Sample rate is R 1 to 8 stages 1 to 8 stages Sample rate fs R Sample rate fs Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Input Bit Width Width of input sample Input Binary Point Binary point location of input e Filter Type Interpolator or Decimator e Sample Rate Change 8 to 16384 inclusive e Number of Stages 1 to 32 inclusive e Differential Delay 1 to 4 inclusive e Pipeline Differentiators On or Off Reference E B Hogenauer An economical class of digital filters for decimation and interpolation IEEE Transactions on Acoustics Speech and Signal Processing ASSP 29 2 155 162 1981 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 332 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Convolutional Encoder Convolutional Encoder The Xilinx Convolutional Encoder Model block implements an encoder for convolutional codes Ordinarily used in tandem with a Viterbi decoder this block performs forward error correction FEC in digital communication systems Vorve utional Encodar Values are encoded using a linear feed forward shift register which computes modulo two sums over a sliding window of input data as shown in the figure below The length of the shift register is specified by the constraint length The co
14. Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic Tab are as follows Constant e Fixed point Use fixed point data type e Floating point Use floating point data type e Value can be a constant or an expression If the constant cannot be expressed exactly in the specified fixed point type its value is rounded and saturated as needed A positive value is implemented as an unsigned number a negative value as signed Fixed point Precision o Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the constant where bit zero is the least significant bit o Binary point position of the binary point Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Fraction width Specify the fraction width Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 77 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CMult Output tab Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point arithmetic output will always be Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need f
15. Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Line Size Number of samples each line is delayed e Sample Period Sample rate at which the block will run Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 374 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX White Gaussian Noise Generator White Gaussian Noise Generator The Xilinx White Gaussian Noise Generator WGNG generates white Gaussian noise using a combination of the Box Muller algorithm and the Central Limit at noise Theorem following the general approach described in 1 reference listed below White Gausian The Box Muller algorithm generates a unit normal random variable using a Noise Senerator transformation of two independent random variables that are uniformly distributed over 0 1 This is accomplished by storing Box Muller function values in ROMs and addressing them with uniform random variables The uniform random variables are produced by multiple bit leap forward LFSRs A standard LFSR generates one output per clock cycle K bit leap forward LFSRs are able to generate k outputs in a single cycle For example a 4 bit leap forward LFSR outputs a discrete uniform random variable between 0 and 15 A portion of the 48 bit block parameter seed initializes each LFSR allowing customization The outputs of four parallel Box Muller sub
16. Complex hultiplier 4 0 Data Path and Control Signals One noticeable difference between the non AXI and AXI4 version is the tvalia signal The AXI4 version provides both the input and output tvalid control signals as shown by the figure above For the steaming application these control signals might not be necessary However for some bursty data flows they can be used to gate the valid input and output data without having to use additional decoding circuits For this particular example the following control signals are utilized a_tvalid is driven by the Master d_valid from the DDS Compiler 5 0 block b_tvalia is driven by the Master d_valid from the DDS Compiler 5 0 1 block dout_tvalid can be used to drive other input Slave tvalid signals Note The a_tvalid and b_tvalid are operated independently from each other LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Complex Multiplier v5 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 85 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Concat Concat This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types and Index The Xilinx Concat block performs a concatenation of n bit vectors represented by unsigned integer numbers for example n unsigned numbers with binary points at lo position zero Concat hi The Xilinx Reinterpret block provides capabilities that can extend the functionality of the Concat block Bl
17. Constant The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can bea fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Convert The Xilinx Convert block converts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value Delay The Xilinx Delay block implements a fixed delay of L cycles Divide The Xilinx Divide block performs both fixed point and floating point division with the a input being the dividend and the b input the divisor Both inputs must be of the same data type Dual Port RAM The Xilinx Dual Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM Dual ports enable simultaneous access to the memory space at different sample rates using multiple data widths Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 The Xilinx Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 block implements the Cooley Tukey FFT algorithm a computationally efficient method for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT In addition the block provides an AXI4 Stream compliant interface FIFO The Xilinx FIFO block implements an FIFO memory queue Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 26 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 7 Floating Poi
18. Displays which versions of System Generator are installed on your computer www xilinx com 386 XILINX xlAddTerms xlAddTerms xlAddTerms is similar to the addterms command in Simulink in that it adds blocks to terminate or drive unconnected ports in a model With xlAddTerms output ports are terminated with a Simulink terminator block and input ports are correctly driven with either a Simulink or System Generator constant block Additionally System Generator gateway blocks can also be conditionally added The optionStruct argument can be configured to instruct xlAddTerms to set a block s property e g set a constant block s value to 5 or to use different source or terminator blocks Syntax xlAddTerms arg1 optionStruct Description In the following description source block refers to the block that is used to drive an unconnected port And term block refers to the block that is used to terminate an unconnected port xlAddTerms arg1 optionStruct xlAddTerms takes either 1 or 2 arguments The second argument optionStruct argument is optional The first argument can be the name of a system or a block list argl Description gcs A string handle of the current system top test1 A string handle of a system called test1 In this case xlAddTerms is passed a handle to a system This will run xlAddTerms on all the blocks under test1 including all children blocks of subsystems top test1
19. Parallel to Serial The Parallel to Serial block takes an input word and splits it into N time multiplexed output words where N is the ratio of number of input bits to output bits The order of the output can be either least significant bit first or most significant bit first Register The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 19 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 2 Basic Element Blocks Block Reinterpret Description The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Relational The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator Reset Generator The Reset Generator block captures the user s reset signal that is running at the system sample rate and produces one or more downsampled reset signal s running at the rates specified on the block Serial to Parallel The Serial to Parallel block takes a series of inputs of any size and creates a single output of a specified multiple of that size The input series can be ordered either with the most significant word first or the least significant word first Slice The Xilinx Slice block allows you to slice off a sequence of bits from your input data and create a new data value
20. Pass input values to a MATLAB function for evaluation in lnk heed pont type The input ports of Ihe block ore input arguments of Ihe function The autput ports of the block aie output arguments of the function Base Interface Advanced Implementation Block Irterlace MATLAB funclion zmax ERNE Explicit Sample Period C Specily axplicit sample period 1 Once the model is compiled the xlImax MCode block will appear like the block illustrated below lt f 5 al max blade MATLAB Language Support The MCode block supports the following MATLAB language constructs e Assignment statements e Simple and compound if else elseif end statements e switch statements e Arithmetic expressions involving only addition and subtraction e Addition Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 203 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Subtraction Multiplication Division by a power of two Relational operators Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Equal to Not equal to Logical operators amp The MCode block supports the following MATLAB functions MCode Type conversion The only supported data type is xfix the Xilinx fixed point type The xfix type conversion function is used to convert to this type The conversion is done implicitly for integers but must be done explic
21. ooooooocoono ee enn een en ene n tenn teen N E a 308 Data Type Translation ooo ia 5 4B sale ww ww aaa des eu da 309 Desig Examples indi a digs slants AR ARR dae acdc basa 309 KMOW Mi ISSUES iii a ose G9 a a 80 arias 309 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 iio as ds ie 310 Block tE nin a A A A ica 310 Block Paramete S 20300000 tale ed aa as be Se SSeS Be NA Atk ie N 313 LogiCORE Documentation ssri 0 ccc cc eee eee tenet A E e beeen een e enna 316 DeVICe SUPPOF cierres coat cite ocean dae whites ieee ar ra 317 ARDER AM Vas a Brea Sess A We Ree a phos Mutat id shah tle tara dete Ci oe cet 317 Kintex Family soci ai iaaa ia A A AA i 317 Misa ARAS 317 Chapter 2 Xilinx Reference Blockset COMMUNICATION ivi a A A a 318 Controlar ra acacia 318 DSP ue rad AS A deidad 318 E A RAN 319 Mati A ada 319 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter oooooooooocmoocrorronrrnsncrnsos 320 Block Parameters iia A A A dae ali 320 Retener Neiae Reino ceder 321 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 0 ccc cece ce cee cece teen tent ee eee eeees 322 Block Parameters icc e464 86 o sve ayer tin eed AMG wile wie win Bia A MAM di ba dos a wee 322 RETO E IC saorar ero Sek hese en earn aa decnpra des aeatsgige E E ER E A EE erated 322 2n tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 0 ccc cece cece cece eee teen teen eeeees 323 BlockParamMeterS ovin
22. pet Cae y E Senf ti P ees AS 1 PUpat 3 g M Y x a Seer 011 4 Pd aos Duw i g 2 A IRIS f s E E EE af w A G Y A 0 cee De 2 Zaen 1 Ec A gt Gupi mee JO j Mind j a Zap COR m Sa A y OS g Wis E Next StatesOntput I able uven Sata lf nput O Iflncui Quiput 0 D 1 0 l z l 0 2 0 3 0 3 2 4 0 2 2 1 j The table lists the next state and output that result from the current state and input For example if the current state is 4 the output is 1 indicating the detection of the desired sequence and if the input is 1 the next state is state 1 The Registered Moore State Machine block is configured with next state matrix and output array obtained from the next state output table discussed above They are constructed as shown below Next State Output lable Sarel Sale If mpul 3 Wr yu 1 Qu pul l at i iN 1 2 1 fo 2 E 3 o 3 gt 4 ul e No Wy NG OO TO A Y a y 0 o 0 7 I o 3 0 2 4 0 yo z Next State Matrix Output Array Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 369 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Moore State Machine The rows of the matrices correspond to the current state The next state matrix has one column for each input value The output array has only one column since the input value does not affect the output of the state machine Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked b
23. xBlockHelp lt block_name gt prints out the parameter names and the acceptable values for the corresponding parameters When you execute xBlockHelp without a parameter the available blocks in the xbsIndex_r4 library are listed For example when you execute the following in the MATLAB command line xBlockHelp AddSub You ll get the following table in the transcript xbsIndex_r4 AddSub Parameter Table Parameter Acceptable value Type mode Addition String Subtraction Addition or Subtraction use _carryin OE String on use_carryout off String on en O Ek String on latency An Int value Int precision Full String arith_type Signed 2 s comp String Unsigned Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 439 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 System Generator API for Programmatic Generation An Int value Truncate Round unbiased Wrap Saturate Flag as error use_behavioral_HDL off ron pipelined off von use_rpm off noni Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com String 440 XILINX PG API Examples PG API Examples Hello World In this example you will run the PG API in the learning mode where you can type the commands in the MATLAB command shell 1 To start a new learning session in MATLAB command console run xBlock 2 Type the following
24. xlGetReloadOrder xlInstallPlugin Once the main dialog box is open you can create a board support package by filling in the required fields described below xlSetNonMemMap xlSetUseHDL xlSwitchLibrary Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Chapter 4 System Generator Utilities Automatically adds sinks and sources to System Generator models Used to manage the System Generator caches Configures the Simulink solver settings of a model to provide optimal performance during System Generator simulation Returns the denominator of the filter object in an FDATool block Returns the numerator of the filter object in an FDATool block Provides a programmatic way to invoke the System Generator code generator Used to get and set parameter values ina System Generator block Used to get all parameter values in a System Generator block The xlGetReloadOrder function obtains the reload order of the FIR Compiler block versions 5 0 and greater Used to install a System Generator hardware co simulation plugin Launches the System Generator Board support Description builder tool Marks a gateway block as non memory mapped Sets the Use behavioral HDL option of blocks in a model of a subsystem Replaces the HDL library references in the target directory with the specified library name www xilinx com 385 XILINX xlAddTerms xlCache xlConfigureSo
25. Availabe Instructions re A 0 A B P gt gt 17 A DJ B A B P A 0 HC A B P gt gt 17 AFHOY D4C4CARRYIN AHOYDACARAVIN Aro DP AHD DAPHCARRVIN AHD APT At O B P gt gt 17 CARRY N Arora A O B PCINFCARRYT n New Opcede AFO B PCIN gt gt 17 A DY DAPCIN gt gt 17 CA instructions 2RYIN A DJ BCIN ADJ DEIA A D BCIN C CARRYI N A OJ BCIN CARRYIN A O BCIN P AFOJUCINAP CARRYL N ASOCIADOS gt 17 A O BCIN P gt gt 17 CA y C Show Fitered Instructions oK Carcel Help Apply You can find the above complete model at the following pathname lt sysgen_path gt examples dsp48 mult35x35 dsp48macro_mult35x35 mdl LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP DSP48 Macro 2 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 136 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E DSP48E This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Index DSP The Xilinx DSP48E block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use supported devices The DSP48E combines an 18 bit by 25 bit signed multiplier with a 48 bit adder and programmable mux to select the adder s input Operations can be selected dynamically Optional input and multiplier pipeline registers can be selected as well as registers for the alumode carryin and opmode ports The DSP48E block can also target devices that do not contain the DSP48E hardware primitive if the Use synthesizable m
26. Convert Block Parameters The block parameter is the decimal starting seed value Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 329 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX BPSK AWGN Channel Reference 1 A Ghazel E Boutillon J L Danger G Gulak and H Laamari Design and Performance Analysis of a High Speed AWGN Communication Channel Emulator IEEE PACRIM Conference Victoria B C Aug 2001 2 Xilinx Data Sheet Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN Core v1 0 Xilinx Inc October 2002 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 330 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CIC Filter CIC Filter Cascaded integrator comb CIC filters are multirate filters used for realizing gt cae large sample rate changes in digital systems Both decimation and interpolation ms ime structures are supported CIC filters contain no multipliers they consist only of CIC Fitter adders subtractors and registers They are typically employed in applications that have a large excess sample rate that is the system sample rate is much larger than the bandwidth occupied by the signal CIC filters are frequently used in digital down converters and digital up converters Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub bloc
27. e Implementation strategy file Choose an Implementation strategy from the pre defined strategies in the drop down list e Create testbench This instructs System Generator to create a HDL testbench Simulating the testbench in an HDL simulator compares Simulink simulation results Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 293 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator with ones obtained from the compiled version of the design To construct test vectors System Generator simulates the design in Simulink and saves the values seen at gateways The top HDL file for the testbench is named lt name gt _testbench vha v where lt name gt is a name derived from the portion of the design being tested Note This option is not supported when shared memory blocks are included in the design e Create interface document When this box is checked and the Generate button is activated for netlisting System Generator creates an HTM document that describes the design being netlisted This document is placed in a documentation subfolder under the netlist folder Adding Designer Comments to the Generated Document If you want to add personalized comments to the auto generated document follow this procedure a Asshown below double click on the Simulink canvas at the top level and add a comment that starts with Designer Comments a D Hg a p m 10 0 Nomai System Generator CA asta out E Cons
28. mult Block Mu11 atruct lecenry O use bebewiorel_BDL 0n f _in Dink 401 gag 7 KBlook Acoumulator atrwet ret off n bite abite use behavioral EDL dom_int i ban fom t im maa Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 nbits reg_retiming on reg_retiming on on a_in 443 XILINX PG API Examples 2 To mask the subsystem defined by the script add two mask parameters latency and nbits E Mask LiiLor Subsys Lem Joan Parameters Intiskzatian Documartation Didog parameters Prompt Latarcy Ry FEAS 3 y Options for selected parameter Popups one per ine Indidog 7 Show paramatar 2 Enable psramster Dialog colback 3 Then put the following lines to the mask initialization of the subsystem config source str2func MACC_sub config toplevel gcb xBlock config latency nbits In the production mode the first argument of the xBlock constructor is a MATLAB struct for configuration which must have a source field and a toplevel field The source field is a function pointer points to the M function and the toplevel is string specifying the Simulink subsystem If the top level field is 1 an untitled model is created and a subsystem inside that model is created 24 Mask editor Subsystem gt a
29. selects a delayed version of SIGN A B or A B Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Appendix DSP48 Control Instruction Format ube satan Location Mnemonic Description YX Mux op 3 0 0 0 P DSP48 output register A B Concat inputs A and B A is MSB A B Multiplication of inputs A and B C DSP48 input C P C DSP48 input C plus P A B C Concat inputs A and B plus C register Z Mux op 6 4 0 0 PCIN DSP48 cascaded input from PCOUT P DSP48 output register C DSP48 C input PCIN gt gt 17 Cascaded input downshifted by 17 P gt gt 17 DSP48 output register downshifted by 17 Operand op 7 Add Subtract Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 91 XILINX o Location Mnemonic Description Carry In op 8 0 or1 Set carry in to O or 1 CIN Select cin as source SIGN P or PCIN Symmetric round P or PCIN SIGN A B or A B Symmetric round A B or A B SIGND A B or A B Delayed symmetric round of A B or A B Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Constant 92 XILINX Convert Convert This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types Math Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Convert block conv
30. A block list of string handles In this case xlAddTerms is passed a handle to a block This will run xlAddTerms only on the block called test1 and will not process child blocks t b1 t b2 t b3 A block list of string handles 1 2 3 A block list of numeric handles Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 387 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlAddTerms The optionStruct argument is optional but when included should be a MATLAB structure The following table describes the possible values in the structure The structure field names as is true with all MATLAB structure field names are case sensitive optionStruct Source Description xlAddTerms can terminate in ports using any source block refer to SourceWith field The parameters of the source block can be specified using the Source field of the optionStruct by passing the parameters as sub fields of the Source field The Source field prompts xlAddTerms to do a series of set_params on the source block Since it is possible to change the type of the source block it is left to the user to ensure that the parameters here are relevant to the source block in use E g when a Simulink constant block is used as a Source Block setting the block s value to 10 can be done with Source value 10 And when a System Generator Constant block is used as a Source Block setting the constant block to have a value of 10 and
31. Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 53 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Assert Fraction width Specify the fraction width Rate Assert rate specifies whether or not the block will assert that the rate at its input is the same as the rate specified If the rates are not the same an error message is reported e Specify rate specifies whether or not the initial rate to assert is provided from a signal connected to an input port named rate or whether it is specified Explicitly from the Sample rate parameter in the Assert block dialog box e Provide output port specifies whether or not the block will feature an output port The type and or rate of the signal presented on the output port is the type and or rate specified for assertion Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes The Output type parameter in this block uses the same description as the Arithmetic Type described in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes The Assert block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE and does not use resources when implemented in hardware Using the Assert block to Resolve Rates and Types In cases where the simulation engine cannot resolve rates or types the Assert block can be used to force
32. Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 273 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reset Generator Reset Generator This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements and Index aL The Reset Generator block captures the user s reset signal that is running at the a system sample rate and produces one or more downsampled reset signal s running f dy at the rates specified on the block Reset Generator The downsampled reset signals are synchronized in the same way as they are during startup The RDY output signal indicates when the downsampled resets are no longer asserted after the input reset is detected Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box shown below can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Reset Generator Xilinx Reset Generator 5 x Captures the user s reset signal that is running at the system sample rate and produces a downsampled reset signal running at the rates specified on the block The downsampled reset signals are synchronized in the same way as they are during startup The RDY output signal indicates when the downsampled resets are no longer asserted after the input reset is detected Specify design sample rates in MATLAB vector format e g 2 4 16 tes Cancel Help Apply 4 You specify the design sample rates in MATLAB vector format
33. During co simulation ports in System Generator drive ports in the HDL simulator and vice versa Types of signals in the tools are not identical and must be translated The rules used for translation are the following e A signal in System Generator can be Boolean unsigned or signed fixed point Fixed point signals can have indeterminate values but Boolean signals cannot If the signal s value is indeterminate in System Generator then all bits of the HDL signal become X otherwise the bits become 0 s and 1 s that represent the signal s value e To bring HDL signals back into System Generator standard logic types are translated into Booleans and fixed point values as instructed by the black box configuration M function When there is a width mismatch an error is reported Indeterminate signals of all varieties weak high weak low etc are translated to System Generator indeterminates Any signal that is partially indeterminate in HDL simulation e g a bit vector in which only the topmost bit is indeterminate becomes entirely indeterminate in System Generator e HDL to System Generator translations can be tailored by adding a custom simulation only top level wrapper to the VHDL component Such a wrapper might for example translate every weak low signal to O or every indeterminate signal to 0 or 1 before it is returned to System Generator An Example The following is an example VHDL entity that can be associated to a System Generat
34. Imaging Imaging Reference Designs 5x5Filter Virtex Line Buffer Virtex2 5 Line Buffer Virtex2 Line Buffer Math Math Reference Designs CORDIC ATAN CORDIC DIVIDER CORDIC LOG CORDIC SINCOS CORDIC SQRT Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 319 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx n tap 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter reference block ES implements a multiply accumulate based FIR filter One dedicated multiplier MACFIR and one Dual Port Block RAM are used in the n tap filter The same MAC engine is used to process both channels that are time division multiplexed TDM together Completely different coefficient sets can be specified for each channel as long as they have the same number of coefficients The filter also provides a fixed decimation by 2 using a polyphase filter technique The filter configuration helps illustrate techniques for storing multiple coefficient sets and data samples in filter design The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures The filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block i
35. Puncturing is selected or it is a Dual Decoder or Block Valid signal is used with the core s_axis_data_tuser_erase port becomes available when External Puncturing is selected on Page2 tab This input bus is used to indicate the presence of a null symbol on the corresponding data_in buses For e g tuser_erase 0 corresponds to data_inO tuser_erase 1 corresponds to data_in1 etc If an erase bit is high the data on the corresponding data_in bus is treated as a null symbol internally to the decoder The width of the erase bus is equal to the output rate of the decoder with a maximum value of 7 s_axis_data_tuser_sel port becomes available when Dual Decoder is selected This is used to select the correct set of convolution codes for the decoding of the input data symbols in the dual decoder case When SEL is low the input data is decoded using the first set of convolution codes When it is high the second set of convolution codes is applied s_axis_data_tuser_block_in port becomes available when Block Valid option is selected on Page 5 tab M_AXIS_DATA Channel e m_axis_data_tvalid TVALID for M_AXIS_DATA channel Output pin always available It indicates whether the output data is valid or not e m_axis_data_tready TREADY for M_AXIS_DATA channel Do not enable or tie high if downstream slave is always able to accept data It becomes available when TREADY option is selected on Page 5 tab e m_axis_data_tdata decoded TDATA for output d
36. This value is presented as the output from the block The output data type is unsigned with ts binary point at zero System Generator The System Generator token serves as a control panel for controlling system and simulation parameters and it is also used to invoke the code generator for netlisting Every Simulink model containing any element from the Xilinx Blockset must contain at least one System Generator token Once a System Generator token is added to a model it is possible to specify how code generation and simulation should be handled Time Division Demultiplexer The Xilinx Time Division Demultiplexer block accepts input serially and presents it to multiple outputs at a slower rate Time Division The Xilinx Time Division Multiplexer block multiplexes values Multiplexer presented at input ports into a single faster rate output stream Up Sample The Xilinx Up Sample block increases the sample rate at the point where the block is placed in your design The output sample period is n where is the input sample period and n is the sampling rate Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 20 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Communication Blocks Table 1 3 Communication Blocks FEC Communication Block Convolution Encoder 8 0 Description The Xilinx Convolution Encoder block implements an encoder for conv
37. Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 56 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX AXI FIFO e integer number of bytes e TDEST Provides routing information for the data stream e TSTRB The byte qualifier that indicates whether the content of the associated byte of TDATA is processed as a data byte or a position byte For a 64 bit DATA bit 0 corresponds to the least significant byte on DATA and bit 7 corresponds to the most significant byte For example o STROBE 0 1b DATA 7 0 is valid o STROBE 7 Ob DATA 63 56 is not valid e TREADY Indicates that the slave can accept a transfer in the current cycle e TID The data stream identifier that indicates different streams of data e TUSER The user defined sideband information that can be transmitted alongside the data stream e TKEEP The byte qualifier that indicates whether the content of the associated byte of TDATA is processed as part of the data stream Associated bytes that have the TKEEP byte qualifier de asserted are null bytes and can be removed from the data stream For a 64 bit DATA bit 0 corresponds to the least significant byte on DATA and bit 7 corresponds to the most significant byte For example e KEEP 0 1b DATA 7 0 is a NULL byte o KEEP 7 Ob DATA 63 56 is not a NULL byte e TLAST Indicates the boundary of a packet e arestn Adds arestn global reset port to the block Data Threshold Parameters e Provide FIFO occupan
38. When the type is x1Boolean additional elements are not needed and must not be supplied For other types width and binary point position must be supplied The quantization and overflow modes are optional but Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 206 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode when one is specified the other must be as well Three values are possible for quantization xlTruncate x1Round and x1RoundBanker The default is x1Truncate Similarly three values are possible for overflow x1Wrap x1Saturate and x1ThrowOverflow For x1lThrowOver flow if an overflow occurs during simulation an exception occurs All values in a type_spec must be known at compilation time equivalently no type_spec value can depend on an input to the function The following is a more elaborate example of an xfix conversion width 10 binpt 4 z xfix xlUnsigned width binpt x y This assignment to x is the result of converting x y to an unsigned fixed point number that is 10 bits wide with 4 fractional bits using x1 Truncate for quantization and x1Wrap for overflow If several xfix calls need the same type_spec value you can assign the type_spec to a variable then use the variable for xfix calls For example the following is allowed proto xlSigned 10 4 x xfix proto a y xfix proto b xfix Properties xl_arith xl_nbits and xl_binpt Each xfix number has three pr
39. and DSP48E Using this block instead of using a technology specific DSP slice helps makes the design more portable between Xilinx technologies Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 29 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Description DSP48E The Xilinx DSP48E block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use supported devices The DSP48E combines an 18 bit by 25 bit signed multiplier with a 48 bit adder and programmable mux to select the adder s input DSP48E1 The Xilinx DSP48E1 block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use 7 series devices Enhancements to the DSP48E1 slice provide improved flexibility and utilization improved efficiency of applications reduced overall power consumption and increased maximum frequency The high performance allows designers to implement multiple slower operations in a single DSP48E1 slice using time multiplexing methods Dual Port RAM The Xilinx Dual Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM Dual ports enable simultaneous access to the memory space at different sample rates using multiple data widths Expression The Xilinx Expression block performs a bitwise logical expression Fast Fourier The Xilinx Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 block implements the Transform 8 0 Cooley Tukey FFT algorithm a computationally efficient me
40. and is 0 easily extended to produce larger filters space accommodating The filter takes advantage of silicon features found in the Virtex family Ea FPGAs such as dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders Ip Filter multipliers and flexible memory architectures Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient Number of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input Input Sample Period Sample period of input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 325 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 4n tap MAC FIR Filter 4n tap MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx 4n tap MAC FIR Filter reference block implements a multiply accumulate based FIR filter The three filter configurations help 64 ta
41. e Pipeline p indicates whether the outputs p and pcout should be registered e Pipeline multiplier indicates whether the internal multiplier should register its output e Pipeline opmode indicates whether the opmode port should be registered e Pipeline alumode indicates whether the alumode port should be registered e Pipeline carry in indicates whether the carry in port should be registered e Pipeline carry in select indicates whether the carry in select port should be registered Reset Enable Ports Parameters specific to the Reset Enable tab are e Reset port for a acin when selected a port rst_a is made available This resets the pipeline register for port a when set to 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 140 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E e Reset port for b bcin when selected a port rst_b is made available This resets the pipeline register for port b when set to 1 Reset port for c when selected a port rst_c is made available This resets the pipeline register for port c when set to 1 e Reset port for multiplier when selected a port rst_m is made available This resets the pipeline register for the internal multiplier when set to 1 e Reset port for P when selected a port rst_p is made available This resets the output register when set to 1 Reset port for carry in when selected a port rst_carryin is made available This resets the pipeline reg
42. e Translate into Output Port Having this box unchecked prevents the gateway from becoming an actual output port when translated into hardware This checkbox is on by default enabling the output port When this option is not selected the Gateway Out block is used only during debugging where its purpose is to communicate with Simulink Sink blocks for probing portions of the design In this case the Gateway Out block will turn gray in color indicating that the gateway will not be translated into an output port e IOB Timing Constraint In hardware a Gateway Out is realized as a set of input output buffers IOBs There are three ways to constrain the timing on IOBs They are None Data Rate and Data Rate Set FAST Attribute If None is selected no timing constraints for the IOBs are put in the user constraint file produced by System Generator This means the paths from the IOBs to synchronous elements are not constrained If Data Rate is selected the IOBs are constrained at the data rate at which the IOBs operate The rate is determined by System Clock Period provided on the System Generator token and the sample rate of the Gateway relative to the other sample periods in the design For example the following OFFSET OUT constraints are generated for a Gateway Out named Dout that is running at the system period of 10 ns Offset out constraints NET Dout 0 OFFSET OUT 10 0 AFTER clk NET Dout 1 OFFSET OUT 10 0 AFTER c
43. reduced The largest possible value should be used for this parameter to keep the core as small as possible e Number of Values This parameter is relevant only when the Selectable column type is selected This parameter defines how many valid selection values have been defined in the COE file You should only add the number of select values you need Column Type e Constant The number of columns is always equal to the Column Constant Value parameter e Variable The number of columns is sampled from the COL input at the start of each new block Column permutations are not supported for the variable column type Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 194 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 e Selectable COL_SEL is sampled at the start of each new block This value is then used to select from one of the possible values for the number of columns provided in the COE file Rectangular Parameters 2 Tab Parameters specific to the Rectangular Parameters 2 tab are as follows Permutations Configuration Row permutations o None This tells System Generator that row permutations are not to be performed o Use COE file This tells System Generator that a row permute vector exists in the COE file and that row permutations are to be performed Remember this is possible only for un pruned interleaver deinterleavers Column permutations o None This tells System Generator that
44. untitled model is created and the System Generator subsystem is inserted into it The xBlock constructor creates an xBlock object The object can be created from a library block or it can be a subsystem An xSignal object corresponds to a wire that connects a source block to a target An xInport object instantiates a Simulink Inport and an xOutport object instantiates a Simulink Outport The API also has one helper function xlsub2script which converts a Simulink diagram to a programmatic generation script The API works in three modes learning mode production mode and debugging mode The learning mode allows you to type in the commands without having a physical script file It is very useful when you learn the API In this mode all blocks ports and subsystems are added into a Simulink model named untiled Please remember to run xBlock without any argument or to close the untitled model before starting a new learning session The production mode has an M function file and is invoked through the xBlock constructor You will have a subsystem generated The subsystem can be either in the existing model or can be inserted in a new model The debugging mode works the same as the production mode except that every time a new object is created or a new connection is established the Simulink diagram is rerouted It is very useful when you debug the script that you set some break points in the script or single step the script Vivado Designin
45. variables This reference block provides a method for implementing a Mealy machine using block and distributed memory The implementation is very fast and efficient For example a state machine with 8 states 1 input and 2 outputs that are registered can be realized with a single block RAM that runs at more than 150 MHz in a Xilinx Virtex device The transition function and output mapping are each represented as an N x M matrix where N is the number of states and M is the size of the input alphabet e g M 2 for a binary input It is convenient to number rows and columns from 0 to N 1 and O to M 1 respectively Each state is represented as an unsigned integer from O to N 1 and each alphabet character is represented as an unsigned integer from 0 to M 1 The row index of each matrix represents the current state and the column index represents the input character For the purpose of discussion let F be the N x M transition function matrix and O be the N x M output function matrix Then F ij is the next state when the current state is and the current input character is j and O 1j is the corresponding output of the Mealy machine Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 365 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Mealy State Machine Example Consider the problem of designing a Mealy machine to recognize the pattern 1011 in a serial stream of bits The state transition diagram and equivalent
46. 16 2012 XILINX ModelSim toward the three second event reveals how System Generator has resolved the dependencies Note the displayed time interval has shrunk to 20 ms hal Systm mialy bu Simulation rom Lluch hyudelsini El 50 LOE ay gl nda wi ths pause Yds Sh de al rg woven J aH Now 29 004 ms Delta 0 sim black_box_ex4_cosim_cw Limited Visibility Region 2986208106661 ps 4 The above figure reveals that System Generator has shifted the rising clock edge so it occurs before the input value is collected from Simulink and presented to the first of the black boxes It then allows the value to propagate through the first black box and presents the result to the second at a slightly later time Zooming in still further shows that the HDL model for the first black box includes a propagation delay which System Generator has Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 229 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ModelSim effectively abstracted away through the use of large time scales The actual delay through the first black box exactly1 ns can be seen in the figure below ml a AA CRAB ops El E Sk Cy DR oy E aa 999 nla va ls A A z 1 YUJU O tada Now 29 004 ms Delta 0 sim black_box_ex4_cosim_cw Limited Visibility Region 2999999999563 ps A In propagating data through black box components System Generator allocates 1 100
47. 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 The rectangular memory array is composed of a number of rows and columns as shown in the following figure Row Colum n 0 1 me C 2 C 1 0 1 R 2 R 1 The Rectangular Block Interleaver operates as follows 1 All the input symbols in an entire block are written row wise left to right starting with the top row 2 Inter row permutations are performed if required 3 Inter column permutations are performed if required 4 The entire block is read column wise top to bottom starting with the left column The Rectangular Block De interleaver operates in the reverse way 1 All the input symbols in an entire block are written column wise top to bottom starting with the left column 2 Inter row permutations are performed if required 3 Inter column permutations are performed if required 4 The entire block is read row wise left to right starting with the top row Refer to the LogiCORE IP Interleaver De interleaver v7 1 Product Guide for examples and more detailed information on the Rectangular Block Interleaver AXI Interface The AXI SID v7 1 has the following interfaces e AnonAXI channel interface for ACLK ACLKEN and ARESETn e AnonAXI channel interface for external memory if enabled e AnonAXI channel interface for miscellaneous events event_tlast_unexpected event_tlast_missing available only in Rectan
48. 435 O Sead d 436 MOE OIE sions ae a Te aa R E A fad ey a dais 436 MSISH Al eii A a Bho BNW SON Ge Ad acter ane 437 MIS WD O a O ARAN 438 XBIOCKHE isis RA A AA A mae aa 439 PG API Examples cocina a a A A ae ee we A 441 Hello World issue corra 441 MACEissios tear rta DA oido 441 MACC in a Masked SubsysteM oo ococococcr een nnn en ete teen ene beeen eens 442 PG API Error Warning Handling amp Messages cc ccc ce cece cece nent ee eeeeneees 447 XBlock Error Messages eiii aie erase a a aaa etme Bee al See 447 xiinport Error Messages naa eiue aa a oda aaa 2 BR aw BA cided bee eee 448 xOutport Error Messages ooococcoooco ee ee en EEEE nE amaaa aara Waa aii a edana 448 XSignal Error Messagg ES es seriinin a ica ca B ADEE ond E a E a 448 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 13 XILINX xsub2script Error Messages saciar A a ia A Alcatel ei daa tide a 449 M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation 0 ccc eee ee cece eee eee e ee eeees 450 Compiling Hardware for Use with M HWCOSIM 06 cece eee een nenene 450 M Hwcosim Simulation Semantics 1 0 0 0 0c ccc enn eet tent e eee n en enes 451 Data Representations ox es giia taia inie A Rhee eek eae dele 451 Interfacing to Hardware from M Code 0 cc eee nananana 451 Automatic Generation of M Hwcosim Testbench 06 0 cece cence tence eee eens 452 Resource Management 0 ccc ccc
49. Filter mask flink MAC based FIR filter with n coefficients fdatool_example Paameters Coefficients dfda_numerator FDAT ool 51 tap 7 we MAC FIR Number of Bits per Coefficien 12 Binary Point for Coefficient 11 From Gatewsy In Workspace gt FDATool System Generator FDAToal n tap MAC FIR Filter Number of Bits per Input Sample 12 Binary Point for Input Samples Note that x1fda_numerator can equally well be used to initialize a memory block or a coefficient variable for a masked subsystem containing an FIR filter This block does not use any hardware resources Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 164 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FDATool FDA Tool Interface Double clicking the icon in your Simulink model opens up an FDATool session and its graphical user interface Upon closing the FDATool session the underlying FDATool object is stored in the UserData parameter of the Xilinx FDATool block Use the xlfda_numerator helper function and get_param to extract information from the object as desired Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 165 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIFO FIFO This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx FIFO block implements an FIFO memory queue Values
50. Interface Block Parameters Dialog Box Page 1 tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Channel A Options e Has TLAST Adds a tlast input port to the A channel of the block e Has TUSER Adds a tuser input port to the A channel of the block Channel B Options e Has TLAST Adds a tlast input port to the B channel of the block e Has TUSER Adds a tuser input port to the B channel of the block Multiplier Construction Options e Use _Mults Use embedded multipliers XtremeDSP slices e Use_LUTs Use LUTs in the fabric to construct multipliers Optimization Goal Only available if Use_Mults is selected e Resources Uses the 3 real multiplier structure However a 4 real multiplier structure is used when the 3 I multiplier structure uses more multiplier resources Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 80 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 e Performance Always uses the 4 real multiplier structure to allow the best frequency performance to be achieved Flow Control Options e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel e NonBlocking Selects Non Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Page 2 tab Output Product
51. ModelSim if appropriate when the simulation is complete Note The ModelSim block only supports symbolic radix in the ModelSim tool In symbolic radix ModelSim displays the actual values of an enumerated type and also converts an object s value to an appropriate representation for other radix forms Please refer to the ModelSim documentation for more information on symbolic radix Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Run co simulation in directory ModelSim is started in the directory named by this field The directory is created if necessary All black box files are copied into this directory as are the auxiliary files System Generator produces for co simulation Existing files are overwritten silently The directory can be specified as an absolute or relative path Relative paths are interpreted with respect to the directory in which the Simulink mdl file resides Open waveform viewer When this checkbox is selected the ModelSim waveform window opens automatically displaying a standard set of signals The signals include all inputs and outputs of all black boxes and all clock and clock enable signals supplied by System Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 225 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ModelSim Generator The signal display can be customized with a
52. N where length M corresponds to the number of inPorts specified in initExec and length n corresponds to the nCycles All port data for the same execution cycle is stored in the same column For example the m n element of the inData matrix corresponds to the n 1 th cycle data sample for the m th input ports specified in the execution M Hwcosim Shared Memory MATLAB Class Shmem The Shmem MATLAB class provides an interface into shared memories embedded in hardware co simulation objects Actions Syntax Constructor m Shmem memName Destructor release m Write data write m addresses inData m addresses inData Read data outData read m addresses outData m addresses Set properties set m prop data Get properties data get m prop Constructor Syntax m Shmem memName Description Creates an object handle to a Shared Memory or Shared Register object The argument is the name of the shared memory as defined in the System Generator model This is a global object and only one shared memory of a particular name can exist at a time Destructor Syntax release m Description Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 461 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Releases the resources used by the Shmem object Write data Syntax write m addresses inData m addresses inData Description When w
53. No read on write Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Block Memory Generator v6 3 LogiCORE IP Distributed Memory Generator v6 3 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 153 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Expression Expression This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Math and Index The Xilinx Expression block performs a bitwise logical expression Y DO The expression is specified with operators described in the table below The number of input ports is inferred from the expression The input port labels are identified from the expression and the block is subsequently labeled accordingly For example the expression al a2 amp b1 b2 results in the following block with 4 input ports labeled al a2 b1 and b2 Expression 2 m a1 22 amp b1 b2 The expression is parsed and an equivalent statement is written in VHDL or Verilog Shown below in decreasing order of precedence are the operators that can be used in the Expression block Operator Symbol Precedence 0 NOT AND amp OR XOR ix Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic ta
54. Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Overflow and Quantization When user defined precision is selected errors can result from overflow or quantization Overflow errors occur when a value lies outside the representable range Quantization errors occur when the number of fractional bits is insufficient to represent the fractional portion of a value The Xilinx fixed point data type supports several options for user defined precision For overflow the options are to Saturate to the largest positive smallest negative value to Wrap for example to discard bits to the left of the most significant representable bit or to Flag as error an overflow as a Simulink error during simulation Flag as error is a simulation only feature The hardware generated is the same as when Wrap is selected For quantization the options are to Round to the nearest representable value or to the value furthest from zero if there are two equidistant nearest representable values or to Truncate for example to discard bits to the right of the least significant representable bit The following is an image showing the Quantization and Overflow options Quantization Truncate Round unbiased Inf Round unbiased even values Overflow Wrap Saturate Flag as error Round unbiased inf also known as Symmetric Round towards inf or Symmetric Round away from zero This is similar to the Matlab round function This method
55. Output Type to Boolean To check for data type mismatches click on the Simulink model canvas and enter Ctrl D System Generator will report on all the data type mismatches if there are any Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 429 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx View Signal Xilinx View Signal Allows you to generate a waveform diagram of selected signals after a Simulink simulation is run How to Use Single Selection 1 As shown below select the signal you want to view and right click 2 Select Xilinx View Signal File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help D sce S ael ESTA fico Noma JR AS E Bain Xilinx BlockAdd Xilinx BlockConnect Multiple Selection 1 Right click on a blank space in the design to bring up the right click menu W integrate i File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help D e S tAE P Q pr fioo Noma 1S3eR84 2BBE Xilinx BlockAdd Xilinx BlockConnect Can t Redo Paste Paste Duplicate Inport Select All Remove Highlighting Highlight gt 2 Select Xilinx View Signals to bring up the signals selection dialog box with all the possible signal selections on the left and the selected signals on the right Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 430 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx View Signal 3 Double click on a signal to either added or removed the signa
56. Parallel input This field specifies whether the reloadable input seed is shifted in one bit at a time or if it happens in parallel Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 200 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Logical Logical This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Math and Index The Xilinx Logical block performs bitwise logical operations on fixed point numbers Operands are zero padded and sign extended as necessary to make binary point positions coincide then the logical operation is performed and the result is delivered Logical at the output port and In hardware this block is implemented as synthesizable VHDL If you build a tree of logical gates this synthesizable implementation is best as it facilitates logic collapsing in synthesis and mapping Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Logical function specifies one of the following bitwise logical operators AND NAND OR NOR XOR XNOR Number of inputs specifies the number of inputs 2 1024 Output Type tab Parameters specific to the Output Type tab are as follows Align binary point specifies that the block must a
57. Provide enable port Latency This defines the number of sample periods by which the block s output is delayed Parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 237 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Opmode Opmode This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries DSP and Index The Xilinx Opmode block generates a constant that is a DSP48A DSP48 DS48E or DSP48E1 instruction The instruction is an 11 bit value for the DSP48 8 bit forDSP48A 15 bit value for the DSP48E and a 20 bit value for DSP48E1 The instruction can consists of the opmode carry in carry in select inmode and either the subtract or alumode bits depending upon the selection of DSP48 or DSP48E type Opmode The Opmode block is useful for generating DSP48A DSP48 DS48E or DSP48E1 control sequences The figure below shows an example The example implements a 35x35 bit multiplier using a sequence of four instructions in a DSP48 block The opmode blocks supply the desired instructions to a multiplexer that selects each instruction in the desired sequence P P gt gt 17 4 B P P A B P P gt gt 17 A4 B Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Opmode tab Parameters specific to the Opmode tab are as follows Instruction e Device
58. Range Select the output bit width The values are automatically set to provide the full precision product when the A and B operand widths are set The output is sign extended if required The natural output width for complex multiplication is APortWidth BPortWidth 1 When the Output Width is set to be less than this the most significant bits of the result are those output the remaining bits will either be truncated or rounded according to Output Rounding option selected That is to say the output MSB is now fixed at APortWidth BPortWidth For details please refer to the Complex Multiplier v4 0datasheet Output Rounding If rounding is required the Output LSB must be greater than zero e Truncate Truncate the output e Random_Rounding When this option is selected a ctrl_tvalid and ctrl_tdata input port is added to the block Bit 0 if ctrl_tdata input determines the particular type if rounding for the operation See the section of the Complex Multiplier 4 0 Product Specification for a full explanation Channel CTRL Options The following options are activated when Random Rounding is selected e Has TLAST Adds a ctrl_tlast input port to the block e Has TUSER Adds a ctrl_user input port to the block e TUSER Width Specifies the bit width of the ctrl_tuser input port Output TLAST Behavior Determines the behavior of the dout_tlast output port e Null Output is null Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx
59. Sead a ass 285 Block Interface raiu a iaa A A aia 285 Block Parameters orar aaa eto 285 Write Modes enter un Diva read A as taa adas 286 Hardware Notes a iia 287 LogiCORE Documentation a 287 Single Step Simulation s s 000000000000 a a a a ee a es 288 Block Parameters 00 aa ete 288 li fe a aga a ea N R S 289 Block Parameters aaa das a ica dedicas 289 SqUAFeROOt iria SAA AAA AAA eee 291 Block PAraMeters pitan e o 291 LogiCORE Documentation aio 292 System Generator iii e A a A a 293 Token ParameterS o o o cn tetis a e nen tent nnn beeen eee a teen nnees 293 Threshold oss 6cc een eases ees a acta a RON SOS EEA Oe ak Hed HOS SEE ROS 299 BlockiParaMeters nuda dias cdo 299 Xilinx LogiCORE 030 AA A a daa 299 Time Division Demultiplexer oo oooooooocorocrnrcnrcarccoo cr 300 Block Interface ssn A a a a 300 Block PArAMETES ui a a caida aiii do decida 301 Time Division Multiplexer 0 0 0 ccc cc cc ee eee eee eee rro 302 BlockiIntertaces s tcs tas ad is lag aah a bad 302 Block Parameters 0 000 a ide 302 TOOID al seses a e a E A a A EOE 303 Block La ic e ia a 303 MOO DArIMIOMUS sce scx knee rra ld a a Spat ted ce hash a halon ba 304 RETEFEM CES 525 55 5 o5 cesses dase atse sess usa wed tada 305 SECAS rr A A A ta 305 Up Sample ooo A A A A AS 306 Block INTE TACO naco a A A baaa 306 Block Parametros ro od a di iio neli a 307 Vivado AUS o 00000 A A A Oe eee we 308 Block Parameters Dialog BOX
60. Simulation release h Check simulation result for each output port logfile multi_rates_cw_hwcosim_test results logfd fopen logfile w sim_ok true sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok sim_ok fclose logfd if sim_ok error Found errors in simulation results Please refer to s for details r check_result logfd pb00 testdata_pb00 result_pb00 check_result logfd pb01 testdata_pb01 result_pb01 check_result logfd pb02 testdata_pb02 result_pb02 r check_result logfd pb03 testdata_pb03 result_pb03 check_result logfd pb04 testdata_pb04 result_pb04 1 PER logfile end catch err lasterr try release h end error Error running hardware co simulation testbench s err end function ok check_result fd portname expected actual ok false fprintf fd n repmat 1 95 n fprintf fd Output s n n portname Check the number of data values nvals_expected numel expected nvals_actual numel actual if nvals_expected nvals_actual fprintf fd The number of simulation output values d differs from the number of reference values d n J nvals_actual nvals_expected return end Check for simulation mismatches mismatches find expected actual num_mismatches numel mismatches if num_mismatches gt 0 fprintf fd Number of simulat
61. Television Systems Committee standard 207 187 shortened RS code G 709 implements G 709 Optical Transport Network standard CCSDS implements CCSDS Consultative Committee for Space Data Systems standard 255 223 full length RS code IESS 308 All implements IESS 308 INTELSAT Earth Station Standard specification all shortened RS code IESS 308 126 implements IESS 308 INTELSAT Earth Station Standard specification 126 112 shortened RS code IESS 308 194 implements IESS 308 specification 194 178 shortened RS code IESS 308 208 implements IESS 308 specification 208 192 shortened RS code IESS 308 219 implements IESS 308 specification 219 201 shortened RS code IESS 308 225 implements IESS 308 specification 225 205 shortened RS code IEEE 802 16d implements IEEE 802 16d specification 255 239 full length RS code Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 260 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 Symbol width tells the width in bits for symbols in the code The encoder support widths from 3 to 12 Field polynomial specifies the polynomial from which the symbol field is derived It must be specified as a decimal number This polynomial must be primitive A value of zero indicates the default polynomial should be used Default polynomials are listed in the table below Symbol Width aid Array Representation 3
62. a b c d xl_not x Z NKK Shift Operators xl_rsh and xl_ish Functions x1_1sh and x1_rsh allow you to shift a sequence of bits of a fixed point number The function is in the form x xl_lsh a n andx xl_rsh a n where a isa xfix value andn is the number of bits to shift Left or right shift the fixed point number by n number of bits The right shift x1_rsh moves the fixed point number toward the least significant bit The left shift x1_1sh function moves the fixed point number toward the most significant bit Both shift functions are a full precision shift No bits are discarded and the precision of the output is adjusted as needed to accommodate the shifted position of the binary point Here are some examples oe left shift a 5 bits xfix xlSigned 20 16 xlRound xlWrap 3 1415926 xl_rsh a 5 a b The output b is of type x1 Signed with 21 bits and the binary point located at bit 21 Slice Function xl_slice Function x1_slice allows you to access a sequence of bits of a fixed point number The function is in the form x xl_slice a from_bit to_bit Each bit of a fixed point number is consecutively indexed from zero for the LSB up to the MSB For example given an 8 bit wide number with binary point position at zero the LSB is indexed as 0 and the MSB is indexed as 7 The block will throw an error if the from_bit or to_bit arguments are out of the bit index range of the input number The result of
63. a register block that drives an output gateway All DAC control signals are appropriately wired to constants The DAC block must be driven by a 14 bit Xilinx fixed point signal with the binary point at position 13 The output port of the DAC block produces a signal of type double In hardware a component that drives a DAC block input will drive one of the two 14 bit AD9772A digital to analog converter devices on the BenAdda board When a System Generator model that uses DAC block is translated into hardware the DAC block is translated into a top level output port on the model HDL The appropriate pin location constraints are added in the BenAdda constraints file thereby ensuring the output port drives the appropriate DAC pins A free running clock should be used when a hardware co simulation model contains a DAC block In addition the programmable clock speed should not be set higher than 64 MHz Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the DAC block are e Sample Period specifies the sample period for the block Data Sheet A data sheet for the AD9772A device is provided in the directory to which the XtremeDSP development kit has been installed If FUSE denotes the directory containing the FUSE software the data sheet can be found in the following location FUSE XtremeDSP Development Kit Docs Datasheets DAC AD9772A pdf Vivado Des
64. a signal object that connects a source to targets The constructor Sig xSignal sig_name creates an xSignal object with name sig_name sigl sig2 sig3 xSignal namel name2 name2 creates a list of signals with names and Sig xSignal creates an xSignal for which a name is automatically generated An xSignal object can be passed for port binding METHODS Sig bind obj connects the obj to sig where sig is an xSignal object and obj is an xSignal or an xInport object src sig getSrc returns a cell array of the source objects that are driving the xSignal object The cell array can have at most one element If the source is an input port the source object is an xInport object If the source is an output port of a block the source object is a struct having two fields block and port The block field is an xBlock object and the port field is the port index dst sig getDst Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 437 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator API for Programmatic Generation returns a cell array of the destination objects that the xSignal object is driving Each element can be either a struct or an xOutport object It is defined same as the return value of the get Src method xlsub2script xlsub2script is a helper function that converts a subsystem into the top level of a Sysgen script xlsub2script subsystem converts the subsystem into the top
65. allows you to choose what to do with the additional samples produced by the increased clock rate By selecting Copy Samples the same sample is duplicated copied during the extra sample times If this checkbox is not selected the additional samples are zero Optional Ports o Provide enable port When checked this option adds an en enable input port if the Latency is specified as a positive integer greater than zero e Latency This defines the number of sample periods by which the block s output is delayed One sample period can correspond to multiple clock cycles in the corresponding FPGA implementation for example when the hardware is over clocked with respect to the Simulink model The user defined sample latency is handled in the Upsample block by placing shift registers that are clock enabled at the input sample rate on the input of the block The behavior of an Upsample block with non zero latency is similar to putting a delay block with equivalent latency at the input of an Upsample block with zero latency Parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 307 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Vivado HLS Vivado HLS This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control and Index included in a System Generator design The Vivado HLS design can include C C Ea The Xilinx V
66. alumode register is made available Enable port for multiplier carry in when selected an enable port mult_carry_in for the multiplier register is made available Enable port for controls opmode and carry_in_sel when selected the enable port ce_ctrl is made available The port ce_ctrl controls the opmode and carry in select registers Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 141 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E Implementation Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are Use synthesizable model when selected the DSP48E is implemented from an RTL description which might not map directly to the DSP48E hardware This is useful if a design using the DSP48E block is targeted at device families that do not contain DSP48E hardware primitives Mode of operation for the adder subtractor this mode can be used to implement small add subtract functions at high speed and lower power with less logic utilization The adder and subtracter in the adder subtracted logic unit can also be split into two 24 bit fields or four12 bit fields This is achieved by setting the mode of operation to Two 24 bit adders or Four 12 bit adders Use adder only when selected the block is optimized in hardware for maximum performance without using the multiplier If an instruction using the multiplier is encountered in simulation an error is reported Other parameters used by this block are explained in t
67. and one output port The input port can be any size The output port size is indicated on the block parameters dialog box Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Input order Least or most significant word first e Arithmetic type Signed or unsigned output e Number of bits Output width which must be a multiple of the number of input bits e Binary point Output binary point location Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 280 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Serial to Parallel An error is reported when the number of output bits cannot be divided evenly by the number of input bits The minimum latency for this block is zero Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 281 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Shift Shift This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Data Types Math and Index The Xilinx Shift block performs a left or right shift on the input signal The result will have the same fixed point container as that of the input Shift Block Parameters Parameters specific to the Shift block are e Shift direction specifies a direction Left or Right The Right shift m
68. and splits it into N time multiplexed output words where N is the ratio of number of input bits to output bits The order of x the output can be either least significant bit first or most significant bit first arallel to isl The following waveform illustrates the block s behavior TOR a a Din 1011 x 0110 x Output ork 1l 421 f3l fal 11 121 f3L aLL 12 mwek ____J L Y T This example illustrates the case where the input width is 4 output word size is 1 and the block is configured to output the most significant word first Block Interface The Parallel to Serial block has one input and one output port The input port can be any size The output port size is indicated on the block parameters dialog box Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Output order Most significant word first or least significant word first e Type signed or unsigned e Number of bits Output width Must divide Number of Input Bits evenly e Binary Point Binary point location The minimum latency of this block is 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 244 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Parallel to Serial Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System
69. as shown above Any number of ouputs can be specified Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 274 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ROM ROM This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Memory Floating Point and Index The Xilinx ROM block is a single port read only memory ROM Values are stored by word and all words have the same arithmetic type width and binary point position Each word is associated with exactly one address An address can be any unsigned fixed point integer from 0 to d 1 where d denotes the ROM depth number of words The memory contents are specified through a block parameter The block has one input port for the memory address and one output port for data out The address port must be an unsigned fixed point integer The block has two possible Xilinx LogiCORE implementations using either distributed or block memory ROM Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Depth specifies the number of words stored must be a positive integer Initial value vector specifies the initial value When the vector is longer than the ROM depth the vector s trailing elements are discarded When the ROM is deeper than the vector length the ROM s trailing words are set to zero The initial value vect
70. as the CORDIC algorithm is only valid over the first quadrant An inverse coarse rotation stage rotates the output sample into the correct quadrant Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 98 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC 5 0 The CORDIC algorithm introduces a scale factor to the amplitude of the result and the CORDIC core provides the option of automatically compensating for the CORDIC scale factor Changes from CORDIC 4 0 to CORDIC 5 0 AXI compliant e The CORDIC 5 0 block is AXI compliant Ports Renamed e entoaclken rst to aresetn e rdy maps to dout_tready cartesian_tready and phase_tready are automatically added when their respective channels are added e x _in to cartesian_tdata_real e y_in to cartesian_tdata_imag e phase_in to phase_tdata_phase e x out to dout_tdata_real e y_out to dout_tdata_imag e phase_out to dout_tdata_phase Port Changes e The data output ports are not optional in CORDIC 5 0 The data output ports are selected based on the Function selected e There are separate tuser tlast and tready ports for the Cartesian and Phase input channels e The dout_tlast output port can be configured to provide tlast from the Cartesian input channel from the Phase input channel or the AND and or the OR of all tlasts Optimization e When you select Blocking mode for the AXI behavior you can then select whether the core is configured for minimum Resources
71. atacada 236 Opmode iu a a a A 238 Block Parameters 0 402 at a A A a pee aun cele iaa a Sadek dw 238 XIN Log CORE toria A aaa 239 DSP48E Control Instruction ForMat o oocoooconooco ee nee ence tenn en en eee nens 239 DSP48E1 Control Instruction ForMat 0 cc ee unae na een en ene nen e nen 241 Parallel to Serial nia Se Minh e A A A hohe lene Be 244 Block InterTace iii aaa lada 044 ada ele dad 244 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Blo k Parameters 00 00 dada ica 244 Pause Simulations scada ad ada ans cada 246 Block Parameters 1000 a A till db 246 PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display oooooooocococrccrcnananoca ccoo 247 Block Interface lt lt eee 247 Block Parameters car ar ii A a bid efi Aye 247 Xilinx LOgiCORE o o o o oooo eee eee nee ee ee ee eee eee beeen aaa aa ai a ia 247 PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller 1 0 2c ccc cece cece eee eee eee e eee e enn eeeeeeeeens 248 BlOCk Interface a ada ae 249 Block Parameter S cios ia a A A A did ate ade 250 How to Use the PicoBlaze Assembler 0 cece ee ee teen teen ee teen tenn nen nees 251 PicoBlaze6 Microprocessor Online Documentation 0 ee een eee n eens 251 PUM GUUM e esere cis maa E a a os we da aba 6 Gc ace leave a vidas 252 Block Parameters ui Beara lg Alas Betas A a Sandor Beebe 252 Reciprocal ico ia A e ENEE A ANENA el ach eae wave dae 254 BIOCK PAramete
72. black box can be used to incorporate either VHDL or Verilog into a Simulink model Black box HDL can be co simulated with Simulink using the System Generator interface to either ISE Simulator or the ModelSim simulation software from Model Technology Inc You can find more information on this topic in the documentation for the ModelSim block and in the topic HDL Co Simulation In addition to incorporating HDL into a System Generator model the black box can be used to define the implementation associated with an external simulation model e g Hardware Co Simulation Blocks System Generator also includes several Black Box Examples that demonstrate the capabilities and use of the black box Requirements on HDL for Black Boxes Every HDL component associated with a black box must adhere to the following System Generator requirements and conventions e The entity name must not collide with any entity name that is reserved by System Generator e g xlfir xlregister e Bi directional ports are supported in HDL black boxes however they will not be displayed in the System Generator as ports they will only appear in the generated HDL after netlisting Please refer to the topic for more information e Fora Verilog Black Box the module and port names must be lower case and follow standard Verilog naming conventions e Fora VHDL Black Box the supported port data types are std_logic and std_logic_vector e Top level ports should be ord
73. block is set to sample the first or last value in a frame Sample First Value in Frame In this case two registers are required to correctly sample the input stream The first register is enabled by the adjusted clock enable signal so that it samples the input at the start of the input frame The second register samples the contents of the first register at the end of the sample period to ensure output data is aligned correctly Sample Last Value in Frame The most efficient implementation is used when the Down Sample block is configured to sample the last value of the frame In this case a register samples the data input data at the end of the frame The sampled value is presented for the duration of the next frame Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 129 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Down Sample Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are e Sampling Rate number of input samples per output sample must be an integer greater or equal to 2 This is the ratio of the output sample period to the input and is essentially a sample rate divider For example a ratio of 2 indicates a 2 1 division of the input sample rate If a non integer ratio is desired the Up Sample block can be used in combination with the Down Sample block e Sample The Down Sample block can sampl
74. block the supports the AXI4 Interface Basic Element Blocks Includes standard building blocks for digital logic Communication Blocks Includes forward error correction and modulator blocks commonly used in digital communications systems Control Logic Blocks Includes blocks for control circuitry and state machines Data Type Blocks Includes blocks that convert data types includes gateways DSP Blocks Includes Digital Signal Processing DSP blocks Floating Point Blocks Includes blocks that support the Floating Point data type as well as other data types Only a single data type is supported at a time For example a floating point input produces a floating point output a fixed point input produces a fixed point output Index Blocks Includes All System Generator blocks Math Blocks Includes blocks that implement mathematical functions Memory Blocks Includes blocks that implement and access memories Tool Blocks Includes Utility blocks e g code generation System Generator token resource estimation HDL co simulation etc Each block has a background color that indicates the following Background Color Meaning Blue Block Goes into the FPGA fabric and is free Block Goes into the FPGA fabric and is a Licensed Core Go to the Xilinx Green web site to purchase the Core license Yellow Blocks on the boundary of your design like Gatew
75. by storing cores generated from Xilinx Core Generator then recalls those files when reuse is possible xlCache cleardiskcache Clears the disk cache The disk cache speeds up execution by tagging and storing files related to simulation and generation then recalls those files during subsequent simulation and generation rather than rerunning the time consuming tools used to create those files xlCache cleartargetcache Rehashes the compilation target plugin cache The compilation target plugin cache needs to be rehashed when a new compilation target plugin is added or an existing target is changed xlCache clearusertemp Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 391 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlCache Clears the contents in the usertemp directory The usertemp directory is used by System Generator to store temporary files used during simulation or netlisting They are kept on disk for debugging purposes and can be safely deleted without any impact on performance maxsize xlCache getdiskcachesize Returns the maximum amount of disk space used by the disk cache By default the disk cache uses 500MB of disk space to store files You should set the SYSGEN_CACHE_SIZE environment variable to the size of the cache in megabytes You should set this number to a higher value when working on several large designs maxentries xlCache getdiskcacheentries Returns the maximum nu
76. case 0 if din 1 state 1 end end Reset and Enable Signals for State Variables The MCode block can automatically infer register reset and enable signals for state variables when conditional assignments to the variables contain two or fewer branches For example the following M code infers an enable signal for conditional assignment of persistent State variable r1 function myFn aFn en a persistent r1 rl xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 2 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 220 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX myFn r1 if en rl ri a else el 1 end There are two branches in the conditional assignm MCode ent to persistent state variable r1 A register is used to perform the conditional assignment The input of the register is connected to r1 a the output of the register is r1 The register s enable signal is inferred the enable signal is connected to en when en is asserted Persistent state variable r1 is assigned to r1 a when en evaluates to fa de asserted resulting in the assignment of r1 to r lse the enable signal on the register is The following M code will also infer an enable signal on the register used to perform the conditional assignment function myFn aFn en a persistent rl rl xl_state 0 myFn r1 if en rl rl a end xlUnsigned 2 0 An enable is inferred instead of a reset because the conditional assignment of persis
77. characteristics of the code stat_tdata_en_found stat_tdata_fail output_tready event_s_input_tlast_ missing events input tlast_unexpected Reed Solomon codes are Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH codes which in turn are linear block codes An n k linear block code is a k dimensional sub space of an n dimensional vector space over a finite field Elements of the field are called symbols For a Reed Solomon code n ordinarily is 25 1 where s is the width in bits of each symbol When the code is shortened n is smaller The decoder handles both full length and shortened codes It is also able to handle erasures that is symbols that are known with high probability to contain errors events ctrl idata_ invalid Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 When the decoder processes a block there are three possibilities 1 The information symbols are recovered This is the case provided 2p r lt n k where p Is the number of errors and r is the number of erasures 2 The decoder reports it is unable to recover the information symbols 3 The decoder fails to recover the information symbols but does not report an error The probability of each possibility depends on the code and the nature of the communications channel Simulink provides excellent tools for modeling channels and estimating these probabilities BIOCk Interface Channels and Pins The Xilinx Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 block is AXI4 compliant The following describes the standa
78. circuits with AXI4 Stream compliant interfaces for supported devices Divider Generator 4 0 The Xilinx Divider Generator 4 0 block creates a circuit for integer division based on Radix 2 non restoring division or High Radix division with prescaling Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 The Xilinx Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 block implements the Cooley Tukey FFT algorithm a computationally efficient method for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT In addition the block provides an AXI4 Stream compliant interface FIR Compiler 6 3 The Xilinx FIR Compiler 6 3 block provides users with a way to generate highly parameterizable area efficient high performance FIR filters with an AXI4 Stream compliant interface Interleaver De interle aver 7 1 The Xilinx Interleaver Deinterleaver block implements an interleaver or a deinterleaver using an AXI4 compliant block interface An interleaver is a device that rearranges the order of a sequence of input symbols The term symbol is used to describe a collection of bits In some applications a symbol is a single bit In others a symbol is a bus Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 17 XILINX Table 1 1 AXI4 Blocks Organ
79. complex multipliers for devices based on user specified options Concat The Xilinx Concat block performs a concatenation of n bit vectors represented by unsigned integer numbers for example n unsigned numbers with binary points at position zero Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 28 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Configurable Subsystem Manager Description The Xilinx Configurable Subsystem Manager extends Simulink s configurable subsystem capabilities to allow a subsystem configurations to be selected for hardware generation as well as for simulation Constant The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can be a fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Convert The Xilinx Convert block converts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value Convolution Encoder 8 0 The Xilinx Convolution Encoder block implements an encoder for convolution codes Ordinarily used in tandem with a Viterbi decoder this block performs forward error correction FEC in digital communication systems This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard
80. connected to all available reset ports based on the pipeline selections Provide global enable port when selected the optional en port is made available This port is connected to all available enable ports based on the pipeline selections Provide pcin port when selected the pcin port is exposed The pcin port must be connected to the pcout port of another DSP48 block Provide carry cascade in port when selected the carry cascade in port is exposed This port can only be connected to a carry cascade out port on another DSP48E block Provide multiplier sign cascade in port when selected the multiplier sign cascade in port multsigncascin is exposed This port can only be connected to a multiplier sign cascade out port of another DSP48E block Provide carryout port when selected the carryout output port is made available When the mode of operation for the adder subtractor is set to one 48 bit adder the carryout port is 1 bit wide When the mode of operation is set to two 24 bit adders the carryout port is 2 bits wide The MSB corresponds to the second adder s carryout and the LSB corresponds to the first adder s carryout When the mode of operation is set to four 12 bit adders the carryout port is 4 bits wide with the bits corresponding to the addition of the 48 bit input split into 4 12 bit sections Provide pattern detect port when selected the pattern detection output port is provided When the pattern either from the mask or
81. da a i a aaa e e ae pa a i a i dee ds 392 XIContigureSolVer cererea nr a de a id ie 393 A wee He whew E E ee eee ecw haeel ede E ew Aya ae cd aa a E E 393 Descriptio nei atado a e cate iaaa Te eds scorn ac 393 Examples 3 wro me beak eee eee A See coc de bh Modes A eee eich aceite a 393 Xl dda denominator sie sess scs sis feces ce dic a s fo aes A oe ae ute aie So are cade wea 394 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX SM sn ze aos uote ae kee a a Bae Rha A id a ada 394 DO SCID ENO ari A AA eae A lolis 394 SESAO a A A A oa aan 394 xlfda_ numerator ico A a SE ee 395 SYNTAX AN 395 Deseriptio ora rra e td cd 395 See AISO parta Bead a ARA AA a iaa 395 xIGenerateBUttON ccoo ia is a Re Sas ae ee we Bee 396 SYNT saapa derrocar balas adidas at 396 Descrip ra aliada Sie tegen ask A isa 396 SeS NN 396 xIgetparam and xlsetparam v ocio ci ao Sin eres a e eee Ii a t ees 397 SV IMEX E NE 397 DESCRIP EO Metin 25 2 bee ii a A wiles A A A A a a dl a a 397 Examples siii a ee 398 SAO iria a rin ii AAA AAA ad ros aniline daa 398 XIBOTDAFAMS 20000000000 0 id aa de aoe uals Secs Sys Salad AR AA AA A 399 SVNtaX O AN 399 Descriptio ies siea laaaa dae 399 EXAMPLES vb a A A A A Aid 399 NN AA 400 xIGetReloadOrder oociooiioiois cios sees s cee eee eee ee eS eee De ee ES eS 401 SYNTAX sean ado Meee AAA qe dea AA Se LAW taa a A Deda ac 401 DESCMPION rival de Ad A A tc aaa elas
82. data type is supported System Generator The System Generator token serves as a control panel for controlling system and simulation parameters and it is also used to invoke the code generator for netlisting Every Simulink model containing any element from the Xilinx Blockset must contain at least one System Generator token Once a System Generator token is added to a model it is possible to specify how code generation and simulation should be handled Threshold The Xilinx Threshold block tests the sign of the input number If the input number is negative the output of the block is 1 otherwise the output is 1 The output is a signed fixed point integer that is 2 bits long The block has one input and one output Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 33 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Time Division Demultiplexer Description The Xilinx Time Division Demultiplexer block accepts input serially and presents it to multiple outputs at a slower rate Time Division Multiplexer The Xilinx Time Division Multiplexer block multiplexes values presented at input ports into a single faster rate output stream Toolbar The Xilinx Toolbar block provides quick access to several useful utilities in System Generator The Toolbar simplifies the use of the zoom feature in Simulink and adds n
83. e Null Output is null o Pass_A_TLAST Pass the value of the a_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port o Pass B_TLAST Pass the value of the b_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port e Pass CTRL_TLAST Pass the value of the ctrl_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port e OR_all_TLASTS Pass the logical OR of all the present TLAST input ports o AND_all_TLASTS Pass the logical AND of all the present TLAST input ports Exception Signals e UNDERFLOW Adds an output port that serves as an underflow flag e OVERFLOW Adds an output port that serves as an overflow flag INVALID_OP Adds an output port that serves as an invalid operation flag e DIVIDE_BY_ZERO Adds an output port that serves as a divide by zero flag Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 124 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Divider Generator 4 0 Divider Generator 4 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP Math and Index The Xilinx Divider Generator 4 0 block creates a circuit for integer division based on Radix 2 non restoring division or High Radix division with prescaling gt dividend_tvalid dout_tvalid f gt gt dividend_tdata_dividend dout_tdata_quotient f gt diviso
84. ee ee eee ee eee eee teen tee nett eee eens 455 M Hwcosim MATLAB Class c 0 ccc een een een n teen ete e beeen EE Eai Ea 455 M Hwcosim Shared Memory MATLAB Class 0 1 0 0 ccc cece ence een en en eee n eens 461 M Hwcosim Shared FIFO MATLAB Class 0 06 ccc cece eee nnn teen ene een nnnes 463 M Hwcosim Utility Functions 0 0 o 464 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx Blockset Organization of Blockset Libraries Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Block Reference Pages Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Chapter 1 Describes how the Xilinx blocks are organized into libraries Describes block parameters that are common to most blocks in the Xilinx blockset Alphabetical listing of the Xilinx blockset with detailed descriptions of each block www xilinx com 15 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Organization of Blockset Libraries The Xilinx Blockset contains building blocks for constructing DSP and other digital systems in FPGAs using Simulink The blocks are grouped into libraries according to their function and some blocks with broad applicability e g the Gateway I O blocks are linked into multiple libraries The following libraries are provided Library Description Index Includes every block in the Xilinx Blockset AXI4 Blocks Includes every
85. else and variable z is not available because the switch statement has no otherwise part DEBUG MCode There are two ways to debug your MCode One is to insert disp functions in your code and enable printing the other is to use the MATLAB debugger For usage of the disp function please reference the topic disp If you want to use the MATLAB debugger you need to check the Enable MATLAB debugging option on the Advanced tab of the MCode block parameters dialog box Then you can open your MATLAB function with the MATLAB editor set break points and debug your M function Just be aware that every time you modify your script you need to execute aclear functions command in the MATLAB console To start debugging your M function you need to first check the Enable MATLAB debugging checkbox on the Advanced tab of the MCode block parameters dialog then click the OK or Apply button E MCode Xilinx MCade Block DER Pass input values to a MATLAB function for evaluation in Klink fixed point ype The input ports of Ihe block are input arguments of Ihe function The output ports of the block aie output arguments of the function Basic Interface Advanced Implementation Simulalion Overds with daubles C Enable printing wth disp Enable MATLAB debugging dows simulalion Ot 00 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 216 XILINX MCode
86. from the specified form factor as follows Dg Da FF The data input ports on Port A and B can have different arithmetic type and binary point position for a form factor of 1 For form factors greater than 1 the data input ports on Port A and Port B should have an unsigned arithmetic type with binary point at 0 The output ports labeled A and B have the same types as the corresponding input data ports The location in the memory block can be accessed for reading or writing by providing the valid address on each individual address port A valid address is an unsigned integer from O to d 1 where d denotes the RAM depth number of words in the RAM for the particular port An attempt to read past the end of the memory is caught as an error in simulation The initial RAM contents can be specified through a block parameter Each write enable port must be a boolean value When the WE port is 1 the value on the data input is written to the location indicated by the address line Write Mode The output during a write operation depends on the write mode When the WE is 0 the output port has the value at the location specified by the address line During a write operation WE asserted the data presented on the input data port is stored in memory at Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 150 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Dual Port RAM the location selected by the port s address input During a write cycle y
87. gt v x a else x D end is acceptable only if a and b are both boolean or both arithmetic Constant Expressions An expression is constant provided its value does not depend on the value of any input argument Thus for example the variable c defined by a a 2 xfix xlSigned 10 2 b 3 345 a b c can be used in any context that demands a constant xfix Conversion The xfix conversion function converts a double to an xfix or changes one xfix into another having different characteristics A call on the conversion function looks like the following x xfix type_spec value Here x is the variable that receives the xfix type_spec is a cell array that specifies the type of xfix to create and value is the value being operated on The value can be floating point or xfix type The type_spec cell array is defined using curly braces in the usual MATLAB method For example xfix xlSigned 20 16 xlRound xlWrap 3 1415926 returns an xfix approximation to pi The approximation is signed occupies 20 bits 16 fractional quantizes by rounding and wraps on overflow The type_spec consists of 1 3 or 5 elements Some elements can be omitted When elements are omitted default element settings are used The elements specify the following properties in the order presented data type width binary point position quantization mode and overflow mode The data type can be x1Boolean xlUnsigned or x1Signed
88. invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Operation This determines whether the block is adder or subtractor based e Feedback scaling specifies the feedback scale factor to be one of the following 1 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 1 128 or 1 256 e Reinitialize with input b on reset when selected the output of the accumulator is reset to the data on input port b When not selected the output of the accumulator is reset to zero This option is available only when the block has a reset port Using this option has clock speed implications if the accumulator is in a multirate system In this case the accumulator is forced to run at the system rate since the clock enable CE signal driving the accumulator runs at the system rate and the reset to input operation is a function of the CE signal Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 47 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Accumulator Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows e Use behavioral HDL otherwise use core The block is implemented using behavioral HDL This gives the downstream logic synthesis tool maximum freedom to optimize for performance or area e Implement using Core logic can be implemented in Fabric or in a DSP48 if a DSP48 is available in the target device The default is Fabric Other parameters used by t
89. is a global object and only one shared memory of a particular name can exist at a time Destructor Syntax release m Description Releases the resources used by the Shfifo object Write data Syntax write m numValues inData Description Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 463 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation When writing to a Shared FIFO numValues is an integer that specifies the number of data to write into the FIFO inData is an array where that data to be written is stored Read data Syntax outData read m numValues Description When reading to a Shared FIFO numValues is an integer that specifies the number of data to read from the FIFO outData is an array where that data read is stored Set properties Syntax set m prop data Description Used to set the properties of the Shfifo object Get properties Syntax data get m data get m prop Description Used to get the properties of the shfifo object such as the full flag of the FIFO M Hwcosim Utility Functions xlHwcosim Syntax xlHwcosim release xlHwcosim releaseMem xlHwcosim releaseFifo Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 464 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Description When a M Hwcosim Shared Memory or Shared FIFO objects are created global system resource
90. is as follows e reim Stream of interleaved real and imaginary I and Q samples for each vector Potentially each vector is transferred multiple times as indicated by the rd signal e fd Indicates the start of each vector frame e rd Indicates the start of each vector repetition Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 359 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model The diagram below shows how a 3 element vector would be represented before multiplication by a 3x3 matrix The vector is repeated 3 times once for each matrix row greatly simplifying the multiplication logic rim A A OS AO A KO A OD AS A K 10 X O0 X 10 O X W0 A a a Input Input data is presented on the in_fd in_rd and in_reim ports Vector repetition is not required at the input hence the in_rd signal is ignored and only the first 2x MT samples are used For example for a MT 2 channel in_ d Ne intd ve OX Output Output data is presented on the out_fd out_rd and out_reim ports The data is repeated throughout the frame For example for a MR 3 channel E E a out fd Te Se i mwa Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 360 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model Timing The number of samples between successive fd pulses TVEC must be sufficient for the internal blocks to process the data The number
91. is longer than the shift register depth the vector s trailing elements are discarded When the shift register is deeper than the vector length the shift register s trailing registers are initialized to zero Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Implementation tab Parameters specific to this block are as follows e Optimization you can choose to optimize for Resource minimum area or for Speed maximum performance LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP RAM based Shift Register v11 0 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 50 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX AddSub AddSub This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Math Floating Point and Index 7 The Xilinx AddSub block implements an adder subtractor The operation can be fixed y Addition or Subtraction or changed dynamically under control of the sub mode E signal AddSub Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Operation Specifies the block operation to be Addition Subtraction or Addition Subtraction When Addition Subtraction is selected the block operation is determined by the sub input port which must be driven by a Boolean signal When the su
92. memory depth values with index higher than depth are ignored When the depth exceeds the vector length memory locations with addresses higher than the Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 285 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Single Port RAM vector length are initialized to zero Initialization values are saturated and rounded if necessary according to the precision specified on the data port e Write Mode specifies memory behavior when WE is asserted Supported modes are Read before write Read after write and No read On write Read before write indicates the output value reflects the state of the memory before the write operation Read after write indicates the output value reflects the state of the memory after the write operation No read on write indicates that the output value remains unchanged irrespective of change of address or state of the memory There are device specific restrictions on the applicability of these modes Also refer to the write modes and hardware notes topic below for more information e Memory Type option to select between block and distributed RAM e Provide reset port for output register exposes a reset port controlling the output register of the Block RAM Note this port does not reset the memory contents to the initialization value The reset port is available only when the latency of the Block RAM is set to 1 Initial value for output register the initial value f
93. multiplexed input sample data stream Hardware Oversampling Rate Enter the hardware oversampling rate if you select Hardware_Oversampling_Rate as the format Implementation tab Numerical Precision e Quantization Can be specified as Full_Precision or Trunction e Output Data Width Can be specified up to 48 bits for the Trunction option above Optional e Use Xtreme DSP slice This field specifies that if possible use the XtremeDSP slice DSP48 type element in the target device e Use Streaming Interface Specifies whether or not to use a streaming interface for multiple channel implementations Control Options e ACLKEN Specifies if the block has a clock enable port the equivalent of selecting the Has ACLKEN option in the CORE Generator GUI e ARESERTn Specifies that the block has a reset port Active low synchronous clear A minimum ARESETn pulse of two cycles is required e Has TREADY Specifies if the block has a TREADY port for the Data Output Channel the equivalent of selecting the Has_DOUT_TREADY option in the CORE Generator GUI Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP CIC Compiler 3 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 73 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Clock Enable Probe Clock Enable Probe This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic El
94. not exist The block name can be local e g FDATool relative e g FDATool or absolute e g untitled foo bar FDATool See Also xlfda_denominator FDATool Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 395 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX xlGenerateButton xlGenerateButton The xlGenerateButton function provides a programmatic way to invoke the System Generator code generator Syntax status xlGenerateButton sysgenblock Description IxlGenerateButton invokes the System Generator code generator and returns a status code Invoking xlGenerateButton with a System Generator block as an argument is functionally equivalent to opening the System Generator GUI for that token and clicking on the Generate button The following is list of possible status codes returned by xlGenerateButton Status Description 1 Canceled 2 Simulation running 3 Check param error 4 Compile generate netlist error 5 Netlister error 6 Post netlister script error 7 Post netlist error 8 Post generation error 9 External view mismatch when importing as a configurable subsystem See Also xlgetparam and xlsetparam xlgetparams System Generator block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 396 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlgetparam and xlsetparam xlgetparam and xlsetparam Used to get and set parameter values in the Sys
95. of another DSP48 block Provide multiplier sign cascade out port when selected the multiplier sign cascade out port multsigncascout is made available This port can only be connected to the multiplier sign cascade in port of another DSP48E block and is used to support 96 bit accumulators adders and subtracters which are built from two DSP48Es Provide carry cascade out port when selected the carry cascade out port carrycascout is made available This port can only be connected to the carry cascade in port of another DSP48E block Pipelining tab Parameters specific to the Pipelining tab are e Length of a acin pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline on input register A A pipeline of length O removes the register on the input Length of b bCIN pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline for the b input whether itis read from b or bcin e Length of acout pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline between the a acin input and the acout output port A pipeline of length O removes the register from the acout pipeline length Must be less than or equal to the length of the a acin pipeline e Length of bcout pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline between the b bcin input and the bcout output port A pipeline of length O removes the register from the bcout pipeline length Must be less than or equal to the length of the b bcin pipeline e Pipeline c indicates whether the input from the c port should be registered
96. of cycles required by each block is a function of the MT MR N and RATE parameters as follows RT Multiply Requires 2xMTxMTxN cycles Fading Multiply Requires 2x MTxMRxNxceil 64 RATE cycles RR Multiply Requires 2xMRxMRxN cycles Hence the minimum value of TVEC is Tur 2Nmax max M M M M 64 RATE J VEL K The model will produce an error during simulation if this constraint is not met Initialization The model requires approximate 3xR input frames for the fading coefficient generator to initialize During this period the channel coefficients and consequentially the output data is zero Demonstrations Two demonstrations are included that show how the model can be used Each includes notes on how parameters can be calculated e SISO Channel Model A demo showing a SISO channel based on 3GPP TS 25 104 Annex B 2 Case 4 e MIMO Channel Model A demo showing a frequency flat MIMO channel Hardware Co Simulation Example An example of how to use the model for hardware co simulation is included in the lt ISE_Design_Suite_tree gt sysgen examples mfcm_hwcosim directory The directory contains three files e mfcm_hw mdl Model specifying the hardware component of the co simulation design Design consists of a shared memory for data input a channel model and a shared memory for data output e mfcm_hw_cw bit The mfcm_hw mdl design compiled for the XtremeDSP kit Vivado Designing with System Generator www
97. of reset and enable signals also works for conditional assignment of persistent state variables using switch statements provided the switch statements contain two or less branches The MCode block performs dead code elimination and constant propagation compiler optimizations when generating code for the FPGA This can result in the inference of reset Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 222 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode and or enable signals in conditional assignment of persistent state variables when one of the branches is never executed For this to occur the conditional must contain two branches that are executed after dead code is eliminated and constant propagation is performed Inferring Registers Registers are inferred in hardware by using persistent variables however the right coding style must be used Consider the two code segments in the following function function out1 out2 persistent_test02 inl in2 persistent ff1 ff1 xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 2 0 persistent ff2 ff2 xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 2 0 Scode segment 1 outl ff1 Sthese two statements infer a register for ffl ff1 in1 Scode segment 2 ff2 in2 these two statements do NOT infer a register for ff2 out2 ff2 end In code segment 1 the value of persistent variable ff1 is assigned to outl Since ff1 is persistent it is assumed that its current value was assigned in the previous cycle In the n
98. of the puncture code into output data of type UFixK_0 where K is equal to the number of ones in the puncture code The output rate is identical to the input rate This block is commonly used in conjunction with a convolution encoder to implement punctured convolution codes as shown in the figure below T puncture convolutional encoder File Edit Yiew Simulation Format Tods Help Ole S telae m Nomal a e alam T e Example for Implementing Punctured Convolutional Codes Puncture Code 0 10 1 Serial to Parallel Puncture Parallel to Serlal Data Saurce Puncture Code 0 1 10 Serial to Parallel Puncture4 Parallelto Serial1 Baseband Shaping a System Convolutianal Encoder Generator Ready 100 bd45 The system shown implements a rate Y convolution encoder whose outputs are punctured to produce four output bits for each three input bits The top puncture block removes the center bit for code 0 1 0 1 and bottom puncture block removes the least significant bit for code 1 1 1 0 producing a 2 bit punctured output These data streams are serialized into 1 bit in phase and quadrature data streams for baseband shaping Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 252 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Puncture Pa
99. ports end oe If all input rates are known this code sets types for dynamic output ports sets generics that depend on input port types and verifies input port types are appropriate Avoid the mistake of including code in these conditional blocks e g a variable definition that is needed by code outside of the conditional block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 66 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box Note that the code shown above uses an object named this_block Every black box configuration M function automatically makes this_block available through an input argument In MATLAB this_block is the object that represents the black box and is used inside the configuration M function to test and configure the black box Every this_block object is an instance of the SysgenBlockDescriptor MATLAB class The methods that can be applied to this_block are specified in Appendix A A good way to generate example configuration M function is to run the Configuration Wizard described below on simple VHDL entities The Black Box Examplesare an excellent way to become familiar with black box configuration options Sample Periods The output ports clocks and clock enables on a black box must be assigned sample periods in the configuration M function If these periods are dynamic or the black box needs to check rates then the function must obtain the input port sample periods Sample periods in
100. set and the binary point position of the output is forced to the position supplied in the Output Binary Point parameter When unchecked the arithmetic type of the output is unchanged from the arithmetic type of the input e Output Binary Point The position to which the output s binary point is to be forced The supplied value must be an integer between zero and the number of bits in the input inclusive LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 272 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Relational Relational This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator a bp bh Y Relstions The supported comparisons are the following e equal to a b e not equal to a b e less than a lt b e greater than a gt b e less than or equal to a lt b e greater than or equal to a gt b e The output of the block is a Bool Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model The only parameter specific to the Relational block is e Comparison specifies the comparison operation computed by the block Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE
101. should use the ready output signal to indicate to downstream blocks when a new sample is available at the output of the CIC Compiler block The CIC will downsample the data but the sample rate will remain at the clock rate If you look at the output of the CIC Compiler block you will see each output data repeated R times for a rate change of R while the data_tvalid signal pulses once every R cycles The downstream blocks can be clocked at lower than system rates without any problems as long as the clock is never slower than the rate change R There are several different ways this can be handled You can leave the entire design running at the system rate then use registers with enables or enables on other blocks to capture data at the correct time Or alternatively you can use a downsample block corresponding to the lowest rate change R then again use enable signals to handle the cases when there are larger rate changes If there are not many required rate changes you can use MUX blocks and use a different downsample block for each different rate change This might be the case if the downstream blocks are different depending on the rate change basically creating different paths for each rate Using enables as described above will probably be the most efficient method If you are not using the CIC Compiler block in a programmable mode you can place an up down sample block after the CIC Compiler to correctly pass on the sample rate to downstr
102. software For details on how configurable subsystems refer to the topic Configurable Subsystems and System Generator System Generator will automatically insert Configurable Subsystem Manager blocks into library subsystems that it generates through its Import as Configurable Subsystem capability It is also possible to hand build library subsystems that take advantage of the Simulink and System Generator configurable subsystem capabilities Recall that a configurable subsystem consists of a collection of sub blocks exactly one of which represents the subsystem at any given time The so called block choice for the subsystem specifies which sub block should be the representative The representative is the sub block used to produce results for the subsystem when simulating System Generator designs can be simulated but can also be translated into hardware and it is often useful to identify a second block to be used as a configurable subsystem s hardware representative The hardware representative is the sub block used to translating the configurable subsystem into hardware For example suppose a configurable subsystem consists of two sub blocks namely a black box whose HDL implements a filter and a subsystem that implements the same filter using ordinary System Generator blocks Then it is natural to use the subsystem as the representative and the black box as the hardware representative for example to use the subsystem in simula
103. tab the Parameter Selection on the Basic tab is set to Hardware Parameters and Phase Increment Programmability field on the Phase Offset Angles tab is set to Fixed or Programmable o Output frequencies Mhz for each channel an independent frequency can be entered into an array This field is activated when Parameter Selection on the Basic tab is set to System Parameters and Phase Increment Programmability is Fixed or Programmable o Phase Angle Increment Values This field is activated when Phase_Generator_and_SIN_COS_LUT is selected as the Configuration Options field on the Basic tab the Parameter Selection on the Basic tab is set to Hardware Parameters and Phase Increment Programmability field on the Phase Offset Angles tab is set to Fixed or Programmable Values must be entered in binary The range is O to the weight of the accumulator for example 2Phase_Width Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 112 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 Phase Offset Angles tab e Phase Offset Programmability specifies the phase offset to be None Fixed Programmable or Streaming The choice of Fixed or Programmable adds the channel data and we input ports to the block o Phase Offset Angles x2pi radians for each channel an independent offset can be entered into an array The entered values are multiplied by 27 radians This field is activated when Parameter Selection on the Basic tab is set
104. the LogiCORE is to implement Each instruction can be entered on a new line or in a comma delimited list and are enumerated from the top down You can specify a maximum of 64 instructions Refer to the topic Instructions Page page 3 of the LogiCORE IP DSP48 Macro 2 1 Product Specification for details on all the parameters on this tab Pipeline Options tab The Pipeline Options tab is used to define the pipeline depth of the various input paths Pipeline Options Specifies the pipeline method to be used Automatic By Tier and Expert Custom Pipeline options Used to specify the pipeline depth of the various input paths Tier 1 to 6 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 131 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 When By Tier is selected for Pipeline Options these parameters are used to enable disable the registers across all the input paths for a given pipeline stage The following restrictions are enforced o When P has been specified in an expression tier 6 will forced as asynchronous feedback is not supported Individual registers When you select Expert for the Pipeline Options these parameters are used to enable disable individual register stages The following restrictions are enforced o The P register is forced when P is specified in an expression Asynchronous feedback is not supported Refer to the topic Detailed Pipe Implementation page 9 of the LogiCORE IP DSP48 Mac
105. the c register is matched the pattern detection port is set to 1 Provide pattern bar detect port when selected the pattern bar detection patternbdetect output port is provided When the inverse of the pattern either from the mask or the c register is matched the pattern bar detection port is set to 1 Provide overflow port when selected the overflow output port is provided This port indicates when the operation in the DSP48E has overflowed beyond the bit P N where N is between 1 and 46 N is determined by the number of 1s in the mask whether set by the GUI mask field or the c port input Provide underflow port when selected the underflow output port is provided This port indicates when the operation in the DSP48E has underflowed Underflow occurs when the number goes below P N where N is determined by the number of 1s in the mask whether set by the GUI mask field or the c port input Provide ACOUT port when selected the acout output port is made available The acout port must be connected to the acin port of another DSP48E block Provide BCOUT port when selected the bcout output port is made available The bcout port must be connected to the bcin port of another DSP48E block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 139 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E Provide PCOUT port when selected the pcout output port is made available The pcout port must be connected to the pcin port
106. the full AXI4 Stream name is used For example a shortened master signal on an AXI4 Stream interface might be data_tvalid When Display shortened port names is unchecked the name becomes m_axis_data_tvalid Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 43 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Block Reference Pages Block Reference Pages Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 44 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Absolute Absolute This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Math Floating Point Basic Elements and Index i The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Absolute Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point arithmetic output will always be Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need full precision this option allows you to specify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits Fixed point Output Type Arithmetic type Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number e Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number Fixed point Precision o Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary poi
107. the layout tool with verbose on and autoroute off Example 1b Performing Layouts x1TBUtils Layout struct verbose 1 autoroute 0 This will also invoke the layout tool with verbose on and autoroute off Example 2 Redrawing lines x1TBUtils Redrawlines struct autoroute 0 This will redraw the lines of the current system with auto routing off Example 3 Getting selected lines and blocks lines blks x1TBUtils GetSelected lines 1x3 struct array with fields Handle Name Parent SrcBlock SrePort DstBlock DstPort Points Branch blks 1 0e 003 3 0320 3 0480 This will return all selected lines and blocks in the current system In this case 3 lines and 2 blocks were selected The first line handle can be accessed using the command lines 1 Handle Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 412 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xITBUtils ans 3 0740e 003 The handle to the first block can be accessed using the command blks 1 ans 3 0320e 003 Remarks The actions performed by Layout and RedrawLines will not be in the undo stack Save a copy of the model before performing the actions in order to revert to the original model This product contains certain software code or other information AT amp T Software proprietary to AT amp T Corp AT amp T The AT amp T Software is provided to you AS IS YOU ASSUME TOTAL RESPONSIBILITY AN
108. the name output_var will appear on the block and will hold the result of the wire expression bitbasher_expr Concat output_var bitbasher_expr1 bitbasher_expr2 bitbasher_expr3 The concat syntax is supported as shown above Each of bitbasher_exprN could either be an expression or simply an input port identifier The following are some examples of this construct al b c d e f g a2 e a3 b f c d e Slice port_identifier bound1 bound2 1 port_identifier bitN 2 output_var output_var port_identifier The input port from which the bits are extracted bound1 bound2 Non negative integers that lie between 0 and bit width of port_identifier 1 bitN Non negative integers that lie between 0 and bit width of port_identifier 1 As shown above there are two schemes to extract bits from the input ports If a range of consecutive bits need to be extracted then the expression of the following form should be used output_var port_identifier bound1 bound2 1 If only one bit is to be extracted then the alternative form should be used output_var port_identifier bitN 2 The following are some examples of this construct al b 7 3 al holds bits 7 through 3 of input b in the same order in which they appear in bit b for example if bis 110110110 then a1 is 10110 a2 b 3 7 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 60 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
109. the output cosine z and sine z The corpicsincos_ CORDIC processor is implemented using building blocks from the Xilinx blockset The CORDIC sine cosine algorithm is implemented in the following 3 steps 1 Coarse Angle Rotation The algorithm converges only for angles between pi 2 and pi 2 If z gt pi 2 the input angle is reflected to the 1st quadrant by subtracting pi 2 from the input angle When z lt pi 2 the input angle is reflected back to the 3rd quadrant by adding pi 2 to the input angle The sine cosine circuit has been designed to converge for all values of z except for the most negative value 2 Fine Angle Rotation By setting x equal to 1 1 646760 and y equal to 0 the rotational mode CORDIC processor yields cosine and sine of the input angle z 3 Co ordinate Correction If there was a reflection applied in Step 1 this step applies the appropriate correction For z gt pi 2 using z t pi 2 then sin z sin t cos pi 2 cos t sin pi 2 cos t cos z cos t cos pi 2 sin t sin pi 2 sin t For z lt pi 2 using z t pi 2 then sin z sin t cos pi 2 cos t sin pi 2 cos t cos z cos t cos pi 2 sin t sin pi 2 sin t Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Number of Processing Elements specifies the number of iterative sta
110. the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Reed Solomon Decoder v8 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 263 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 This block ts listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 Communications and Index The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting input teady l gt COdes with a wide range of applications in digital communications nape and storage This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream output_tvalid gt Standard output _tdata_data_out O They are used to correct errors in many systems such as digital output tas Storage devices wireless or mobile communications and digital video broadcasting event_input_tlast_missing Aisa The Reed Solomon encoder augments data blocks with event_input_tlast_unexpected A redundant symbols so that errors introduced during AI transmission can be corrected Errors can occur for a number of reasons noise or interference scratches on a CD etc The Reed Solomon decoder attempts to correct errors and recover the original data The number and type of errors that can be corrected depends on the characteristics of the code A typical system is shown below Digital RS n Com sario PS Dez Source Encoder Carnal reader z Reed Solomon codes are Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH codes which in
111. to System Parameters and Phase Increment Programmability is Fixed or Programmable o Phase Angle Offset Values for each channel an independent offset can be entered into an array The entered values are multiplied by 21 radians This field is activated when Parameter Selection on the Basic tab is set to Hardware Parameters and Phase Increment Programmability is Fixed or Programmable Advanced tab Block Icon Display e Display shortened port names this option is ON by default When unselected the full AXI name of each port is displayed on the block Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes How to Migrate from DDS Compiler 4 0 to DDS Compiler 5 0 Design Description This example shows how to migrate from the non axi DDS Compiler block to AXI4 DDS Compiler block using the same or similar block parameters Some of the parameters between non AXI and AXI4 versions might not be identical exactly due to some changes in Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 113 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 certain features and block interfaces The following model is used to illustrate the design migration between these block For more detail refer to the datasheet of this IP core Example showing how to migrate to AXI4 DDS Compiler IP block gt System Generator DDS Compiler 4 0 data_tvalid data_tready data
112. to be specified but some boards can have alternate e g a choice between an xcv1000 or an xcv2000 in the same socket Use the Add and Delete buttons described below to build the device list e Add Brings up a menu to select a new device for the board As shown in the figure below devices are organized by family then part name then speed and finally the package type Delete Remove the selected device from the list spartan2 gt spartan2e gt xc2s50e spartan3 gt xc2s100e xc2s150e xc2s200e virtex2 gt xc2s300e b virtex b virtexe virtex2p xc2s400e xc2s600e v vv v vv v virtex4 Non Memory Mapped Ports You can add support for your own board specific ports when creating a board support package Board specific ports are useful when you have on board components e g external memories DACs or ADCs that you would like the FPGA to interface to during hardware co simulation Board specific ports are also referred to as non memory mapped because when the design is compiled for hardware co simulation these ports are mapped to their physical locations rather than creating Simulink ports The Add Edit and Delete buttons provide the controls needed for configuring non memory mapped ports Add Brings up the dialog to enter information about the new port e Edit Make changes to the selected port e Delete Remove the selected port from the list Help Displays this documentati
113. token and click Generate At the end of the generation a hardware co simulation library is created Among other files in the netlist directory a bit file and an hwc file can be found The bit file corresponds to the FPGA implementation and the hwc file contains information required for M Hwcosim Both bit file and hwc file are paired by name e g mydesign_cw bit and mydesign_cw hwc The hwc file specifies additional meta information for describing the design and the chosen hardware co simulation interface With the meta information a hardware co simulation instance can be instantiated using M Hwcosim through which a user can interact with the co simulation engine M Hwcosim inherits the same concepts of ports shared memories and fixed point notations as found in the existing co simulation block Every design exposes its top level ports and embedded shared memories for external access Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 450 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation M Hwcosim Simulation Semantics The simulation semantics for M Hwcosim differs from that used during hardware co simulation in a System Generator block diagram the M Hwcosim simulation semantics is more flexible and is capable of emulating the simulation semantics used in the block based hardware co simulation In the block based hardware co simulation a rigid simulation semantic is imposed before adva
114. transition table are shown below nput C utgut 0 0 14 Mo part cf ly 10 Ly Zeque 102 Co wi Seenfre naan e KS Fa sone m KS an W E yr e A A 1 Ta a 00 ice q hr gt 3 Try 7 7 Eemn10 Next State Output Table Current S ate lflnput O Input 1 0 0 0 10 1 270 1 70 2 0 0 3 0 3 2 0 1 1 Cell ormat Next Stale Output The table lists the next state and output that result from the current state and input For instance if the current state is 3 and the input is 1 the next state is 1 and the output is 1 indicating the detection of the desired sequence The Registered Mealy State Machine block is configured with next state and output matrices obtained from the next state output table discussed above These matrices are constructed as shown below Next State O utput Table Current State If Input 0 lf Input 1 0 mn y 0 1 2110 10 3 nn an 3 2 10 111 Cell F opf st Stats Output Ah o 1 D O 2 4 D 0 U 3 u u 2 1 D 1 Next State Matrix Output Matrix Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 366 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Mealy State Machine Rows of the matrices correspond to states and columns correspond to input values Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model The next state logic state register output logic and output register are implem
115. turn are linear block codes An n k linear block code is a k dimensional sub space of an n dimensional vector space over a finite field Elements of the field are called symbols For a Reed Solomon code n ordinarily is 25 1 where s is the width in bits of each symbol When the code is shortened n is smaller The encoder handles both full length and shortened codes The encoder is systematic This means it constructs code blocks of length n from information blocks of length k by adjoining n k parity symbols S 3 k n k DATA PARTY A Reed Solomon code is characterized by its field and generator polynomials The field polynomial is used to construct the symbol field and the generator polynomial is used to Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 264 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 calculate parity symbols The encoder allows both polynomials to be configured The generator polynomial has the form r j je r ia x x a xa xa where a is a primitive element of the finite field having n 1 elements BIOCk Interface Channels and Pins The Xilinx Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 block is AXI4 compliant The following describes the standard AXI channels and pins on the interface input Channel e input_tvalid TVALID for the input channel e input_tdata_data_in presents blocks of n symbols to be decoded This signal must have type UFIX_s_0 where s is the width in bit
116. v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reinterpret Reinterpret This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Reinterpret The binary representation is passed through unchanged so in hardware this block consumes no resources The number of bits in the output will always be the same as the number of bits in the input The block allows for unsigned data to be reinterpreted as signed data or conversely for signed data to be reinterpreted as unsigned It also allows for the reinterpretation of the data s scaling through the repositioning of the binary point within the data The Xilinx Scale block provides an analogous capability An example of this block s use is as follows if the input type is 6 bits wide and signed with 2 fractional bits and the output type is forced to be unsigned with 0 fractional bits then an input of 2 0 1110 00 in binary two s complement would be translated into an output of 56 111000 in binary This block can be particularly useful in applications that combine it with the Xilinx Slice block or the Xilinx Concat block To illustrate the block s use consider the following scenario Given two signals one carrying signed data and the other carrying two unsigned bits a UFix_2_0 we want to desig
117. variable The x1_state function can also be used to convert a MATLAB 1 D array into a zero indexed constant array If the MCode block cannot map a vector state variable into an FPGA device an error message is issued during model netlist time The following are examples of using vector state variables Delay Line The state variable in the following function is mapped into a delay line function q delay d lat persistent r r xl_state zeros 1 lat d lat q r back r push_front_pop_back d Line of Registers The state variable in the following function is mapped into a line of registers function s sum4 d persistent r r xl_state zeros 1 4 d S r 0 r 1 r 2 r 3 r push_front_pop_back d Vector of Constants The state variable in the following function is mapped into a vector of constants function s myadd a b c d nbits binpt p xlSigned nbits binpt xlRound xlSaturate persistent coef coef xl_state 3 7 3 5 6 7 p s a coef 0 b coef 1 c coef 2 c coef 3 Addressable Shift Register The state variable in the following function is mapped into an addressable shift register function q addrsr d addr en depth persistent r r xl_state zeros 1 depth d q r addr if en r push_front_pop_back d Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 211 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode end Single Port ROM The state variab
118. variables but not to fixed point numbers boolean variables are incompatible with arithmetic operators Logical operators can only be applied to boolean variables Every operation is performed in full precision for example with the minimum precision needed to guarantee that no information is lost Literal Constants Integer floating point and boolean literals are supported Integer literals are automatically converted to xfix values of appropriate width having a binary point position at zero Floating point literals must be converted to the xfix type explicitly with the x ix conversion function The predefined MATLAB values true and false are automatically converted to boolean literals Assignment The left hand side of an assignment can only contain one variable A variable can be assigned more than once Control Flow The conditional expression of an if statement must evaluate to a boolean Switch statements can contain a case clause and an otherwise clause The types of a switch selector and its cases must be compatible thus the selector can be boolean provided its Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 205 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode cases are All cases in a switch must be constant equivalently no case can depend on an input value When the same variable is assigned in several branches of a control statement the types being assigned must be compatible For example if u
119. when X is Not a Number X must be a scalar value of double or Xilinx fixed point number This function is not supported for vectors or matrices For example if isnan incr amp incr 1 ent cnt 1 end NaN The NaN function generates an IEEE arithmetic representation for Not a Number A NaN is obtained as a result of mathematically undefined operations like 0 0 0 0 and inf inf NaN 1 N generates a 1 by N vector of NaN values Here are examples of using NaN if x lt 0 z NaN else Z xX yY end num2Str Converts a number to a string num2str X converts the X into a string X can be a scalar value of double a Xilinx fixed point number or a vector state variable The default number of digits is based on the magnitude of the elements of X Here s an example of num2str if opcode lt 0 opcode gt 10 error opcode is out of range num2str opcode end Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 214 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode ones The ones function generates a specified number of one values ones 1 N generates a 1 by N vector of ones ones M N where M must be 1 It s usually used with x1_state function call For example the following line creates a 1 by 4 vector state variable initialized to 1 1 1 1 persitent m m xl_state ones 1 4 proto zeros The zeros function generates a specified number of zero values zeros 1 N genera
120. width of the full port The binary point for this unsigned output is always at the top of the word Thus if for example precision is set to one the output can take two values 0 0 and 0 5 the latter indicating the FIFO is at least 50 full Optional Ports e Provide reset port Add reset port to the block e Provide enable port Add enable port to the block e Provide data count port Add data count port to the block Provides the number of words in the FIFO e Provide percent full port Add a percent full output port to the block Indicates the percentage of the FIFO that is full using the user specified precision This optional port is turned on by default for backward compatibility reasons e Provide almost empty port Add almost empty ae port to the block e Provide almost full port Add almost efull af port to the block Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 167 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIFO LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP FIFO Generator 9 2 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 168 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 FIR Compiler 6 3 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP and Index The Xilinx FIR Compiler 6 3 block provides u
121. with the input to the register at that tap e Gate type XOR or XNOR This field specifies the gate used by the feedback signals e Number of bits in LFSR This field specifies the number of registers in the LFSR chain As a result this number specifies the size of the input and output when selected to be parallel e Feedback polynomial This field specifies the tap points of the feedback chain and the value must be entered in hex with single quotes The Isb of this polynomial always must be set to 1 and the msb is an implied 1 and is not specified in the hex input Please see the Xilinx application note titled Efficient Shift Registers LFSR Counters and Long Pseudo Random Sequence Generators for more information on how to specify this equation and for optimal settings for the maximum repeating sequence e Initial value This field specifies the initial seed value where the LFSR begins its repeating sequence The initial value might not be all zeroes when choosing the XOR gate type and might not be all ones when choosing XNOR as those values will stall the LFSR Advanced tab Parameters specific to the Advanced tab are as follows e Parallel output This field specifies whether all of the bits in the LFSR chain are connected to the output or just the last register in the chain serial or parallel e Use reloadable seed values This field specifies whether or not an input is needed to reload a dynamic LFSR seed value at runtime e
122. with a Viterbi decoder data_teady gt this block performs forward error correction FEC in digital communication systems This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard data_tdata_data_in data_tvalid f gt Values are encoded using a linear feed forward shift register which computes modulo two sums over a sliding window of data teady data idata data outj gt nput data as shown in the figure below The length of the shift register is specified by the constraint length The convolution Convolution Encoder 8 0 codes specify which bits in the data window contribute to the modulo two sum Resetting the block will set the shift register to zero The encoder rate is the ratio of input to output bit length thus for example a rate 1 2 encoder outputs two bits for each input bit Similarly a rate 1 3 encoder outputs three bits for each input bit convelution coded 110101111 convolution codet 100011101 data_out_v 0 data_in EH es 7 a A a AF gt data_out_v 1 Block Parameters Dialog Box The following figure shows the block parameters dialog box page_0 tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Data Rates e Input Rate Punctured Only the input rate can be modified Its value can range from 2 to 12 resulting in a rate n m encoder where n is the input rate and n lt m lt 2n Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 96 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
123. x3 x 1 11 4 x4 x 1 19 5 x x2 1 37 6 x x 1 67 7 x7 x3 1 137 8 x8 x44 x3 x2 41 285 9 x x44 1 529 10 x10 x3 1 1033 11 xlt x2 41 2053 12 x12 4 x64 x44 x 41 4179 Scaling Factor h represented in the previous formula as h specifies the scaling factor for the code Ordinarily h is 1 but can be as large as 2 1 where s is the symbol width The value must be chosen so that a is primitive That is h must be relatively prime to 25 1 Generator Start specifies the first root r of the generator polynomial The generator polynomial g x is given by kt a pees pee REETIS grx xa haf where a is a primitive element of the symbol field and the scaling factor is described below Variable Block Length when checked the block is given a ctr1 input channel Symbols Per Block n tells the number of symbols in the blocks the encoder produces Acceptable numbers range from 3 to 2 1 where s denotes the symbol width Data Symbols k tells the number of information symbols each block contains Acceptable values range from max n 256 1 to n 2 Variable Check Symbol Options Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 261 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 e Variable Number of Check Symbols r e Define Supported R_IN Values If only a subset of the possible values that could be sampled on R_IN is actually required then it is p
124. xilinx com 361 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model e mfcm_cosim mdl Model specifying the software component of the co simulation The shared memory blocks are used to pass packets of data to the hardware for processing and to receive packets of processed data By default this design will use the pre generated mfcm_hw_cw bit this will have to be regenerated for different hardware targets Reference 1 A Forenza and R W Heath Jr Impact of Antenna Geometry on MIMO Communication in Indoor Clustered Channels Wireless Networking and Communications Group ECE Department The University of Texas at Austin 2 3GPPTS 25 101 V6 7 0 2005 03 Annex B User Equipment UE radio transmission and reception FDD Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network 3rd Generation Partnership Project 3 3GPPTS 25 104 V6 8 0 2004 12 Annex B Base Station BS radio transmission and reception FDD Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network 3rd Generation Partnership Project 4 3GPP TR 25 943 V6 0 0 2004 12 Deployment aspects Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network 3rd Generation Partnership Project 5 IEEE 802 16 3c 01 29r4 2001 07 16 Channel Models for Fixed Wireless Applications IEEE 802 16 Broadband Wireless Access Working Group Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 362 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX n tap Dual Port Memo
125. xlHwcosim releaseFifo Release all Shfifo instances oe M Hwcosim MATLAB Class Hwcosim The Hwcosim MATLAB class provides a higher level abstraction of the hardware co simulation engine Each instantiated Hwcosim object represents a hardware co simulation instance It encapsulates the properties such as the unique identifier associated with the instance Most of the instruction invocations take the Hwcosim object as an input argument For further convenience alternative shorthand is provided for certain operations Similarly the Shmem and Shfifo class are provided for accessing shared memory and shared FIFO related operations respectively Actions Syntax Constructor h Hwcosim project Destructor release h Open hardware open h Close hardware close h Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 455 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Actions Syntax Write data write h inPorts inData h inPorts inData Read data outData read h outPorts outData h outPorts Run run h run h n Vectorized Execution outData exec h execId nCycles inData Get properties data get h prop Constructor Syntax h Hwcosim project Description Creates an Hwcosim instance Note that an instance is a reference to the hardware co simulation project and does not signify an explicit link to hardware c
126. xsub2script Error Messages Condition Error Message s xlsub2script is invoked without any An argument is expected for xlsub2script argument The first argument is not a The first argument must be a model subsystem or the model is not subsystem or a block Please make sure the opened model is opened or the argument is a valid string for a model or a block A subsystem has simulink function Subsystem has Simulink function calls such calls in its mask initialization code as gcb get_param set_param add_block Please remove these calls and run xlsub2script again or you can pick a different subsystem to run xlsub2script The subsystem has Goto blocks You have the following Goto blocks please modify the model to remove them and run xlsub2script again Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 449 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Hardware co simulation in System Generator brings on chip acceleration and verification capabilities into the Simulink simulation environment In the typical System Generator flow a System Generator model is first compiled for a hardware co simulation platform during which a hardware implementation bitstream of the design is generated and associated to a hardware co simulation block The block is inserted into a Simulink model and its ports are connected with appro
127. your own simulation code Note The model for this example can be found at pathname lt ISE_Design_Suite_tree gt sysgen examples mhwcosim MultiRatesExample Example 4 function multi_rates_cw_hwcosim_test try Define the number of hardware cycles for the simulation ncycles 10 Load input and output test reference data Pre allocate memory for test results result_pb00 zeros size testdata_pb00 result_pb01 zeros size testdata_pb01 result_pb02 zeros size testdata_pb02 result_pb03 zeros size testdata_pb03 result_pb04 zeros size testdata_pb04 testdata_in2 load multi_rates_cw_in2_ hwcosim_test dat testdata_in3 load multi_rates_cw_in3_hwcosim_test dat testdata_in7 load multi_rates_cw_in7_hwcosim_test dat testdata_pb00 load multi_rates_cw_pb00_hwcosim_test dat testdata_pb01 load multi_rates_cw_pb01_hwcosim_test dat testdata_pb02 load multi_rates_cw_pb02_hwcosim_test dat testdata_pb03 load multi_rates_cw_pb03_hwcosim_test dat testdata_pb04 load multi_rates_cw_pb04_hwcosim_test dat Initialize sample index counter for each sample period to be scheduled insp_2 1 insp_3 1 insp_7 outsp_1 outsp_2 outsp_3 outsp_7 Vivado Designing with System Generator 1 1 1 1 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 452 XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Define hardware co simulati
128. 0 of the system clock period down to lus then shrinks the allocation to 1 100 of the system clock period down to 5ns and below that threshold resorts to delta delay stepping for example issuing run 0 ns commands to ModelSim If the HDL includes timing information e g transport delays and the Simulink System Period is set too low then the simulation results are incorrect The above model begins to fail when the Simulink system period setting is reduced below 5e 7 which is the point at which System Generator resorts to delta delay stepping of the black boxes for data propagation Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 230 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mult Mult This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Math Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Mult block implements a multiplier It computes the product of the data on EN its two input ports producing the result on its output port ut Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point output always has Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need full precision this option allows you to s
129. 000 double 2 75 If the argument is a vector state variable disp will print out the type maximum length current length and the binary and double values of all the elements For each simulation step when Enable printing with disp is on and when a disp function is invoked a title Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 212 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode line is printed for the corresponding block The title line includes the block name Simulink simulation time and FPGA clock number The following MCode function shows several examples of using the disp function function x testdisp a persistent dly dly persistent rom rom disp Hello World disp num2str dly is disp disp dly is disp dly disp disp rom is disp rom a2 dly back dly push_front_pop_back a x atb disp a b num2str b X disp disp disp num2str x disp num2str true disp disp 1 disp disp 10 a disp 10 0 opi 10 ae ee disp a b The following lines are the result for the first simulation step num2str a 13 is is is 0 disp a b xlmcode_testdisp MCode Hello World num2str dly i 0 000000 0 00 disp dly is type Fix_11_7 maxlen 8 ape 8 Ons Gis i 00 RD 5 binary 0000 binary 0000 binary 0000 binary 0000 binary 0000 binary 0000 binary 0000 b
130. 10 s UseGatewayOuts 1 s TermWith Block built in Display s TermWith Port 1 s RecurseSubSystem 1 xlAddTerms gcs s Remarks Note that field names are case sensitive When using the fields Source Gatewayln and GatewayOut users have to ensure that the parameter names to be set are valid Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 389 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlAddTerms See Also Toolbar xITBUtils Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 390 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlCache xlCache Used to manage the System Generator caches Syntax core sg usertemp xlCache getpath xlCache clearall xlCache clearcorecache xlCache cleardiskcache xlCache cleartargetcache xlCache clearusertemp maxsize xlCache getdiskcachesize maxentries xlCache getdiskcacheentries Description This function is used to manage the System Generator caches The different forms of the function are described as follows core sg usertemp xlCache getpath Returns the location for the System Generator core cache disk cache and usertemp directory xlCache clearall Clears the System Generator core cache disk cache the usertemp location then reloads the compilation target plugin cache from disk xlCache clearcorecache Clears the core cache The core cache speeds up execution
131. 101 x File 2 Double Click mat Tools Help A Scroll to block gt aest m foo EN El AddSub Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 422 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx BlockAdd As shown below to rapidly scroll to a block enter the first few letters of the block name in the top entry box To add multiple blocks select each block using Shift Click then press Enter Y untitled CE Press Emir gt 2 Shift Click Format Tob p 1 Enter letter s j Clee S taB Eee ea hoo System Generator Addressable Shift Register Configurable Subsystem Manager Disregard Subsystem Divider Generator 3 0 Gateway In Gateway Out To add multiple copies of the same block add a block select the block press Ctrl C then Ctrl V Ctrl V etc To dismiss the Add block window press Esc Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 423 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Xilinx Tools gt Save as blockAdd default Xilinx Tools gt Save as blockAdd default Facilitates the rapid addition of pre configured Xilinx blocks to a Simulink model This feature allows you to pre configure a block then add multiple copies of the pre configured block using the BlockAdd feature How to Use Assume you need to add multiple Gateway In blocks of type Boolean to a model T 2 3 Add one Gateway In block to the
132. 1UpdateModel The function will point out any necessary changes that must be made manually Syntax xlUpdateModel my_model_name xlUpdateModel my_model_name lib xlUpdateModel my_model_name assert Description Updating v2 x and Prior Models If you are upgrading from versions of System Generator earlier than v3 1 you must obtain System Generator v7 x and update your models to v7 x before you can update them to v9 1 01 Updating v3 x v6 x and v7 x Models This section describes the process of upgrading a Xilinx System Generator v3 x v6 x or v7 x model to work with v9 1 01 Note Any reference to v3 x or v6 x in this section can be used interchangeably with v7 x The basic steps for upgrading a v7 x model to v9 1 01 is as follows 1 Save a backup copy of your v7 1 model and user defined libraries that your model uses 2 Run x1UpdateModel on any libraries first and then on your model 3 Read the report produced by xlUpdateModel and follow the instructions 4 Check that your model runs under v9 1 01 These steps are described in greater detail below 1 Save a backup copy of your v7 1 model and user defined libraries that your model uses 2 Run the xlUpdateModel Function Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 415 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlUpdateModel From the MATLAB console cd into the directory containing your model If the name of your model is designName mdl
133. 26 ir is galas Seas a amp Sys Wee anaes Bie E Bue Ye A Bue Be aS A oe wae 63 Requirements on HDL for Black Boxes 0 ee enn e aaae 63 The Black Box Configuration Wizard 0 0 6 cc cette cence enn aaraa 64 The Black Box Configuration M FUNCtION 0 ccc en en cence enn ene nee n ees 65 Sample Peris iia dt iS ne Oe Ha PA SRR AIA o aie Madde a 67 Block Parameters cui a eee 67 Data Type Translation for HDL Co Simulation 1 0 20 00 ccc ccc ence en en enn ene n ees 69 AM Example bee ce a warns wi ote has a taa caia ira mu adicta 69 CIC Compiler 3 0 i54 624 0 000 wi ad vel ieate deca ra 71 Sample Rates and the CIC Compiler Block 1 0 0 ccc eee net n cnet een ene ene 71 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 0 ccc een ee nnn eee eden teen een n eens 72 LOZICORE DOCUMENTATION ccoo ic il gba a bok Boe daa aaa ae SRN wae a wm eee eee pen 73 Clock Enable Probe 66 5665 6oc506 bodies 206 66s SETAE SAAS RES ONES OTIS bee ae aos 74 Clock Probe ites 00000 ca a Sew co wos BG AR RS Bnd AO aca Ww Ae BRS 76 CM lt eee aos A RRA 77 Block Parameters sica A dae ace hed 77 LogiCORE Documentation ccc eee ee ee nee teen teen een een i a ii 79 Complex Multiplier 5 0 i 0 0c cei cise cece ea cea ae dec aeee sia si asia essesiacaasaes 80 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 2 0 0 ccc een enn e een n teen eet eens 80 LogiCORE DOCUMENTATION cu a Grease a ale 85 CONCAtH io eka tistics aceasta dew eat A he od eae ah age tee 86 Block Interfac
134. 4 steps 1 Co ordinate Rotation The CORDIC algorithm converges only for positive values of x If x lt zero the input data is converted to a non negative number If x 0 a zero detect flag is passed along to the last stage which can be exposed at the output stage The log circuit has been designed to converge for all values of x except for the most negative value 2 Normalization The CORDIC algorithm converges only for x between the values 0 5 inclusive and 1 During normalization the input X is shifted to the left till it has a 1 in the most significant bit The log output is derived using the identity log w 2 x tanh 1 w l w 1 Based on this identity the input w gets mapped to x w land y w 1 3 Linear Rotations For tanh 1 w l w 1 calculation the resulting vector is rotated through progressively smaller angles such that y goes to zero 4 Co ordinate Correction If the input was negative a CMPLX_PI flag is provided at the output for adding PI if a complex output is desired If a left shift was applied to X this step adjusts the output by using the equation log w x 2E log w E x log 2 Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Number of Processing Elements integer value starting from 1 specifies the number of iterative stages used for hyperbolic rotat
135. 5 0 e Precision Configures the internal precision of the add sub iterations When set to zero internal precision is determined automatically based on the required accuracy of the output and the number of internal iterations e Compensation scaling Controls the compensation scaling module used to compensate for CORDIC magnitude scaling CORDIC magnitude scaling affects the Vector Rotation and Vector Translation functional configurations and does not affect the SinCos SinhCosh ArcTan ArcTanh and Square Root functional configurations For the latter configurations compensation scaling is set to No Scale Compensation e Coarse rotation Controls the instantiation of the coarse rotation module Instantiation of the coarse rotation module is the default for the following functional configurations Vector rotation Vector translation Sin and Cos and Arc Tan If Coarse Rotation is turned off for these functions then the input output range is limited to the first quadrant Pi 4 to Pi 4 Coarse rotation is not required for the Sinh and Cosh Arctanh and Square Root configurations The standard CORDIC algorithm operates over the first quadrant Coarse Rotation extends the CORDIC operational range to the full circle by rotating the input sample into the first quadrant and inverse rotating the output sample back into the appropriate quadrant Optional ports Standard e aclken When this signal is not asserted the block holds its current stat
136. 7 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block 1 0 cc ne eee tent n tenet ene eens 108 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Block Para meters ika ae A a ion Ate gana tata 109 LogiCORE DocUMentati0N o ooccococo ee eee eee e eee E tent n enn 115 FY lene si 116 Block Parameters id E de herds etnies um E tudes A dei R A E A EE EEE EEE 116 Logic Synthesis using Behavioral HDL 1 ee eee nen e teen eee neas 117 Logic Synthesis using Structural HDL 1 ce een een tenn n ene e eee nens 117 Implementing Long Delays ssir oaeiai o 119 Re settable Delays and Initial Values 2 0 eee cee ene nent e ene eens 120 DO PUNCTURE xo cas Ai A Wee See aS 121 Block Parameters siii A So deb alt MEAG RAG ho BAAS da bide Ahead a ss 122 DIVISA a a As A a ee 123 LogI CORE DOCUMENTALION ossessione ee aoe eee aoe ee OR E E ci RRA AG 4 a eee aaa Wide ane 124 Divider Generator 40 tocarla a saw lace E ao ote acm conta ad tees ans 125 Block Parameters cueros iaa ia ald bee WANA RAS A EE E a a E a a aa a aE araa 125 LogICORE Documentatii sasae iaa tado deal al iaa E E E dalam 127 Down Samples oes isc oe ceeded case ede eee boa eee ee eee ee OSG EEVEE SCAND bee NSS 128 Zero Latency Down SAM ple ve iii dogcscadde ale ecw aca a A REWER AA Gro ea de ase 128 Down Sample with Latency 00 0 0 cc ee enn en en nent e nent beeen beeen eens 129 Block P rameters ini a do hate cias 130 X
137. 8 Macro 2 1 block The following simple steps and design guidelines are required when updating the design Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 134 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 1 Make sure that input and output pipeline register selections between the old and the new block are the same You can do this by examining and comparing the Pipeline Options settings 2 If there is more than one unique input operand required you must provide MUX circuits as shown in the figure below 3 Ensure that the new design provides the same functionality correctness and quality of results compared to the old version This can be accomplished by performing a quick Simulink simulation and implementing the design 4 When configuring and specifying a pre adder mode using the DSP48 Macro 2 1 block in System Generator certain design parameters such as data width input operands are device dependent Refer to the document LogiCORE IP DSP48 Macro 2 1 for details on all the parameters on this LogicCore IP 4 inputs and 2 outputs MUX circuit can be decoded as the following sel A inputs B inputs Opcode 0 alo blo A B 1 alo bhi A B P gt gt 17 2 ahi blo A B P 3 ahi bhi A B P gt gt 17 Terminator Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 135 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 DSP48 macro 20 Xilinx DSP48 macro 2 0
138. D RISK FOR USE OF THE AT amp T SOFTWARE AT amp T DOES NOT MAKE AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT OF ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS ANY WARRANTIES ARISING BY USAGE OF TRADE COURSE OF DEALING OR COURSE OF PERFORMANCE OR ANY WARRANTY THAT THE AT amp T SOFTWARE IS ERROR FREE OR WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS Unless you accept a license to use the AT amp T Software you shall not reverse compile disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer this product to ascertain the source code for any AT amp T Software AT amp T Corp All rights reserved AT amp T is a registered trademark of AT amp T Corp See Also Toolbar xlAddTerms Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 413 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlTimingAnalysis xlTimingAnalysis The System Generator timing analyzer GUI is typically launched by using the Timing and Power Analysis compilation target from the System Generator GUI in MATLAB The xITimingAnalysis MATLAB command is another way of launching the timing analyzer GUI The Timing and Power Analysis compilation target causes the tool to compile the design run place and route and perform other operations prior to displaying the timing analyzer GUI By using the xITimingAnalysis command it is possibl
139. E DOCUMENTATION ada ia 197 DUM CTR is ces nti es fa arb racine Sarees decid da e E E E E E Aire te ee aed ap es 198 Block ParaMeters 2 enn enn en ee Doaa aa een tenn ens 198 LESR AN 199 15 0 ol ad 1 0 0 ere ee ae alada 199 Block Parametros Aes 199 Logical econ a a a a AA aa eased AA AAA 201 Block Parameters 6 se eke ks au ee ibi 201 UTI SC 1 OR Errar dintel tenets tes sere 201 MCdo ra as A OFS 408 A Aas a 202 Configuring an MCode Block o oooooocconoco ee ee nen en nn ene nen tenn ene nen 202 MATLAB Language Support 0 ccc eee ene ence ee nent nent nee nens 203 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 1 0 0 cc ee een en enn e nent nen ene e E n eens 224 ModelSiM coito is a Pe OSA ae a 225 Block Parameters sat OA A delay bee 4 E a ae eco ele ge gear dana 225 Fine POMAR a Seg so waded a adada 227 MUN 686s ices eos00 ee Gse Soe A aa 231 Block Parameters it A ao 231 LogiCORE DOCUMENtAtO A A Aa 232 MU A A Jes enone aioe EE ETE 233 Block Parameters o oooocoooo ee ee en nn eee Ee Ka Ee oE EERU aa E E 233 LogiICORE DOCUMENTALION ssteissi ss 8 ice de A A aa a a BG Breeden led a goed AA 234 Natural LogarithM io seis de cs bene aoe a aa hae aoe eae dele 235 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 0 0 ccc ene enn teen tenn ene e L aa 235 LogiCORE DocUMentatiOn o oocococo ee eee ee eee een ee nee nee a tenn eens 235 Negat etico a er A AAA A AAA eee AAA RT 236 Block Parameters iia a E E E ir nad sd asco a
140. E XILINX Convolution Encoder 8 0 e Output Rate Not Punctured Only the output rate can be modified Its value can be integer values from 2 to 7 resulting in a rate 1 2 or rate 1 7 encoder respectively Punctures e Punctured Determines whether the block is punctured e Dual Output Specifies a dual channel punctured block e Puncture Code0 and Codel The two puncture pattern codes are used to remove bits from the encoded data prior to output The length of each puncture code must be equal to the puncture input rate and the total number of bits set to 1 in the two codes must equal the puncture output rate m for the codes to be valid A 0 in any position indicates that the output bit from the encoder is not transmitted See the associated LogiCORE data sheet for an example Radix e Convolution code radix Select Binary Octal or Decimal Note This Radix option is currently disabled Convolution e Constraint length Constraint Length Equals n 1 where n is the length of the constraint register in the encoder e Convolution code Array of binary convolution codes Output rate is derived from the array length Between 2 and 7 inclusive codes can be entered Optional Pins e Aclken Adds a aclken pin to the block This signal carries the clock enable and must be of type Bool e Aresetn Adds a aresetn pin to the block This signal resets the block and must be of type Bool The signal must be asserted for at least 2 clock cycle
141. File parameter o coe file defines_branch_length_constant_for_each_configuration location of file is specified by the COE File parameter e Value 1 to MAX inclusive MAX depends on the number of branches and size of block input Branch length must be an array of either length one or number of branches If the array size is one the value is used as a constant difference between consecutive branches Otherwise each branch has a unique length e COE File The branch lengths are specified from a file Rectangular Parameters 1 Tab Parameters specific to the Rectangular Parameters 1 tab are as follows Number of Rows e Value This parameter is relevant only when the Constant row type is selected The number of rows is fixed at this value e Row Port Width This parameter is relevant only when the Variable row type is selected It sets the width of the ROW input bus The smallest possible value should be used to keep the underlying LogiCORE as small as possible Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 193 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 Minimum Number of Rows This parameter is relevant only when the Variable row type is selected In this case the core has to potentially cope with a wide range of possible values for the number of rows If the smallest value that will actually occur is known then the amount of logic in the LogiCORE can sometimes be reduced The largest poss
142. GN A B or A B SIGND A B or A B SIGN P or PCIN implies that the carry source is either P or PCIN depending on the Z Mux setting SIGN A B or A B implies that the carry source is either A B or A B depending on the YX Mux setting The option SIGND A B or A B selects a delayed version of SIGN A B or A B Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCORE The Opmode block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE DSP48E Control Instruction Format DSP48E Instruction Operation select Notes C A B PCIN A B P A B Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 239 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Operation select A B Notes C A B C A B C Custom Use equation described in the Custom Instruction Field DSP48E Custom Instruction Instruction Field Name Location Mnemonic Notes XY muxes op 3 0 0 0 P DSP48 output register A B Concat inputs A and B A is MSB A B Multiplication of inputs A and B C DSP48 input C P C DSP48 input C plus P A B C Concat inputs A and B plus C register Z mux op 6 4 0 0 PCIN DSP48 cascaded input from PCOUT P DSP48 output register C DSP48 C input PCIN gt gt 17 Cascaded input downshifted by 17 P gt gt 17 DSP48 output register downshifted by 17 Alumo
143. Generator www xilinx com 245 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Pause Simulation Pause Simulation This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The Xilinx Pause Simulation block pauses the simulation when the input is non zero The block accepts any Xilinx signal type as input Pase When the simulation is paused it can be restarted by selecting the Start button Simulation on the model toolbar Block Parameters There are no parameters for this block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 246 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Index The PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display block takes an encoded 18 bit picoblaze6 instruction and PicoBlaze address output and displays the decoded instruction and the program counter on the block icon This feature is useful when debugging PicoBlaze6 designs and can be used in conjunction with the Single Step Simulation block to step through each instruction PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display Block Interface The PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display block has two input ports The instr port accepts an 18 bit encoded instruction The addr port accepts a picoblase6 10 11 or 12 bit address value which is the program counter Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be
144. IC algorithm is used to move the input vector real imag along the hyperbolic curve until the imag component reaches zero This generates the hyperbolic angle Atanh imag real The hyperbolic angle represents the log of the area under the vector real imag and is unrelated to a trigonometric angle Square_Root When selected a simplified CORDIC algorithm is used to calculate the positive square root of the input Architectural configuration e Word Serial Select for a hardware result with a small area e Parallel Select for a hardware result with high throughput Pipelining mode e No_Pipelining The CORDIC core is implemented without pipelining e Optimal The CORDIC core is implemented with as many stages of pipelining as possible without using any additional LUTs Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 100 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC 5 0 e Maximum The CORDIC core is implemented with a pipeline after every shift add sub stage Data format e SignedFraction Default setting The real and imag inputs and outputs are expressed as fixed point 2 s complement numbers with an integer width of 2 bits e UnsignedFraction Available only for Square Root functional configuration The real and imag inputs and outputs are expressed as unsigned fixed point numbers with an integer with of 1 bit e UnsignedInteger Available only for Square Root functional configuration The real and imag i
145. INX FIFO e Standard FIFO FIFO will operate in Standard Mode e First Word Fall Through FIFO will operate in First Word Fall Through FWFT mode The First Word Fall Through feature provides the ability to look ahead to the next word available from the FIFO without issuing a read operation When data is available in the FIFO the first word falls through the FIFO and appears automatically on the output FWFT is useful in applications that require low latency access to data and to applications that require throttling based on the contents of the data that are read FWFT support is included in FIFOs created with block RAM distributed RAM or built in FIFOs in 7 series devices Implementation Options e Use Embedded Registers when possible In 7 series FPGA block RAM and FIFO macros embedded output registers are available to increase performance and add a pipeline register to the macros This feature can be leveraged to add one additional cycle of latency to the FIFO core DOUT bus and VALID outputs or implement the output registers for FWFT FIFOs The embedded registers available in 7 series FPGAs can be reset DOUT to a default or user programmed value for common clock built in FIFOs See the topic Embedded Registers in block RAM and FIFO Macros in the LogiCORE IP FIFO Generator 9 2 Product Specification Depth specifies the number of words that can be stored Range 16 64K Bits of precision to use for full signal specifies the bit
146. If Phase_Generator_Only is selected then None is the only valid choice for Noise Shaping Hardware Parameters e Phase Width Equivalent to frequency resolution this sets the width of the internal phase calculations Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 109 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 e Output Width Broadly equivalent to SFDR this sets the output precision and the minimum Phase Width allowable However the output accuracy is also affected by the choice of Noise Shaping Output Selection e Sine_and_Cosine Place both a Sine and Cosine output port on the block Sine Place only a Sine output port on the block e Cosine Place only a Cosine output port on the block Polarity e Negative Sine negates the sine output o Negative Cosine negates the cosine output Amplitude Mode e Full_Range Selects the maximum possible amplitude e Unit_Circle Selects an exact power of two amplitude which is about one half the Full_Range amplitude Implementation tab Implementation Options e Memory Type Choose between Auto Distributed_ROM or Block_ROM e Optimization Goal Choose between Auto Area or Speed e DSP48 Use Choose between Minimal and Maximal When set to Maximal XtremeDSP slices are used to achieve to maximum performance Latency Options Auto The DDS is fully pipelined for optimal performance e Configurable Allows you to specify less pipeline stage
147. Initial value for port A output Register specifies the initial value for port A output register The initial value is saturated and rounded according to the precision specified on the data port A of RAM Initial value for port B output register specifies the initial value for port B output register The initial value is saturated and rounded according to the precision specified on the data port B of RAM e Provide synchronous reset port for port A output register when selected allows access to the reset port available on the port A output register of the Block RAM The reset port is available only when the latency of the Block RAM is set to 1 e Provide synchronous reset port for port B output register when selected allows access to the reset port available on the port B output register of the Block RAM The reset port is available only when the latency of the Block RAM is set to 1 e Provide enable port for port A when selected allows access to the enable port for port A The enable port is available only when the latency of the block is greater than or equal to 1 e Provide enable port for port B when selected allows access to the enable port for port B The enable port is available only when the latency of the block is greater than or equal to 1 Advanced tab Parameters specific to the Advanced tab are Port A e Read after write e Read before write e No read on write Port B e Read after write e Read before write
148. LAB command line gcs ans chip this is the Model string handle 3 Now enter the following from the MATLAB command line gt gt xlConfigureSolver gcs Set SolverType to Variable step Set Solver to VariableStepDiscrete Set SolverMode to SingleTasking Set SingleTaskRateTransMsg to None Set InlineParams to on Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 393 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlfda_denominator xlfda_denominator The xlfda_denomiator function returns the denominator of the filter object stored in the Xilinx FDATool block Syntax den xlfda_denominator FDATool_name Description Returns the denominator of the filter object stored in the Xilinx FDATool block named FDATool_name or throws an error if the named block does not exist The block name can be local e g FDATool relative e g FDATool or absolute e g untitled foo bar FDATool See Also xlfda_numerator FDATool Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 394 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlfda_numerator xlfda_numerator The xlfda_numerator function returns the numerator of the filter object stored in the Xilinx FDATool block Syntax num xlfda_numerator FDATool_name Description Returns the numerator of the filter object stored in the Xilinx FDATool block named FDATool_name or throws an error if the named block does
149. Library Replaces the HDL library references in the target directory with the specified library name Syntax xlSwitchLibrary lt target_directory gt lt from_library_name gt lt to_library_name gt Description Replaces all HDL library references to lt from_library_name gt with lt to_library_name gt ina System Generator design located in directory lt target_directory gt Examples Example 1 The following command runs x1SwitchLibrary on a target directory created by System Generator named netlist and switches the default library from work to design1 gt gt xlSwitchLibrary netlist_w_dem work designl INFO Switching HDL library references in design basicmult_dcm_mcw INFO A backup of the original files can be found at D Matlab work Basic netlist_w_dcm switch_lib_backup TlOy INFO Processing file basicmult vhd INFO Processing file basicmult_mcw vhd INFO Processing file basicmult_dcm_mcw vhd INFO Processing file xst_basicmult prj INFO Processing file vcom do INFO Processing file vsim do INFO Processing file pn_behavioral do INFO Processing file pn_posttranslate do INFO Processing file pn_postmap do INFO Processing file pn_postpar do INFO Processing file basicmult_dcm_mcw ise Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 409 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xITBUtils xITBUtils The xITBUtils command provides access to severa
150. M e Test for optimum pipelining checks if the Latency provided is at least equal to the optimum pipeline length supported for the given configuration of the block Latency values that pass this test imply that the core produced is optimized for speed Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Multiplier v11 2 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 79 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 Complex Multiplier 5 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP Index and Math The Complex Multiplier 5 0 block implements AXI4 Stream compliant dout wana fs high performance optimized complex multipliers for devices based on gt a_tdata_ imag user specified options gt a_tdata_real dout tdata imag f gt The two multiplicand inputs and optional rounding bit are input on independent AXI4 Stream channels as slave interfaces and the resulting product output using an AXI4 Stream master interface b_tvalid b_tdata_imag EUR flgyttdata_real gt Complex Multiplier 5 0 Within each channel operands and the results are represented in signed two s complement format The operand widths and the result width are parameterizable Refer to the topic AXI Interfacefor more detailed information on the AXI
151. Now you can edit the M file with the MATLAB editor and set break points as needed amp Editor c haibing sandbox eny Jobs sysgen srcie DER Fle Edt Text Cel Tods Debup Destop window Heb Oe jaen SAF Al 1 feunctian z2 xlwaxi x yl z0 Le xs y ll z Kx 4 elee ce 2 y 05 end 7 During the Simulink simulation the MATLAB debugger will stop at the break points you set when the break points are reached A Editor c haibing sandbox cnv Jobs sysecnisrc c a BA Fle Edt Text cell Tads Debug Desktop window Heb DEE s Bo o SA Elm e SO a 1 function z xlmax x yl A 299 ifx gt gt y EES 2 x E else 5 s y p end a 7 w ximexrn xlein_meoda_proxy m xmax Ln 2 ca 1 When debugging you can also examine the values of the variables by typing the variable names in the MATLAB console Command Window Fle Edt Debug Desktop window Help To get started select MATLAB Help ar Demos from the Help renu gt gt x Fix 11 7 0 794375 E gt y Fix 1D S 0 343750 E gt There is one special case to consider when the function for an MCode block is executed from the MATLAB debugger A switch case expression inside an MCode block must be type xfix however executing a switch case expression from the MATLAB console requires that the expression be a double or char To facilitate execution in the MATLAB console a call to double must be added For example consider the
152. RDIC arc tangent block is calculated based on the formula specified as follows Latency 3 sum latency of Processing Elements Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 335 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC ATAN Reference 1 J E Volder The CORDIC Trigonometric Computing Technique IRE Trans On Electronic Computers Vol EC 8 1959 pp 330 334 2 J S Walther A Unified Algorithm for Elementary Functions Spring Joint Computer Conference 1971 pp 379 385 3 Yu Hen Hu CORDIC Based VLSI Architectures for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Signal Processing Magazine pp 17 34 July 1992 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 336 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC DIVIDER CORDIC DIVIDER y The Xilinx CORDIC DIVIDER reference block implements a divider circuit using a fully parallel CORDIC COordinate Rotation DIgital Computer algorithm in 291 y Linear Vectoring mode That is given a input lt x y gt it computes the output y x The CORDIC processor corbic oiviDeR is implemented using building blocks from the Xilinx blockset The CORDIC divider algorithm is implemented in the following 4 steps 1 Co ordinate Rotation The CORDIC algorithm converges only for positive values of x The input vector is always mapped to the 1st quadrant by making the x and y coordinate non negative The divider circuit has been designed to converge for all v
153. Register shift register in which any register in the delay chain can be addressed and driven onto the output data port AXI FIFO The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface Delay The Xilinx Delay block implements a fixed delay of L cycles Dual Port RAM The Xilinx Dual Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM Dual ports enable simultaneous access to the memory space at different sample rates using multiple data widths FIFO The Xilinx FIFO block implements an FIFO memory queue Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 36 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 10 Memory Blocks Math Block LFSR Description The Xilinx LFSR block implements a Linear Feedback Shift Register LFSR This block supports both the Galois and Fibonacci structures using either the XOR or XNOR gate and allows a re loadable input to change the current value of the register at any time The LFSR output and re loadable input can be configured as either serial or parallel ports ROM The Xilinx ROM block is a single port read only memory ROM Register The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Single Port RAM The Xilinx Single Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM with one data input and one data output port
154. Running Party ASA il Allow other blocks to schedule HDL co simulstion tasks Nota that celecting Skip comeilalion when haperop ale can caure d simaaian emors ard lalures Plaza refer to the Hock help for details ModelSim asic Advenced Auncoimalticnin directory madelcim El Open mewetorn viewer E Leave ModaSim opan t and ol simulation C Skip compilation usa previous raeulte System Generator supports the ModelSim simulator from Mentor Graphics Inc for HDL co simulation For co simulation of Verilog black boxes a mixed mode license is required This is necessary because the portion of the design that System Generator writes is VHDL Usually the co simulator block for a black box is stored in the same subsystem that contains the black box but it is possible to store the block elsewhere The path to a co simulation Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 68 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box block can be absolute or can be relative to the subsystem containing the black box e g ModelSim When simulating each co simulator block uses one license To avoid running out of licenses several black boxes can share the same co simulation block System Generator automatically generates and uses the additional VHDL needed to allow multiple blocks to be combined into a single ModelSim simulation Data Type Translation for HDL Co Simulation
155. SP development kit board during a Simulink simulation You can select between PCI and USB interfaces e Has combinational path Sometimes it is necessary to have a direct combinational feedback path from an output port on a hardware co simulation block to an input port on the same block e g a wire connecting an output port to an input port on a given block If you require a direct feedback path from an output to input port and your design does not include a combinational path from any input port to any output port un checking this box allows the feedback path in the design e Bitstream name Specifies the co simulation FPGA configuration file for the XtremeDSP development kit board When a new co simulation block is instantiated during compilation this parameter is automatically set so that it points to the appropriate configuration file You need only adjust this parameter if the location of the configuration file changes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 381 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX XtremeDSP Digital to Analog Converter XtremeDSP Digital to Analog Converter The Xilinx XtremeDSP DAC block allows System Generator components to connect to the two analog output channels on the Nallatech BenAdda board when a model is prepared for hardware co simulation Separate DAC blocks DAC1 and DAC2 are provided for analog output channels one and two respectively In Simulink the DAC block is modeled by
156. TLAST with the same latency as the datapath e Output TREADY This field enables the data_tready port With this port enabled the block will support back pressure Without the port back pressure is not supported but resources are saved and performance is likely to be higher e TUSER Select one of the following options for the Input and the Output o Not_Required Neither of the uses is required the channel in question will not have a TUSER field e User_Field In this mode the block ignores the content of the TUSER field but passes the content untouched from the input channel to the output channels Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 174 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 e Chan_ID_ Field In this mode the TUSER field identifies the time division multiplexed channel for the transfer o User and Chan _ID Field In this mode the TUSER field will have both a user field and a chan_id field with the chan_id field in the least significant bits The minimal number of bits required to describe the channel will determine the width of the chan_id field e g 7 channels will require 3 bits Configuration Channel Options e Synchronization Mode o On_Vector Configuration packets when available are consumed and their contents applied when the first sample of an interleaved data channel sequence is processed by the block When the block is configured to process a single data channe
157. The reset signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving the reset port must be Boolean e Provide enable port this option activates an optional enable en pin on the block When the enable signal is not asserted the block holds its current state until the enable signal is asserted again or the reset signal is asserted Reset signal has precedence over the enable signal The enable signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving the enable port must be Boolean e Latency Latency is the number of cycles of delay The latency can be zero provided that the Provide enable port checkbox is not checked The latency must be a non negative integer If the latency is zero the delay block collapses to a wire during logic synthesis If the latency is set to L 1 the block will generally be synthesized as a flip flop or multiple flip flops if the data width is greater than 1 Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows e Implement using behavioral HDL uses behavioral HDL as the implementation This allows the downstream logic synthesis tool to choose the best implementation Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Logic Synthesis using Behavioral HDL This setting is recommended if you are using Synplify Pro as the downstream logic synthesis tool The logic synthesis tool will
158. ULA with element spacing of 1 2 at 2GHz with an angular spread of 15 lambda 2 0e9 2 99e8 create_r_la 3 50000 0 lambda 2 lambda 15 2 pi 360 calc_path_data The calc_path_data spec_type spec_fd function generates spectrum data for a model e spec_type Specify the spectrum type for each physical path in the model This value must be a multidimensional array with dimensions MRxMTxN Each element specifies the spectrum type for the physical path e spec_fd Specify the spectrum Doppler frequency for each physical path normalized to the maximum Doppler frequency FDMAX This value can be a multidimensional array with dimensions MRxMTXN or scalar in which case the value is applied to all physical paths If omitted a value of unity is assumed The value of each spectrum type element specifies the spectrum shape to use for that physical path Four spectrum types are supported e Type 0 Specify a null physical path The path coefficients are zero and the path exhibits no transmission Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 358 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model e Type 1 Specify an impulse physical path An impulse path has a single impulse in its spectrum They can be used to represent the line of sight LOS paths in a channel model such as required by Rician channels e Type 2 Specify a classic spectrum physical path The classic spectrum is also known as t
159. Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 219 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode The following figure shows the block diagram of two blocks using the same x1_m_addsub function one having two input ports and one having three input ports xl_m_addsub add_res xI_m_addsub z addsub_res addsub Constructing a State Machine There are two ways to build a state machine using an MCode block One way is to specify a stateless transition function using a MATLAB function and pair an MCode block with one or more state register blocks Usually the MCode block drives a register with the value representing the next state and the register feeds back the current state into the MCode block For this to work the precision of the state output from the MCode block must be static that is independent of any inputs to the block Occasionally you might find you need to use xfix conversions to force static precision The following code illustrates this function nextstate fsml currentstate din some other code nextstate currentstate switch currentstate case 0 if din 1 nextstate 1 end end a xfix call should be used at the end nextstate xfix xlUnsigned 2 0 nextstate Another way is to use state variables The above function can be re written as follows function currentstate fsml din persistent state state xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 2 0 currentstate state switch double state
160. Vivado Design Suite Reference Guide Model Based DSP Design using System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 This document applies to the following software versions Vivado Design Suite 2012 3 and 2012 4 XILINX e XILINX O Notice of Disclaimer The information disclosed to you hereunder the Materials is provided solely for the selection and use of Xilinx products To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law 1 Materials are made available AS IS and with all faults Xilinx hereby DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLLITY NON INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE and 2 Xilinx shall not be liable whether in contract or tort including negligence or under any other theory of liability for any loss or damage of any kind or nature related to arising under or in connection with the Materials including your use of the Materials including for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential loss or damage including loss of data profits goodwill or any type of loss or damage suffered as a result of any action brought by a third party even if such damage or loss was reasonably foreseeable or Xilinx had been advised of the possibility of the same Xilinx assumes no obligation to correct any errors contained in the Materials or to notify you of updates to the Materials or to product specifications
161. X Gateway Out Gateway Out This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types Floating Point and Index Xilinx Gateway Out blocks are the outputs from the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design This block converts the System Generator fixed point or floating point data e type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type According to its configuration the Gateway Out block can either define an output port for the top level of the HDL design generated by System Generator or be used simply as a test point that is trimmed from the hardware representation Gateway Blocks As listed below the Xilinx Gateway Out block is used to provide the following functions e Convert data from a System Generator fixed point or floating point data type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type e Define I O ports for the top level of the HDL design generated by System Generator A Gateway Out block defines a top level output port e Define testbench result vectors when the System Generator Create Testbench box is checked In this case during HDL code generation the outputs from the block that occur during Simulink simulation are logged as logic vectors in a data file For each top level port an HDL component is inserted in the top level testbench that checks this vector against expected results during HDL simulation e Name the corresponding output port on the top le
162. X XNOR Z X AND Z XORZ X AND NOT Z X OR NOT Z X NAND Z Z mux op 6 4 0 0 PCIN DSP48 cascaded input from PCOUT P DSP48 output register C DSP48 C input PCIN gt gt 17 Cascaded input downshifted by 17 P gt gt 17 DSP48 output register downshifted by 17 Operand op 10 7 X Z Add eumege Z X Subtract XY muxes op 3 0 0 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 242 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Instruction Field Name Location Mnemonic Notes P DSP48 output register A B Concat inputs A and B A is MSB A B Multiplication of inputs A and B C DSP48 input C P C DSP48 input C plus P A B C Concat inputs A and B plus C register Carry input op 14 12 0 or 1 Set carry in to 0 or 1 CIN Select cin as source This adds a CIN port to the Opmode block whose value is inserted into the mnemonic at bit location 11 Round PCIN toward infinity Round PCIN toward zero Round P toward infinity Round P toward zero Larger add sub acc parallel operation Larger add sub acc sequential operation Round A B Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Opmode 243 XILINX Parallel to Serial Parallel to Serial This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types and Index The Parallel to Serial block takes an input word
163. Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Reinterpret The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Relational The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator ROM The Xilinx ROM block is a single port read only memory ROM Single Port RAM The Xilinx Single Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM with one data input and one data output port SquareRoot The Xilinx SquareRoot block performs the square root on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 27 XILINX Index Blocks Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Description Absolute The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Absolute The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Addressable Shift Register The Xilinx Addressable Shift Register block is a variable length shift register in which any register in the delay chain can be addressed and driven onto the output data port AddSub The Xilinx AddSub block implements an adder subtractor The operation can be fixed Addition or Subtraction or changed dynamically under control of the sub mo
164. Y Adds a TREADY port to the Result channel Exception Signals UNDERFLOW Adds an output port that serves as an underflow flag DIVIDE_BY_ZERO Adds an output port that serves as a divide by zero flag LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 254 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reciprocal SquareRoot Reciprocal SquareRoot This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Reciprocal SquareRoot block performs the reciprocal squareroot on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reciprocal Square Root Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Flow Control e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel e NonBlocking Selects Non Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Optional ports Input Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a TLAST port to the Input channel e Has TUSER Adds a TUSER port to the Input channel e Provide enable port Adds an enable port to the
165. You may not reproduce modify distribute or publicly display the Materials without prior written consent Certain products are subject to the terms and conditions of the Limited Warranties which can be viewed at http www xilinx com warranty htm IP cores may be subject to warranty and support terms contained in a license issued to you by Xilinx Xilinx products are not designed or intended to be fail safe or for use in any application requiring fail safe performance you assume sole risk and liability for use of Xilinx products in Critical Applications http www xilinx com warranty htm critapps Copyright 2012 Xilinx Inc Xilinx the Xilinx logo Artix ISE Kintex Spartan Virtex Vivado Zynq and other designated brands included herein are trademarks of Xilinx in the United States and other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Revision History The following table shows the revision history for this document Date Version Revision 10 16 12 2012 3 Initial Xilinx release Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 2 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Chapter 1 Xilinx Blockset Organization of Blockset Libraries ooooooooooororoorosrrrrrraranancnncoos 16 AXIA AAA EAN 17 Basic Element Blocks ici A tarde E E A Ad 18 Communication Blocks oo oocooononr aaaeeeaa 21 Control Logic Blocks isk iii ii aie Wai Wk ae A eee era
166. _tdata_sine Constant data_tdata_cosine DDS Compiler 5 0 Scope cosine_o data_tvalid_o 1 T 7 T y 7 y r r osf 0 data_tdata_sine_o data_tdata_cosine_o pp a Time offset O Data Path and Control Signals Both versions have similar data paths and control signals The rdy output signal is replaced by the data_tvalid output signal As shown by the simulation these two control Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 114 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 signals have the same active high when outputs are valid However the propagation delay might not be the same and a delay block might be required depending on your specific design applications data_tvalid Master can be used to drive other input Slave tvalid signal data_tready Slave are not used and being connected to a constant of one LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP DDS Compiler v5 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 115 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Delay Delay This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx Delay block implements a fixed delay of L cycles E The delay value is displayed on the block in the form z L which is the Z transform of the block s transfer function Any data provided to the input of the block will appear at the output a
167. a A peer AAA ee 45 Bl ck Parameters viii AA how A od od aaa aera 45 LogiCORE DOCUMENTALIOR ini dead Hee elk ware wa eee Mak OSS SARA SE ea da Ae abe 46 PCCUMUIALON 0 00 cria A AA ea roe Waves ars Ae bee os oe Seow cee 47 Block Interfaces acs toria oratorio icon 2 ese das 47 Block Parameters ainia aaa DELA 47 LogI CORE Documentation se ecssiasaci aai See nde ecw et wg alee a eg ia a BR DR RRA Pee a AO E acd ae a 48 Addressable Shift Register 20066 s0i 6 bie ce ee ied seve bie bie od ed eae ee a ee ede ae 8 ce 49 Block Interface seri x ob ed ka he nee dedi Red eddy EN es ee bien eae Rice ache Bint 49 Block Parameters anita aaa a ende 50 LogiCORE DOCUMENtAatION 00 a ai ia 50 AddS b nag A A AAA A AA A ARA A A ee ee a 51 Block ParameterS iii ia AA Se ck a acacia 51 LogI CORE DOCUMENTATION iii A A A RA A ia 52 ASSET ir A A A A a 53 Block Parameters aaa A AA ia soi 53 Using the Assert block to Resolve Rates and Types oo ooocococono nen eet n een eens 54 AXI FIFO lt a as 56 Block Itaca ar A a 56 Block Parameters oia AA BANA ed acted ti 56 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX LogICORE DoOcUMENtatiON stassini enone A A Be ne ea a ad a 58 BitBasher iaa ios ican oa cotas 59 Block Parameters 1000 ii a BG Hae ed ai rah henner eee aoa 59 Supported Verilog Constructs 6 en annn eee ene n ee nee eens 59 LIMITATIONS 2 A A eR ans 62 BACK BOX coi
168. a did amauta ua ade iia edita 323 RETErENCE E a a a EA EA EEE E E E E E a T a E A AAA 323 2n tap MAC FIR Filter ssssssrississ its stts ask ceca a a AA AA 324 Block Parameters eir iia iia a 324 NA O ARA 324 4 channel 8 tap Transpose FIR Filter oooooooooooocoomcrrcrnorncrrnnarnooso 325 Block Parameters soto a rr ts a o depa dejada hed Aarne 325 An tap MAC FIR Filter c 0000000000 cico co aaa a a a a Gwe 326 Block Parameters aria ra as A A aaa 326 Retener dr cda sita 326 XO PILGR vidio d teeta ie EE EE E EEE EE dota the ese we Se ees 327 Block ParametelS iaa eo 328 BPSK AWGN Cham el oooocoococcccccccccc neta eet e cece eee e teens eeeeees 329 Block Paramete ccs ssc ari A aie io de dish haves aah ios added aia dee 329 Retenes 330 CIC Fll er ico a A A a a re are are 331 Block intere id a ao 331 Block Parameters 000 A E ai 332 FRETS FE ACO pana indole ia a daban doo E EA 332 Convolutional Encoder 6 55 50 sra da ais 333 implementati Mike eeren rte E AE seen nO a ee 333 Block Interface seiniin a me 334 Block Parameters rt cars ar a A o e E a a teii dates EE tec 334 CORDIC ATAN aa ea a er cd ew AA Oa A le ee r eles 335 Block Paramete Sorserien bota ia ii a E a Ae dao ic a a 335 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX E beere ee E ERA 336 CORDIC DIVIDER 5 0505000 diremos na ce Getta sc eb ever sl Gs baa bese eee aon aia eee eee a 337 Block Param
169. a particular type or rate In general this might be necessary when using components that use feedback and act as a signal source For example the circuit below requires an Assert block to force the rate and type of an SRL16 In this case you can use an Assert block to seed the rate which is then propagated back to the SRL16 input through the SRL16 and back to the Assert block The design below fails with the following message when the Assert block is not used The data types could not be established for the feedback paths through this block You might need to add Assert blocks to instruct the system how to resolve types Delay Constant Addressable Shift Register Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 54 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Assert To resolve this error an Assert block is introduced in the feedback path as shown below Scope2 Delay O Addressable Shift Register Constant2 In the example the Assert block is required to resolve the type but the rate could have been determined by assigning a rate to the constant clock The decision whether to use Constant blocks or Assert blocks to force rates is arbitrary and can be determined on a case by case basis System Generator 8 1 and later now resolves rates and types deterministically however in some cases the use of Assert blocks might be necessary for some System Generator components even if they are resolvable These blo
170. al expression Inverter The Xilinx Inverter block calculates the bitwise logical complement of a fixed point number The block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module Logical The Xilinx Logical block performs bitwise logical operations on fixed point numbers Operands are zero padded and sign extended as necessary to make binary point positions coincide then the logical operation is performed and the result is delivered at the output port MCode The Xilinx MCode block is a container for executing a user supplied MATLAB function within Simulink A parameter on the block specifies the M function name The block executes the M code to calculate block outputs during a Simulink simulation The same code is translated in a straightforward way into equivalent behavioral VHDL Verilog when hardware is generated Mult The Xilinx Mult block implements a multiplier It computes the product of the data on its two input ports producing the result on its output port Natural Logarithm The Xilinx Natural Logarithm block produces the natural logarithm of the input Negate The Xilinx Negate block computes the arithmetic negation of its input Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal block performs the reciprocal on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 35 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libr
171. ally consists of two flip flops two LUTs and some associated mux carry and control logic e value 2 Flip Flops utilized by the block e value 3 Block RAM BRAMs utilized by the block e value 4 LUTs utilized by the block e value 5 IOBs consumed by the block e value 6 Embedded Emb multipliers utilized by the block e value 7 Tristate Buffers TBUFs utilized by the block Only the Xilinx blocks that have a hardware cost for example blocks that require physical hardware resources are considered by the Resource Estimator The FPGA Area field is omitted from blocks with no associated hardware Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 42 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Although Slices are related to LUTs and Flops Each Slice contains 1 LUT and 1 Flip Flop they are entered separately since the number of packed slices will vary depending on the particular design Some Xilinx blocks do not support automatic resource estimation as indicated in the Resource Estimator block documentation The FPGA Area field for these blocks will not be updated automatically and attempting to do so will cause a warning message to be displayed in the MATLAB console Display shortened port names AXI4 Stream signal names have been shortened by default to improve readability on the block Name shortening is purely cosmetic and when netlisting occurs
172. also has optional ports vin and vout that specify when input and output respectively are valid Both valid ports are of type Bool Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the block are as follows Number of Inputs specifies the number of inputs 2 to 32 e Provide valid Port when selected the multiplexer is augmented with input and output valid ports named vin and vout respectively When the vin port indicates that input values are invalid the vout port indicates the corresponding output frame is invalid Parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 302 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Toolbar Toolbar This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The Xilinx Toolbar block provides quick access to several useful utilities in System Generator The Toolbar simplifies the use of the zoom feature in Simulink and adds new auto layout and route capabilities to Simulink models Toolbsr The Toolbar also houses several productivity improvement tools described below Block Interface Double clicking on the Xilinx Toolbar block launches the GUI shown below Xilinx T HER Tools Help The Toolbar can also be launched from the command line using xITBUtils a co
173. alues of X and Y except for the most negative value Normalization The CORDIC algorithm converges only for y less than or equal to 2x The inputs x and y are shifted to the left until they have a 1 in the most significant bit MSB The relative shift of y over x is recorded and passed on to the co ordinate correction stage Linear Rotations For ratio calculation the resulting vector is rotated through progressively smaller angles such that y goes to zero In the final stage the rotation yields y x Co ordinate Correction Based on the co ordinate axis and a relative shift applied to y over x this step assigns the appropriate sign to the resulting ratio and multiplies it with 2 relative shift of y over x Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows Number of Processing Elements specifies the number of iterative stages used for linear rotation X Y Data Width specifies the width of the inputs x and y The inputs x and y should be signed data type with the same data width X Y Binary Point Position specifies the binary point position for inputs x and y The inputs x and y should be signed data type with the same binary point position Latency for each Processing element This parameter sets the pipeline latency after each iterative linear rotation stage Vivado Designing with System Generat
174. and produces a double signal as output Indeterminate data on the probe input will result in an assertion of the output signal indicated by a value one Otherwise the probe output is zero Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 185 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI Communication and Index The Xilinx Interleaver Deinterleaver block implements an data teady gt interleaver or a deinterleaver using an AXI4 compliant block interface An interleaver is a device that rearranges the order of a dan sald sequence of input symbols The term symbol is used to describe a collection of bits In some applications a symbol is a single bit In e dammam doti others a symbol is a bus eee The classic use of interleaving is to randomize the location of errors introduced in signal transmission Interleaving spreads a burst of errors out so that error correction circuits have a better chance of correcting the data event_thst_unexpected InteneavenrDe inteneaver 1 If a particular interleaver is used at the transmit end of a channel the inverse of that interleaver must be used at the receive end to recover the original data The inverse interleaver is referred to as a de interleaver Two types of interleaver de interleavers can be generated with this LogiCORE Forney Convolutio
175. and the source block does not exist Error Message s Source block NoSubSourceBlock cannot be found When calling xBlock sourceblock parameterBinding and the parameters are illegal xBlock will report the Illegal parameterization error For example xBlock AddSub struct latency 1 Illegal parameterization Latency Latency is set to a value of 1 but the value must be greater than or equal to 0 When the input port binding list contains objects other than xSignal or xInport Only objects of xInport or xSignal can appear in inport binding list When the output port binding list contains objects other than xSignal or xOutport Only objects of xOutport or xSignal can appear in outport binding list If the first argument of xBlockisa function pointer the 2nd argument of xBlock is expected to be a cell array otherwise an error is thrown Cell array is expected for the second argument of the xBlock call If the source configuration struct has toplevel defined it must point to a Simulink subsystem and it must be a char array otherwise an error is thrown Top level must be a char array If an object in the outport binding list has already been driven by something for example if you try to have two driving sources an error is thrown Note the error message is not intuitive we will fix it later Source of xSignal object already exists Vivado Design
176. ap filter The filter configuration helps illustrate a cyclic RAM buffer technique for storing coefficients and data samples in a single block ram The filter allows users to select the interpolation factor they require The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures The filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Interpolation Filter Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Input Data Bit Width Width of input sample Input Data Binary Point Binary point location of input e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point per Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient e Interpolation Factor Select the Interpolation Ratio of the filter Range from 2 to 10 e Sample Peri
177. ardware provided by the second This is useful for example when a subsystem is defined in the usual way with Simulink blocks but black box HDL is used to implement the subsystem in hardware An example is shown below For Simulation sample_in sample_out MAC_FIR_Subsystem For Generation 5 Simulation Multiplexer sample_in sample_out Black Box Using Subsystem for Simulation and Black Box for Hardware The Simulation Multiplexer has two inputs ports In the block parameters dialog box one port can be identified as For Simulation and a second as For Generation The portion of the design that drives the For Simulation port is used as the simulation model and the portion that drives For Generation is used to produce hardware The same port can be used for both In this case the portion of the design that drives the combined For Simulation For Generation port is used both for simulation and to produce hardware while the other portion is ignored It should be noted that simulation results from a design that contains a Simulation Multiplexer need not be bit and cycle accurate Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 283 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Simulation Multiplexer The Simulation Multiplexer is useful whenever there is a difference between what should be used for simulation and what should be used in hardware For example a hardware co simulation token with an accompanying FPGA bitst
178. are Notes The distributed memory LogiCORE supports only the Read before write mode The Xilinx Single Port RAM block also allows distributed memory with write mode option set to Read after write when specified latency is greater than 0 The Read after write mode for the distributed memory is achieved by using extra hardware resources a MUX at the distributed memory output to latch data during a write operation LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Block Memory Generator v6 3 LogiCORE IP Distributed Memory Generator v6 3 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 287 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Single Step Simulation Single Step Simulation This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The Xilinx Single Step Simulation block pauses the simulation each clock single step continuous Cycle when in single step mode Single Step Single Step Double clicking on the icon switches the block from single step to Simulstion Simulstiont Continuous mode When the simulation is paused it can be restarted by selecting the Start button on the model toolbar gt Block Parameters There are no parameters for this block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 288 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Slice Slice This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Data Types and In
179. are clock periods DSP48 tab DS48 Instruction When DSP48 Instruction is selected for type the DSP48 tab is activated A detailed description of the DSP48 can be found in the DSP48 block description e DSP48 operation displays the selected DSP48 instruction e Operation select allows the selection of a DSP48 instruction Selecting custom reveals mask parameters that allow the formation of an instruction in the form z_mux yx_mux carry Custom Instruction e Z Mux specifies the Z source to the DSP48 s adder to be one of 0 C PCIN P C PCIN gt gt 17 P gt gt 17 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 90 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Constant e Operand specifies whether the DSP48 s adder is to perform addition or subtraction e YX Muxes specifies the YX source to the DSP48 s adder to be one of 0 P A B A B C P C A B C A B implies that A 17 0 is concatenated with B 17 0 to produce a 36 bit value to be used as an input to the DSP48 adder e Carry input specifies the carry source to the DSP48 s adder to be one of 0 1 CIN SIGN P or PCIN SIGN A B or A B SIGND A B or A B SIGN P or PCIN implies that the carry source is either P or PCIN depending on the Z Mux setting SIGN A B or A B implies that the carry source is either A B or A B depending on the YX Mux setting The option SIGND A B or A B
180. are to Saturate to the largest positive smallest negative value to Wrap for example to discard bits to the left of the most significant representable bit or to Flag as error an overflow as a Simulink error during simulation Flag as error is a simulation only feature The hardware generated is the same as when Wrap is selected Optional Ports Provide enable port Activates an optional enable en pin on the block When the enable signal is not asserted the block holds its current state until the enable signal is asserted again or the reset signal is asserted Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows e Pipeline for maximum performance directs the block to use pipeline registers to achieve the maximum performance Block latency might increase Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 94 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Convert LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 95 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Convolution Encoder 8 0 Convolution Encoder 8 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 Communication and Index The Xilinx Convolution Encoder block implements an encoder for convolution codes Ordinarily used in tandem
181. aries Table 1 9 Math Blocks Math Block Description Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal SquareRoot block performs the reciprocal SquareRoot squareroot on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reinterpret The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Relational The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator Scale The Xilinx Scale block scales its input by a power of two The power can be either positive or negative The block has one input and one output The scale operation has the effect of moving the binary point without changing the bits in the container Shift The Xilinx Shift block performs a left or right shift on the input signal The result will have the same fixed point container as that of the input SquareRoot The Xilinx SquareRoot block performs the square root on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Threshold The Xilinx Threshold block tests the sign of the input number If the input number is negative the output of the block is 1 otherwise the output is 1 The output is a signed fixed point integer that is 2 bits long The block has one input and one output Memory Blocks Table 1 10 Memory Blocks Math Block Description Addressable Shift The Xilinx Addressable Shift Register block is a variable length
182. array If the source parameter is a function pointer this argument must be a cell array The inports and outports arguments specify how subsystem input and output ports are bound The binding can be a cell array for position based binding or a MATLAB struct for name based binding When specifying an inport outport binding an element of a cell array can be an xSignal an xInport or an xOutport object If the port binding argument is a MATLAB struct a field of the struct is a port name of the block a value of the struct is the object that the port is bound to The two port binding arguments are optional If the arguments are missing when constructing the xBlock object the port binding can be specified through the bindPort method of an xBlock object The bindPort method is invoked as follows block bindPort inports outports where inports and outports arguments specify the input and output port binding In this case the object block is create by xBlock with only two arguments the source and the parameter binding Other xBlock methods include the following e names block getOutportNames returns a cell array of outport names Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 435 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator API for Programmatic Generation e names block getInportNames returns a cell array of inport names e nin block getNumInports returns the number of inports nout block getNumout
183. ata channel Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 311 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 m_axis_data_tdata_data port represents the decoded output data and it is always 1 bit wide m_axis_data_tdata_sector port becomes available for Trellis Mode decoder This port is always 4 bit wide The output SECTOR is a delayed version of the input SECTOR bus Both buses have a fixed width of 4 bits The delay equals the delay through the Trellis Mode decoder e m_axis_data_tuser TUSER for M_AXIS_DATA channel These ports are only present if the block is a Dual Decoder or it has normalization signal present or it has Block Valid option checked m_axis_data_tuser_sel port becomes available when the block is configured as a Dual Decoder This signal is a delayed version of the input s_axis_data_tuser_sel signal The delay equals to the delay through the Dual Decoder m_axis_data_tuser_norm port becomes available when NORM option is checked on Page 5 tab This port indicates when normalization has occurred within the core It gives an immediate indication of the rate of errors in the channel m_axis_data_tuser_block_out port becomes available when Block Valid option is checked on Page 5 tab This signal is a delayed version of the input s_axis_data_tuser_block_in signal The BLOCK_OUT signal shows the decoded data corresponding to the original BLOCK_IN set of data points The delay equals the delay thr
184. ath gt examples demos sysgenReloadable mdl 2 Select the FIR Compiler block 3 From the MATLAB command line type x1GetReloadOrder gcbh The following reload order of coefficients should appear 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Note Note the Return type was not specified and it defaulted to tranform_matrix The specified coefficients are 1 2 3 2 1 Since the filter is inferred as a symmetric filter only 3 out of 5 coefficients need to be loaded Then the order should be the 3rd element first followed by the 2nd then the 1st for example 3 2 1 4 With the same FIR Compiler settings change the Return type from transform_matrix to address_vector as follows xlGetReloadOrder gcbh struct address_vector The same reload order of coefficients should appear but with a different format ans 3 2 1 5 Now try to change the filter s coefficient structure Double click on the FIR Compiler block click on the Implementation tab select Non_Symmetric for the Coefficient Structure then Click OK 6 Verify that the FIR Compiler b is selected and enter the same command from the previous step Observe the different loading order and numbers of coefficient being loaded ans 5 4 3 2 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 402 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX xlGetReloadOrder Note The specified coefficients are 1 2 3 2 1 Since the filter is now explicitly set to non_sym
185. ation of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Description Interleaver De interl The Xilinx Interleaver Deinterleaver block implements an eaver 7 1 interleaver or a deinterleaver using an AXI4 compliant block interface An interleaver is a device that rearranges the order of a sequence of input symbols The term symbol is used to describe a collection of bits In some applications a symbol is a single bit In others a symbol is a bus Inverter The Xilinx Inverter block calculates the bitwise logical complement of a fixed point number The block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module LFSR The Xilinx LFSR block implements a Linear Feedback Shift Register LFSR This block supports both the Galois and Fibonacci structures using either the XOR or XNOR gate and allows a re loadable input to change the current value of the register at any time The LFSR output and re loadable input can be configured as either serial or parallel ports Logical The Xilinx Logical block performs bitwise logical operations on fixed point numbers Operands are zero padded and sign extended as necessary to make binary point positions coincide then the logical operation is performed and the result is delivered at the output port MCode The Xilinx MCode block is a container for executing a user supplied MATLAB function within Simulink A parameter on the block specifies the M function name The block executes the M code t
186. attern Detection Reset p register on pattern detection if selected and the pattern is detected reset the p register on the next cycle Pattern Input o Pattern Input from c port when selected the pattern used in pattern detection is read from the c port e Using Pattern Attribute 48bit hex value value is used in pattern detection logic which is best described as an equality check on the output of the adder subtractor logic unit o Pattern attribute a 48 bit value that is used in the pattern detector Mask Input o Mask input from c port when selected the mask used in pattern detection is read from the c port e Using Mask Attribute 48 bit hex value 48 bit value used to mask out certain bits during pattern detection o Model Selects rounding_mode 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 144 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 o Mode2 Selects rounding_mode 2 Optional Ports tab Parameters specific to the Optional Ports tab are Consolidate control port when selected combines the opmode alumode carry_in carry_in_ sel and inmode ports into one 20 bit port Bits O to 6 are the opmode bits 7 to 10 are the alumode port bit 11 is the carry_in port bits 12 to 14 are the carry_in_sel port and bits 15 19 are the inmode bits This option should be used when the opmode block is used to generate a DSP48E instruction Provide c port when selected the c port is made availa
187. ay Shared Memory Read Shared Memory Write VDMA etc White Utility or Tool Red Symbol System Generator Token control panel Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 16 XILINX AXI4 Blocks Table 1 1 AXI4 Blocks Organization of Blockset Libraries Block AXI FIFO Description The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface CIC Compiler 3 0 The Xilinx CIC Compiler provides the ability to design and implement AXI4 Stream compliant Cascaded Integrator Comb CIC filters for a variety of Xilinx FPGA devices CORDIC 5 0 The Xilinx CORDIC 5 0 block implements a generalized coordinate rotational digital computer CORDIC algorithm and is AXI compliant Complex Multiplier 5 0 The Complex Multiplier 5 0 block implements AXI4 Stream compliant high performance optimized complex multipliers for devices based on user specified options Convolution Encoder 8 0 The Xilinx Convolution Encoder block implements an encoder for convolution codes Ordinarily used in tandem with a Viterbi decoder this block performs forward error correction FEC in digital communication systems This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard DDS Compiler 5 0 The Xilinx DDS Direct Digital Synthesizer Compiler 5 0 block implements high performance optimized Phase Generation and Phase to Sinusoid
188. ay has only one column since the input value does not affect the output of the state machine Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model The next state logic and state register in this block are implemented with high speed dedicated block RAM The output logic is implemented using a distributed RAM configured as a lookup table and therefore has zero latency The number of bits used to implement a Moore state machine is given by the equations ds 2k 21 2k i Ww k Ns d ws k 2k i where N total number of next state logic block RAM bits s number of states A ceil log2 s number of input bits d depth of state logic block RAM Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 353 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Moore State Machine w width of state logic block RAM The following table gives examples of block RAM sizes necessary for various state machines Number of States diia Input spares ee a 2 5 64 4 1 8 8 6 1536 16 5 2048 32 4 2560 52 1 768 100 4 14336 The block RAM width and depth limitations are described in the core datasheet for the Single Port Block Memory Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 354 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model Multipath Fading Channel Model The Mu
189. ay2 sri_delaw reg1 has_only_1 sd172_arrayD reg_array 0Y has_2 late nverterz op 0 nly_1 sd17e_array reg_ara ar dadenoy uz ee The first SRL provides a delay of 16 cycles and the associated flip flop adds another cycle of delay The second SRL provides a delay of 14 cycles this is evident because the address is set to A3 A2 A1 A0 1101 binary 13 and the latency through an SRL is the value of the address plus one The last flip flop adds a cycle of delay making the grand total L 16 1 14 1 32 cycles The SRL is an efficient way of implementing delays in the Xilinx architecture An SRL and its associated flip flop that comprise a single logic cell can implement seventeen cycles of delay whereas a delay line consisting only of flip flops can implement only one cycle of delay per logic cell The SRL has a setup time that is longer than that of a flip flop Therefore for very fast designs with a combinational path preceding the delay block it can be advantageous when using the structural HDL setting to precede the delay block with an additional delay block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 118 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Delay with a latency of L 1 This ensures that the critical path is not burdened with the long setup time of the SRL An example is shown below di mn 1 m Inwerterd Delayd dl ed de a dina dout InwerterZ Delay3 Delay2 These designs are logically equivalent but t
190. b are as follows e Expression Bitwise logical expression Align Binary Point specifies that the block must align binary points automatically If not selected all inputs must have the same binary point position Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 154 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Expression Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 155 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP Floating Point and Index gt contig_tdata_scale_sch config_tready data_treacy gt config_tdata_fwel_inv data_tdata_xk_im gt contig_tvalid data_tdata_xk_re data_tvalid data_tdata_xn_im estat data_tdata_xn_re event_frame_started event_tlast_unexpected data_ivalid event_tlast_missing atari event _data_in_channel halt event_status_ channel halt data_teady event_data_out_channel_halt Fast Fourier Transtorm 8 0 The Xilinx Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 block implements the Cooley Tukey FFT algorithm a computationally efficient method for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT In addition the block provides an AXI4 Stream compliant interface The FFT computes an N point forward DFT or inverse DFT IDFT whe
191. b input is 1 the block performs subtraction Otherwise it performs addition e Provide carry in port When selected allows access to the carry in port cin The carry in port is available only when User defined precision is selected and the binary point of the inputs is set to zero e Provide carry out port When selected allows access to the carry out port cout The carry out port is available only when User defined precision is selected the inputs and output are unsigned and the number of output integer bits equals x where x max integer bits a integer bits b Output tab Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point arithmetic output will always be Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need full precision this option allows you to specify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits User Defined Precision Fixed point Precision Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 51 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX AddSub e Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number e Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number e Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit gt Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed poin
192. be Bool Note aresetn must be asserted low for at least 2 clock periods and at least 1 sample period before the decoder can start decoding code symbols e aclken carries the clock enable signal for the encoder The signal driving aclken must be Bool Added to the block when you select the optional pin ACLKEN Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Attributes Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Code Block Specification e Code specification specifies the encoder type desired The choices are Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 266 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 Custom allows you to set all the block parameters DVB implements DVB Digital Video Broadcasting standard 204 188 shortened RS code ATSC implements ATSC Advanced Television Systems Committee standard 207 187 shortened RS code G_709 implements G 709 Optical Transport Network standard ETSI_BRAN implements the ETSI Project standard for Broadband Radio Access Networks BRAN CCSDS implements CCSDS Consultative Committee for Space Data Systems standard 255 223 full length RS code ITU_J_83_Annex_B implements International Telecommunication Union ITU J 83 Annex B specification 128 122 extended RS code IESS 308 All implements IESS 308 INTELSAT Earth Station Standard spe
193. be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Initial value specifies the initial value in the register Optional Ports Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCORE The Register block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module It does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 277 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Sample Time Sample Time This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index E The Sample Time block reports the normalized sample period of its input A signal s ST p normalized sample period is not equivalent to its Simulink absolute sample period In Sample Time hardware this block is implemented as a constant Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 278 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Scale Scale This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Data Types Math and Index The Xilinx Scale block scales its input by a power of two The power can be either gt positive or negative The block has one input and one output The scale operation has the effect of moving the binary point without changing the bits in the container Scale Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by doub
194. be used to implement the data output buffer where present Preference for other storage Specifies the type of memory to be used to implement general storage in the datapath DSP Slice Column Options e Multi Column Support For device families with DSP slices implementations of large high speed filters might require chaining of DSP slice elements across multiple columns Where applicable the feature is only enabled for multi column devices you can select the method of folding the filter structure across the multiple columns which can be Automatic based on the selected device for the project or Custom you select the length of the first and subsequent columns e Column Configuration Specifies the individual column lengths in a comma delimited list See the data sheet for a more detailed explanation e Inter Column Pipe Length Pipeline stages are required to connect between the columns with the level of pipelining required being depending on the required system clock rate the chosen device and other system level parameters The choice of this parameter is always left for you to specify Interface tab Data Channel Options e TLAST TLAST can either be Not_Required in which case the block will not have the port or Vector_Framing where TLAST is expected to denote the last sample of an interleaved cycle of data channels or Packet_Framing where the block does not interpret TLAST but passes the signal to the output DATA channel
195. ber of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample e Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 322 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 2n tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 2n tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx 2n tap linear phase MAC FIR filter reference block implements a E multiply accumulate based FIR filter The block exploits coefficient symmetry ha for an even number of coefficients to increase filter throughput These filter Prise creer ss designs exploit silicon features found in Virtex family FPGAs such as dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference blo
196. ble Otherwise the c port is tied to 0 Provide global reset port when selected the port rst is made available This port is connected to all available reset ports based on the pipeline selections Provide global enable port when selected the optional en port is made available This port is connected to all available enable ports based on the pipeline selections Provide pcin port when selected the pcin port is exposed The pcin port must be connected to the pcout port of another DSP48 block Provide carry cascade in port when selected the carry cascade in port is exposed This port can only be connected to a carry cascade out port on another DSP48E block Provide multiplier sign cascade in port when selected the multiplier sign cascade in port multsigncascin is exposed This port can only be connected to a multiplier sign cascade out port of another DSP48E block Provide carryout port when selected the carryout output port is made available When the mode of operation for the adder subtractor is set to one 48 bit adder the carryout port is 1 bit wide When the mode of operation is set to two 24 bit adders the carryout port is 2 bits wide The MSB corresponds to the second adder s carryout and the LSB corresponds to the first adder s carryout When the mode of operation is set to four 12 bit adders the carryout port is 4 bits wide with the bits corresponding to the addition of the 48 bit input split into 4 12 bit sections P
197. ble only for the free running counter Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows Implementation Details Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 105 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Counter Use behavioral HDL otherwise use core The block is implemented using behavioral HDL This gives the downstream logic synthesis tool maximum freedom to optimize for performance or area Core Parameters e Implement using Core logic can be implemented in Fabric or in a DSP48 if a DSP48 is available in the target device The default is Fabric Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Binary Counter v11 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 106 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 DDS Compiler 5 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP and Index The Xilinx DDS Direct Digital Synthesizer Compiler 5 0 block implements data vaia gt high performance optimized Phase Generation and Phase to Sinusoid TIA circuits with AXI4 Stream compliant interfaces for supported devices data_tdata_sine The core sources sinusoidal waveforms for use in many applications ADDS data data cosine gt COnsists of a Phase Generator and a SIN COS Lookup Table phase to sinusoid conversion Thes
198. block interface e Has Result TREADY Adds a TREADY port to the Result channel Exception Signals INVALID_OP Adds an output port that serves as an invalid operation flag DIVIDE_BY_ZERO Adds an output port that serves as a divide by zero flag Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 255 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reciprocal SquareRoot LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 256 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXl4 Communication and Index input_tready input_tvalid output_tvalid output tdata_data_out input_tdata_clata_in output_tlast stat_tvalid The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage They are used to correct errors in many systems such as digital storage devices wireless mobile communications and digital video broadcasting stat data erent The Reed Solomon decoder processes blocks generated by a Reed Solomon encoder attempting to correct errors and recover information symbols The number and type of errors that can be corrected depend on the
199. cification all shortened RS code IESS 308 126 implements IESS 308 INTELSAT Earth Station Standard specification 126 112 shortened RS code IESS 308 194 implements IESS 308 specification 194 178 shortened RS code IESS 308 208 implements IESS 308 specification 208 192 shortened RS code IESS 308 219 implements IESS 308 specification 219 201 shortened RS code IESS 308 225 implements IESS 308 specification 225 205 shortened RS code e Variable Number of Check Symbols r false true When checked the ctrl_tdata_r_in and ctrl_tdata_n_in pins become available on the block e Variable Block Length false true When checked the ctrl_tdata_n_in pin becomes available on the block e Symbol width tells the width in bits for symbols in the code The encoder support widths from 3 to 12 e Field polynomial specifies the polynomial from which the symbol field is derived It must be specified as a decimal number This polynomial must be primitive A value of zero indicates the default polynomial should be used Default polynomials are listed in the table below Symbol Width dl Array Representation 3 x3 x 1 11 4 x4 x 1 19 5 x x2 1 37 6 x x 1 67 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 267 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 Symbol Width hee Array Representation 7 x7 x3 1 137 8 x8 x44
200. ck Provide PCOUT port when selected the pcout output port is made available The pcout port must be connected to the pcin port of another DSP48 block Provide multiplier sign cascade out port when selected the multiplier sign cascade out port multsigncascout is made available This port can only be connected to the multiplier sign cascade in port of another DSP48E block and is used to support 96 bit accumulators adders and subtracters which are built from two DSP48Es Provide carry cascade out port when selected the carry cascade out port carrycascout is made available This port can only be connected to the carry cascade in port of another DSP48E block Pipelining tab Parameters specific to the Pipelining tab are e Length of a acin pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline on input register A A pipeline of length O removes the register on the input e Length of b bCIN pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline for the b input whether it is read from b or bcin e Length of acout pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline between the a acin input and the acout output port A pipeline of length 0 removes the register from the acout pipeline length Must be less than or equal to the length of the a acin pipeline e Length of bcout pipeline specifies the length of the pipeline between the b bcin input and the bcout output port A pipeline of length O removes the register from the bcout pipeline length Must be less t
201. ck are as follows e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient e Number of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample e Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 323 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 2n tap MAC FIR Filter 2n tap MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx 2n tap MAC FIR Filter reference block implements a e multiply accumulate based FIR filter The three filter configurations help ETE illustrate the tradeoffs between filter throughput and device resource rise consumption The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide MAC FIR Filter dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures Each filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsyste
202. ck is basically a block RAM with some associated address counters The model below shows a novel way of implementing a long delay using LFSRs linear feedback shift registers for the address counters in order to make the design faster but conventional counters can be used as well The difference in value between the counters minus the RAM latency is the latency L of the delay line BRAM Re settable Delays and Initial Values If a delay line absolutely must be re settable to zero this can be done by using a string of L register blocks to implement the delay or by creating a circuit that forces the output to be zero while the delay line is flushed The delay block doesn t support initial values but the Addressable Shift Register block does This block when used with a fixed address is generally equivalent to the delay block and will synthesize to an SRL based delay line The initial values pertain to initialization only and not to a reset If using the addressable shift register in structural HDL mode e g the Use behavioral HDL checkbox is not selected then the delay line will not be terminated with a flip flop making it significantly slower This can be remedied by using behavioral mode or by putting a Register or Delay block after the addressable shift register Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 120 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Depuncture Depuncture This block is
203. ck size automatically whenever a new row or column value is sampled Pruning is impossible with this block size type Variable Block size is sampled from the BLOCK_SIZE input at the beginning of every block The value sampled on BLOCK_SIZE must be such that the last symbol falls on the last row as previously described If the block size is already available external to the core selecting this option is usually more efficient than selecting rows columns for the block size type Row and column permutations are not supported for the Variable block size type Port Parameters 1 tab Parameters specific to the Port Parameters tab are as follows Control Signals ACLKEN When ACLKEN is de asserted Low all the synchronous inputs are ignored and the block remains in its current state ARESETn Active Low Active low synchronous clear input that always takes priority over ACLKEN Status Signals COL_VALID This optional output is available when a variable number of columns is selected If an illegal value is sampled on the s_axis_ctrl_tdata_col input event_col_valid will go Low a predefined number of clock cycles later COL_SEL _ VALID This optional output event_col_sel_valid is available when a selectable number of columns is chosen The event pins are event_col_valid event_col_sel_valid event_row_valid event_row_sel_valid event_block_size_valid in the same order as in the options on the GUI ROW_VALID This opt
204. cks might include Black Box components and certain IP blocks Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 55 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX AXI FIFO AXI FIFO This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface Block Interface Write Channel AXI FIFO tready Indicates that the slave can accept a transfer in the current cycle e tvalid Indicates that the master is driving a valid transfer A transfer takes place when both tvalid and tready are asserted e tdata The primary input data channel Read Channel e tdata The primary output for the data e tready Indicates that the slave can accept a transfer in the current cycle Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Performance Options e FIFO depth specifies the number of words that can be stored Range 16 4M Actual FIFO depth A report field that indicates the actual FIFO depth The actual depth of the FIFO depends on its implementation and the features that influence its implementation Optional Ports e TDATA The primary payload that is used to provide the data that is passing across the interface The width of the data payload is an
205. ckset libraries Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Assert block is used to assert a rate and or a type on a signal This block has no cost in hardware and can be used to resolve rates and or types in situations where Assert designer intervention is required Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this block are as follows Assert Type Assert type specifies whether or not the block will assert that the type at its input is the same as the type specified If the types are not the same an error message is reported e Specify type specifies whether or not the type to assert is provided from a signal connected to an input port named type or whether it is specified Explicitly from parameters in the Assert block dialog box Output Precision e Specifies the data type of the output Can be Boolean Fixed point or Floating point Arithmetic Type If the Output Type is specified as Fixed point you can select Signed 2 s comp or Unsigned as the Ar it heme tic Type Fixed point Precision e Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit o Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom
206. coding is only available for the standard parallel block Data Format e Signed Magnitude e Offset Binary available for soft coding only See Table 1 in the associated LogiCORE Product Specification for the Signed Magnitude and Offset Binary data format for Soft Width 3 Page3 tab Convolution 0 e Output Rate 0 Output Rate 0 can be any value from 2 to 7 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 314 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 e Convolution Code 0 Radix The convolutional codes can be input and viewed in binary octal or decimal e Convolution Code Array 0 6 First array of convolution codes Output rate is derived from the array length Between 2 and 7 inclusive codes can be entered When dual decoding is used a value of O low on the sel port corresponds to this array Page4 tab The options on this tab are activated when you select Dual Decoder as the Viterbi Type on the Pagel tab Convolution 1 e Output Rate 1 Output Rate 1 can be any value from 2 to 7 This is the second output rate used if the decoder is dual The incoming data is decoded at this rate when the SEL input is high Output Rate 1 is not used for the non dual decoder e Convolution Code 1 Radix The convolutional codes can be input and viewed in binary octal or decimal Page5 tab BER Options e Use BER Symbol Count This bit error rate BER option monitors the error rate on the transmi
207. column permutations are not to be performed e Use COE file This tells System Generator that a column permute vector exists in the COE file and that column permutations are to be performed Remember this is possible only for un pruned interleaver deinterleavers COE File Specify the pathname to the CoE file Block Size e Value This parameter is relevant only when the Constant block size type is selected The block size is fixed at this value e BLOCK_SIZE Port Width This parameter is relevant only if the Variable block size type is selected It sets the width of the BLOCK_SIZE input bus The smallest possible value should be used to keep the core as small as possible Block Size Type Constant The block size never changes The block can be pruned block size lt row col The block size must be chosen so that the last symbol is on the last row An un pruned interleaver will use a smaller quantity of FPGA resources than a pruned one so pruning should be used only if necessary Rows Columns If the number of rows and columns is constant selecting this option has the same effect as setting the block size type to constant and entering a value of rows columns for the block size Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 195 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 If the number of rows or columns is not constant selecting this option means the core will calculate the blo
208. com 175 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 How to Migrate from FIR Compiler 5 0 to FIR Compiler 6 3 Design description This example shows how to migrate from the non AXI4 FIR Compiler block to AXI4 FIR Compiler block using the same or similar block parameters Some of the parameters between non AXI4 and AXI4 versions might not be identical exactly due to some changes in certain features and block interfaces The following model is used to illustrate the design migration between these block For more detail refer to the datasheet of this IP core Both FIR Compiler blocks are configured as a reloadable coefficient FIR filter The first set of the coefficients was specified and loaded by the core and the second set was loaded from an external source Example showing how to migrate to AXI4 FIR Compiler IP block r 129 1 zeros 1 30 78987 105 130 11111 Generator e d HH mm e Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 176 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 The figure below shows output simulation from the non AXI reloadable FIR Compiler block 6H SSS BR Fak coef_din coef_ld coef_we 1 0 5 3 0 1 1 mm L L L 1 1 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Time offset 0 Data Path and Control Signals As shown in the figure below the sequence of events to reload new filter coefficients are quite different between th
209. com 81 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 e Pass_A_TLAST Pass the value of the a_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port e Pass B_TLAST Pass the value of the b_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port e Pass CTRL_TLAST Pass the value of the ctrl_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port e OR_all_TLASTS Pass the logical OR of all the present TLAST input ports e AND_all_TLASTS Pass the logical AND of all the present TLAST input ports Core Latency e Latency Configuration e Automatic Block latency is automatically determined by System Generator by pipelining the underlying LogiCORE for maximum performance e Manual You can adjust the block latency specifying the minimum block latency e Minimum Latency Entry field for manually specifying the minimum block latency Control Signals e ACLKEN Enables the clock enable aclken pin on the core All registers in the core are enabled by this control signal ARESETn Active low synchronous clear input that always takes priority over ACLKEN A minimum ARESETn active pulse of two cycles is required since the signal is internally registered for performance A pulse of one cycle resets the core but the response to the pulse is not in the cycle immediately following Advanced tab Block Icon Display e Display shortened port names On by default When unchecked dout_tvalid for example becomes m_axis_dout_tvalid How t
210. config_tdata_fwd_inv config_tdata_nfft config_tdata_cp_ len A sub field port that represents the Scaling Schedule field in the Configuration Channel vector Refer to theFast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specification starting on page 51 for an explanation of the bits in this field A sub field port that represents the Forward Inverse field in the Configuration Channel vector Refer to the Fast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specificationstarting on page 50 for an explanation of the bits in this field A sub field port that represents the Transform Size NFFT field in the Configuration Channel vector Refer to the Fast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specificationstarting on page 50 for an explanation of the bits in this field A sub field port that represents the Cyclic Prefix Length CP_LEN field in the Configuration Channel vector Refer to the Fast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specificationstarting on page 50 for an explanation of the bits in this field This Sysgen Generator block exposes the AXI DATA channel as separate ports based on the real and imaginary sub field names The sub field ports are described as follows DATA Channel Input Signals data_tdata_xn_im data_tdata_xn_re Represents the imaginary component of the Data Channel The signal driving xn_im can be a signed data type of width S with binary point at S 1 where S is a value between 8 and 34 inclusive eg Fix_8_7 Fix_34_33 Note Both xn_re and xn_im s
211. cts Non Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Optimization When NonBlocking mode is selected the following optimization options are activated e Resources core is configured for minimum resources e Performance core is configured for maximum performance Implementation tab Block Icon Display Display shortened port names this option is ON by default When unselected the full AXI name of each port is displayed on the block icon LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP CORDIC v5 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 103 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Counter Counter This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Math and Index The Xilinx Counter block implements a free running or count limited type of an up down or up down counter The counter output can be specified as a signed or unsigned fixed point number Counter Free running counters are the least expensive in FPGA hardware The free running up down or up down counter can also be configured to load the output of the counter with a value on the input din port by selecting the Pr
212. cy DATA counts Adds data_count port to the block This port indicates the number of words written into the FIFO The count is guaranteed to never underreport the number of words in the FIFO to ensure the user never overflows the FIFO The exception to this behavior is when a write operation occurs at the rising edge of write clock that write operation will only be reflected on WR_DATA_COUNT at the next rising clock edge D log2 FIFO depth 1 Implementation tab FIFO Options FIFO implementation type specifies how the FIFO is implemented in the FPGA possible choices are Common Clock Block RAM and Common Clock Distributed RAM Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 57 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX AXI FIFO LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP FIFO Generator 9 2 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 58 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX BitBasher BitBasher This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types and Index The Xilinx BitBasher block performs slicing concatenation and augmentation of b inputs attached to the block Bitbasher The operation to be performed is described using Verilog syntax which is detailed in this document The block can have up to fou
213. d Dest_CE Src_CE is the clock enable signal corresponding to the input data stream rate Dest_CE is the faster clock enable corresponding to the output data stream rate Notice that the circuit uses a single flip flop in addition to the mux The flip flop is used to adjust the timing of Src_CE so that the mux switches to the data input sample at the start of the input sample period and switches to the constant zero after the first input sample It is important to notice that the circuit has a combinational path from Din to Dout As a result an Up Sample block configured to zero pad should be followed by a register whenever possible Dout 0 D1 0 D2 0 D3 0 D4 0 pn o X o X oa o SRC_CE DEST_CE CLK Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 306 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Up Sample Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Sampling rate number of output samples per input sample must be an integer with a value of 2 or greater This is the ratio of the output sample period to the input and is essentially a sample rate multiplier For example a ratio of 2 indicates a doubling of the input sample rate If a non integer ratio is desired the Up Sample block can be used in combination with the Down Sample block e Copy samples otherwise zeros are inserted
214. dadas 401 XlInstallPlUSiN siii as es 404 SV INEAN RN 404 Descriptio Ms msm 250 ica tea karsana iien Goatees a data Boda a aed oe fea hw Win Bas nad A A RA Ae ede evdvavey gud Mote aaa 404 EXAMPIES mana on AS a ad aaa 404 SOC AlO cy 5 tian A AA AOE ada e 406 xISetNonMemMap iiss sice 565 6 iia ia is Ske Bhs ead eae A 407 SVNTAK E be OY OM AY bee hold E apt ede E WA Be OE We Roe aed etre 407 Desire 407 Examples Vivir ira ea a A A AN atada 407 SSS A O AS 407 xISCtUSEHDL viii a a AA Ree Hine we oe eae Se ESS 408 SVATI ad opt ytd wala aici a Res ay Age Re Adena ta 408 Descriptions ssassn A ch sein cal aries 408 Examples dt aii doc tic ae nad sd a aah aches ba ed a aa a tds 408 SCG AISO cscaacaieieinc E bain A dis 408 MISWITCHLID Many s 0 4 5 cnet h deinen hata ak od cae Se Sd elas ein ee eee 409 A AR 409 Descritor anti a a da A RO atada e 409 EXAMPIOS dic A A A A A arad tani 409 XITBUTIS 0500000030000 da a e RA a Aa 410 O A OA AN 410 AA A A GA a aad gen BEN OY OR Wb aed aae a 410 BampleS ON EE 412 REMAMKS ui dd a ai aa ia aA ida ar 413 SEE AlS Onan AA 413 xITimingANalySiS is ic 6c ssa ee ce stts ir U nanon Rae eee ASEEN EUSES oa EES 414 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 12 XILINX SM arras a Bar Rha ida ata 414 DO SCRIDEI OM rrari A AA A A wh aa seeder reece 414 Example oa tas led ta a iaa 414 xIUpdateModel icici ets esi ate oe eee A a See 415 SYNTAR sete cont ane ke A g
215. de op 10 7 X Z Add Z X Subtract Carry input op 14 12 0 or1 Set carry in to 0 or 1 CIN Select cin as source This adds a CIN port to the Opmode block whose value is inserted into the mnemonic at bit location 11 Round PCIN toward infinity Round PCIN toward zero Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com Opmode 240 XILINX Opmode Instruction Field Name Location Mnemonic Notes Round P toward infinity Round P toward zero Larger add sub acc parallel operation Larger add sub acc sequential operation Round A B DSP48E1 Control Instruction Format DSP48E1 Instruction Operation select Notes C A B PCIN A B P A B A B C A B C A B C Custom Use equation described in the Custom Instruction Field Preadder output Notes Zero A2 Al D A2 D Al A2 Al Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 241 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Opmode Preadder output Notes D A2 D Al B register x i Notes configuration B1 B2 DSP48E1 Custom Instruction rd Location Mnemonic Notes Instruction X Z X NOT Z NOT X Z Z X X XOR Z
216. de signal Assert The Xilinx Assert block is used to assert a rate and or a type on a signal This block has no cost in hardware and can be used to resolve rates and or types in situations where designer intervention is required AXI FIFO The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface BitBasher The Xilinx BitBasher block performs slicing concatenation and augmentation of inputs attached to the block Black Box The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate hardware description language HDL models into System Generator CIC Compiler 3 0 The Xilinx CIC Compiler provides the ability to design and implement AXI4 Stream compliant Cascaded Integrator Comb CIC filters for a variety of Xilinx FPGA devices Clock Enable Probe The Xilinx Clock Enable CE Probe provides a mechanism for extracting derived clock enable signals from Xilinx signals in System Generator models Clock Probe The Xilinx Clock Probe generates a double precision representation of a clock signal with a period equal to the Simulink system period CMult The Xilinx CMult block implements a gain operator with output equal to the product of its input by a constant value This value can be a MATLAB expression that evaluates to a constant Complex Multiplier 5 0 The Complex Multiplier 5 0 block implements AXI4 Stream compliant high performance optimized
217. device families are currently not supported To customize the ISE and XPS projects for a different board do the following 1 Open the generated ISE project in Project Navigator 2 Double click the XPS sub module to open the XPS GUI 3 From the XPS GUI customize the MIG and clock generator based on the DDR settings for the target board 4 Close the XPS GUI and go back to Project Navigator 5 Edit the generated top level HDL if the DCM MMCM settings do not match the target board 6 Edit the generated top level UCF if the constraints for the system clock do not match the target board Usage x1lVDMACreateProject NetlistDirectory TopLevelName Options You should create the ISE and XPS projects for the System Generator design in the NetlistDirectory directory If a TopLevelName is specified the top level module uses the given TopLevelName as entity name Otherwise the default entity name vdma_top is used Optional options can be specified through the OPTIONS argument which is a MATLAB struct The following options are supported Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 418 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xIVDMACreateProject Debug If this value is true ChipScope AXI monitors are inserted to various AXI interfaces in the design M_AXI_MM2S and M_AXI_S2MM interfaces between the VDMA and AXI interconnect IP and the S_AXI interface between the AXI interconnect and MIG IP Vivado Designing w
218. dex The Xilinx Slice block allows you to slice off a sequence of bits from your input data NN and create a new data value This value is presented as the output from the block The Slice output data type is unsigned with its binary point at zero The block provides several mechanisms by which the sequence of bits can be specified If the input type is known at the time of parameterization the various mechanisms do not offer any gain in functionality If however a Slice block is used in a design where the input data width or binary point position are subject to change the variety of mechanisms becomes useful The block can be configured for example always to extract only the top bit of the input or only the integral bits or only the first three fractional bits The following diagram illustrates how to extract all but the top 16 and bottom 8 bits of the input Top bit of slice MAR 31 Offset by 16 Relative to MSB 15 4 a Sliced Bits 8 Bottom bit of slice 4 Offset by 8 Relative to LSB LSB 0 Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the block are as follows e Width of slice Number of bits specifies the number of bits to extract e Boolean output Tells whether single bit slices should be type Boolean e Specify range as Two bit locations Upper bit location width Lower bit location width Allows you to specify e
219. dout2 output the encoded data The port dout1 corresponds to the first code in the array dout2 to the second and so on To add additional output ports open the subsystem and follow the directions in the model The output port vout indicates the validity of output values Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Constraint Length Equals n 1 where n is the length of the constraint register in the encoder e Convolutional code array octal Array of octal convolution codes Output rate is derived from the array length Between 2 and 7 inclusive codes can be entered Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 334 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC ATAN CORDIC ATAN The Xilinx CORDIC ATAN reference block implements a rectangular to polar magp Coordinate conversion using a fully parallel CORDIC COordinate Rotation Digital Computer algorithm in Circular Vectoring mode That is given a complex input lt x y gt it computes a new vector lt m a gt where coRDICATAN magnitude m K x sqrt x2 y2 and the angle a arctan y x As is common the magnitude scale factor K 1 646760 is not compensated in the processor for example the magnitude output should be scaled by this factor The CORDIC processor is implemented using building blocks from the Xilinx b
220. e The valid range for this parameter is 4 to fixed rate ir e Maximum Rate The maximum rate change value for programmable rate change The valid range for this parameter is fixed rate ir to 8192 Hardware Oversampling Specification Select format Choose Maximum_Possible Sample_Period or Hardware_Oversampling_Rate Selects which method is used to specify the hardware oversampling rate This value directly affects the level of parallelism of the block implementation and resources used When Maximum Possible is selected the block uses the maximum oversampling given the sample period of the signal connected to the Data field of the s_axis_data_tdata port When you select Hardware Oversampling Rate you can specify the oversampling rate When Sample Period is selected the block clock is connected to the system clock and the value specified for the Sample Period parameter sets the input sample rate the block supports The Sample Period parameter also determines the hardware oversampling rate of the block When Sample Period is selected the block is forced to use the s_axis_data_tvalid control port Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 72 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CIC Compiler 3 0 Sample period Integer number of clock cycles between input samples When the multiple channels have been specified this value should be the integer number of clock cycles between the time division
221. e criar is 86 Block oer 1 0 ca A is tia 86 Configurable Subsystem Manager 0c csc ce ccc c cece cnet eee e eee ee nena eeeeeees 87 Block Parameters 4 1200 ii dhe degen s Oa ae AAA la eee olen es 88 CONS ME da an ida Ps da Mirage in ee se tested aL eos a ee 89 Block Parameters ci ii e Sasa Aad ae WR PANE GAS aaa ace ine edt E E nce add 89 Appendix DSP48 Control Instruction ForMat ococococconon eee ene een ene ene 91 CONVE Ec A see eee eds oi AA 93 Block Parameters ss ca8 a aiiccediaare bite 93 LogiCORE Documentation 0 ccc eee ee eee nee e teen teen a e nee enees 95 Convolution Encoder 8 0 0 cece cece cette ee eee eee eee eee eee e ee eneees 96 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 0 cc ee en een ee nn ee aaaea 96 LogI CORE DOCUMENTALIONs dui A a Meu ae 97 CORDIC 5 0 wick cde ene a A a a aaa a eee EE eee a 98 Changes from CORDIC 4 0 to CORDIC 5 0 0 ee een en ene n eee nen ee neas 99 Block Parameters Dialog BOX 0 0 0 ccc ee nee een teen ee nen ene n ene n ens 100 LogiCORE Documentation sce 0 056 cee de SEE eee eae 103 COUNT GT isis i ata eee Sh a cs ah cate ct tea ei Aad canned eins Soda a Ate De vad RA cog ee eee 104 Block Parameters circo an deis 105 LogiICORE DOCUMENTATION lt 05 5 ccd sce ci geod ye a eee RS E a ee BA a aa aia ayaa ane 106 DDS Compiler 5 0 ois occ A Cae ee ieee eee eu we 107 Architecture OVEMVIEW 4 6 4 5 ec ii A Won ew AAA Wa Ae AC ese au aia iaa Midd aoe ae 10
222. e this block is implemented as a constant Scale The Xilinx Scale block scales its input by a power of two The power can be either positive or negative The block has one input and one output The scale operation has the effect of moving the binary point without changing the bits in the container Serial to Parallel The Serial to Parallel block takes a series of inputs of any size and creates a single output of a specified multiple of that size The input series can be ordered either with the most significant word first or the least significant word first Shift The Xilinx Shift block performs a left or right shift on the input signal The result will have the same fixed point container as that of the input Simulation The Simulation Multiplexer has been deprecated in System Multiplexer Generator Single Port RAM The Xilinx Single Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM with one data input and one data output port Single Step The Xilinx Single Step Simulation block pauses the simulation Simulation each clock cycle when in single step mode Slice The Xilinx Slice block allows you to slice off a sequence of bits from your input data and create a new data value This value is presented as the output from the block The output data type is unsigned with its binary point at zero SquareRoot The Xilinx SquareRoot block performs the square root on the input Currently only the floating point
223. e 32 8 bit general purpose registers divided in 2 banks which are independent of each other e Up to 256 byte internal RAM configurable for 64 128 and 256 byte sizes e Internal 30 location CALL RETURN stack also detects for system underflow and overflow conditions e 256 input and output ports supported The Picoblaze 6 embedded controller and its instruction set are described in detail in the KCPSM6 user guide which can be found at http www xilinx com products intellectual property picoblaze htm Ordinarily a single block ROM containing 4096 or fewer 18 bit words serves as the program store The microcontroller and ROM are connected as shown in the image Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 248 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller Block Interface Signal Direction Description in_port 7 0 Input During an INPUT operation data is transferred from the port to a register Interrupt Input Interrupt Must be at least two clock cycles in duration instr 17 0 Input Instruction Input rst Input Reset input This is an optional port for sysgen simulation but a required port in HDL By default this is hidden and would be tied to ground in HDL generation If user wishes to control this port it can be enabled through block configuration sleep Input Sleep pin when driven high would put picoblaze6 in sleep mode bram_enable signal would be low for the
224. e 8 bit value which would be stored in the kcpsm6 and is configurable one time only User may get the value in a register by using instruction HWBUILD This is passed as generic to generated HDL e Interrupt Vector Location Interrupt vector location where JUMP vector for interrupts is written This is configurable to any location up to the program size however preferred value is nearly the end of program size to avoid any conflicts e Provide reset Port This will expose reset port of the user please note when reset port is exposed sysgen will shift to HDL simulation for the block thus may give some performance degradation in simulation Please use reset port only when required in design e Provide sleep port This will expose sleep pin of picoblaze6 block This is a power saving feature of picoblaze6 Display Internal State When checked the registers and control flags are made available in the MATLAB workspace The information is present as a structure with the following naming convention lt design name gt _ lt subsystem name gt _ lt PicoBlaze6 block name gt _reg The structure contains a field for each register for example BANKA_ s00 BANKA_s01 etc and the control flags CARRY and ZERO lt design name gt _ lt subsystem name gt _ lt PicoBlaze6 block name gt _mem The structure contains value of all scratch pad locations up to configured memory location e Display Values As Specifies the radix to use for displayi
225. e Port RAM The Xilinx Single Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM with one data input and one data output port Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 22 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 4 Control Logic Blocks Control Logic Block Description Slice The Xilinx Slice block allows you to slice off a sequence of bits from your input data and create a new data value This value is presented as the output from the block The output data type is unsigned with its binary point at zero Vivado HLS The Xilinx Vivado HLS block allows the functionality of a Vivado HLS design to be included in a System Generator design The Vivado HLS design can include C C and System C design sources Data Type Blocks Table 1 5 Data Type Blocks Data Type Block Description BitBasher The Xilinx BitBasher block performs slicing concatenation and augmentation of inputs attached to the block Concat The Xilinx Concat block performs a concatenation of n bit vectors represented by unsigned integer numbers for example n unsigned numbers with binary points at position zero Convert The Xilinx Convert block converts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value Gateway In The Xilinx Gateway In blocks are the inputs i
226. e block icon If the constant data type is specified as fixed point and cannot be expressed exactly in the specified fixed point type its value is rounded and saturated as needed A positive value is implemented as an unsigned number a negative value as signed Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 89 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Constant Output Precision e Specifies the data type of the output Can be Boolean Fixed point or Floating point Arithmetic Type If the Output Type is specified as Fixed point you can select Signed 2 s comp Unsigned or DSP48 instruction as the Arithmetic Type Fixed point Precision o Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit gt Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Fraction width Specify the fraction width Sample Period e Sampled Constant allows a sample period to be associated with the constant output and inherited by blocks that the constant block drives This is useful mainly because the blocks eventually target hardware and the Simulink sample periods are used to establish hardw
227. e channel implementation the number of values to be sampled from a data frame should evenly divide the size of the input frame Every input data frame value can also be qualified by using the optional valid port Multiple Channel Implementation For multiple channel implementation the time division demultiplexer block has one data input port and multiple output ports equal to the number of 1 s in the frame sampling pattern Optional data valid input and output ports are also allowed The length of the Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 300 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Time Division Demultiplexer frame sampling pattern establishes the length of the input data frame The position of 1 indicates the input value to be downsampled and presented to the corresponding output data channel The behavior of the demultiplexer block in multiple channel mode can best be illustrated with the help of the figure below Based on the frame sampling pattern entered the first and second input values of every input data frame are sampled and presented to the corresponding output channel at the rate of 4 For multiple channel implementation the down sampling factor is always equal to the size of the input frame Every input data frame value can also be qualified by using the optional valid port Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Paramet
228. e either the first or last value of a frame This parameter will determine which of these two values is sampled Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCORE The Down Sample block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 130 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 DSP48 Macro 2 1 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Index DSP The System Generator DSP48 macro 2 1 block provides a device independent abstraction of the blocks DSP48 DSP48A and DSP48E Using this block instead of using a technology specific DSP slice helps makes the design more portable b between Xilinx technologies The DSP48 Macro provides a simplified interface to the XtremeDSP slice by the abstraction of all opmode subtract alumode and inmode controls to a DSP48 Maco 2 1 single SEL port Further all CE and RST controls are grouped to a single CE and SCLR port respectively This abstraction enhances portability of HDL between device families You can specify 1 to 64 instructions which are translated into the various control signals for the XtremeDSP slice of the target device The instructions are stored in a ROM from which the appropriate instruction is selected using the SEL port Block Parameters Instructions tab The Instruction tab is used to define the operations that
229. e following Xilinx Blockset libraries DSP Tools and Index zost The Xilinx FDATool block provides an interface to the FDATool software available as part bad of the MATLAB Signal Processing Toolbox maroo The block does not function properly and should not be used if the Signal Processing Toolbox is not installed This block provides a means of defining an FDATool object and storing it as part of a System Generator model FDATool provides a powerful means for defining digital filters with a graphical user interface Example of Use Copy an FDATool block into a subsystem where you would like to define a filter Double clicking the block icon opens up an FDATool session and graphical user interface The filter is stored in an data structure internal to the FDATool interface block and the coefficients can be extracted using MATLAB helper functions provided as part of System Generator The function call x1fda_numerator FDAToo1 returns the numerator of the transfer function e g the impulse response of a finite impulse response filter of the FDATool block named FDAToo1 Similarly the helper function xlfda_denominator FDATool1 retrieves the denominator for a non FIR filter A typical use of the FDATool block is as a companion to an FIR filter block where the Coefficients field of the filter block is set to x1f da_numerator FDAToo1 An example is shown in the following diagram in Function Block Parameters n ta n tap MAC FIR
230. e non AXI and AXI4 versions as are briefly described next Care must be taken to ensure that the following loading sequences are taken place 1 data_tdata AXI FIR output data based on the initial set of coefficients specified by the core 1 2 3 2 1 2 reload_tdata and reload_tvalid Next is to load a new set of coefficients 7 8 9 8 7 into the reload_tdata input port The reload_tvalid control signal must be high during this reload period In this case it must be high for 5 clock cycles 3 reload_tlast this signal must be high on the last coefficient data to indicate that the last data has been loaded 4 config_tvalid finally the reload data is now available for transfer This control signal does not have to strobe high immediately after the reload_tlast assertion Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 177 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 The figure below shows output simulation from the AXI4 reloadable FIR Compiler block 3 P22 ABE 042 a LogiCORE Documentation Vivado Designing with System Generator 178 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Gateway In Gateway In This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Gateway In blocks are the inputs into the Xilinx portion of your Simulink mo design These blocks convert Simulink integer double and fixed point data type
231. e output port If the configuration selected requires 0 inputs the LFSR is set up to start at a specified initial seed value and will step through a repeatable sequence of states determined by the LFSR structure type gate type and initial seed The optional din and load ports provide the ability to change the current value of the LFSR at runtime After the load completes the LFSR behaves as with the 0 input case and start up a new sequence based upon the newly loaded seed and the statically configured LFSR options for structure and gate type The optional rst port will reload the statically specified initial seed of the LFSR and continue on as before after the rst signal goes low And when the optional en port goes low the LFSR will remain at its current value with no change until the en port goes high again Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 199 XILINX LFSR Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Type Fibonacci or Galois This field specifies the structure of the feedback Fibonacci has one XOR or XNOR gate at the beginning of the register chain that XORs or XNORs the taps together with the result going into the first register Galois has one XOR or XNOR gate for each tap and gates the last register in the chains output
232. e parts are available individually or combined phase_tvat f gt Using this core phase_tready Refer to the topic AXI Interfacefor more detailed information on the AXI phase_tdata Interface DDS Compiler 5 0 Architecture Overview To understand the DDS Compiler it is necessary to know how the block is implemented in FPGA hardware The following is a block diagram of the DDS Compiler core The core consist of two main parts a Phase Generator part and a SIN COS LUT part These parts can be used independently or together with an optional dither generator to create a DDS capability A time division multi channel capability is supported with independently configurable phase increment and offset parameters s_axis_config_tvalid slave s_axis_config_tready iif s_axis_config_tdata s_axis_config_tlast master M_axis_data_tvalid iif m_axis_data_tready m_axis_data_tdata m_axis_data_tuser m_axis_data_tlast m_axis_phase_tvalid m_axis_phase_tready s axis phase_tuser phase_in m_axis_phase_tdata A m m_axis_phase_tuser s_axis_phase_tlast m asia Channel event_s_phase_chanid_incorrect slave S axis_phase tready if master iff Counter Bie aclk event_s_phase_tlast_missing clken event_s_phase_tlast_unexpected event_s_config_tlast_missing aresetn event_s_config_tlast_unexpected Phase Generator The Phase Generator consists of an accumulator followed by an o
233. e time dout presents the last symbol of the block The value is the number of erasures that were corrected This signal must be of type UFIX_b_0 where b is the number of bits needed to represent n Added to the channel when you select Erase from the Optional Pins tab e stat_tdata_bit_err_1_to_0 number of bits received as 1 but corrected to 0 Added to the channel when you select Error Statistics from the Optional Pins tab The element width is the number of binary bits required to represent n k Symbol_Width e stat_tdata_bit_err_0_to_1 number of bits received as O but corrected to 1 Added to the channel when you select Error Statistics from the Optional Pins tab The element width is the number of binary bits required to represent n k Symbol_Width e stat_tlast added when Number of Channels parameter is greater than 1 Indicates that status information for the last channel is present on output_tdata event Channel e event_s_input_tlast_missing this output flag indicates that the input_tlast was not asserted when expected You should leave this pin unconnected if it is not required e event_s_input_tlast_unexpected this output flag indicates that the input_tlast was asserted when not expected You should leave this pin unconnected if it is not required e event_s_ctrl_tdata_invalid this output flag indicates that values provided on ctrl_tdata were illegal The block must be reset if this is asserted You should leave this pin
234. e to launch the GUI on previously generated timing data without performing the additional operations of the compilation target Syntax xlTimingAnalysis target_directory Description Calling xlTimingAnalysis with the name of a directory that contains timing data will launch the System Generate Timing Analyzer GUI The timing analyzer GUI will display the data that is contained in the timing twx and name_translations data files in the specified target directory The target directory name can be either a relative or an absolute path name Example gt gt xlTimingAnalysis timing Where timing is the name of the target directory in which a prior timing analysis was carried out Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 414 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlUpdateModel xlUpdateModel If you have a model that was created in System Generator v7 1 or earlier you must update the model to be compatible with v9 1 01 and beyond To update a model you run the MATLAB command x1UpdateModel that invokes a conversion script Please be advised that the conversion script does not automatically save an old version of your model as it updates the design nor save a new version of your model after conversion You can either make a back up copy of your model before running the conversion script or you can save the updated model with a new name Some models can require some manual modification after running x
235. e until the signal is asserted again or the aresetn signal is asserted The aresetn signal has precedence over this clock enable signal This signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving this port must be Boolean e aresetn When this signal is asserted the block goes back to its initial state This reset signal has precedence over the optional aclken signal available on the block The reset signal has to run at a multiple of the block s sample rate The signal driving this port must be Boolean e tready Adds dout_tready port if Blocking mode is activated Cartesian e tlast Adds a tlast input port to the Cartesian input channel e tuser Adds a tuser input port to the Cartesian input channel tuser width Specifies the bit width of the Cartesian tuser input port Phase e tlast Adds a tlast input port to the Phase input channel e tuser Adds a tuser input port to the Phase input channel Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 102 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC 5 0 tuser width Specifies the bit width of the Phase tuser input port Tlast behavior e Null Data output port e Pass_Cartesian_TLAST Data output port e Pass_Phase_TLAST Data output port e OR_all_TLASTS Pass the logical OR of all the present TLAST input ports e AND_all_TLASTS Pass the logical AND of all the present TLAST input ports Flow control AXI behavior e NonBlocking Sele
236. each cycle and returns a sequence of results one for each output port on each cycle By default all input and output ports are involved and data values are mapped to ports in the ascending order of port indices xlHwcosimSimulate is good for simplicity and fits for common simulation purposes but is limited in several aspects No user defined simulation semantics e All simulation cycles are executed as a whole for example cannot set a breakpoint in a simulation cycle e No shared memory access Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 467 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
237. each port on each block in the model e Input data types Displays the data type of each input port on each block in the model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 297 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator e Output data types Displays the data type of each output port on each block in the model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 298 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Threshold Threshold This block ts listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types Math and Index The Xilinx Threshold block tests the sign of the input number If the input number is negative the output of the block is 1 otherwise the output is 1 The output is a signed fixed point integer that is 2 bits long The block has one input and one output Threshold Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes The block parameters do not control the output data type because the output is always a signed fixed point integer that is 2 bits long Xilinx LogiCORE The Threshold block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 299 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Time Division Demultiplexer Time Divi
238. eam blocks that will inherit the rate and build the proper CE circuitry to automatically enable those downstream blocks at the new rate Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 71 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CIC Compiler 3 0 Block Parameters Dialog Box Filter Specification tab Parameters specific to the Filter Specification tab are Filter Specification Filter Type The CIC core supports both interpolation and decimation architectures When the filter type is selected as decimator the input sample stream is down sampled by the factor R When an interpolator is selected the input sample is up sampled by R e Number of Stages Number of integrator and comb stages If N stages are specified there are N integrators and N comb stages in the filter The valid range for this parameter is 3 to 6 e Differential Delay Number of unit delays employed in each comb filter in the comb section of either a decimator or interpolator The valid range of this parameter is 1 or 2 e Number of Channels Number of channels to support in implementation The valid range of this parameter is 1 to 16 Sample Rate Change Specification e Sample Rate Changes Option to select between Fixed or Programmable Fixed or Initial Rate ir Specifies initial or fixed sample rate change value for the CIC The valid range for this parameter is 4 to 8192 e Minimum Rate The minimum rate change value for programmable rate chang
239. eck box to Optimize Block RAM Count Using Hybrid Memories Optimize Options e Complex Multipliers choose one of the following Use CLB logic e Use 3 multiplier structure resource optimization o Use 4 multiplier structure performance optimization Butterfly Arithmetic choose one of the following o Use CLB logic o Use XTremeDSP Slices Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Block Timing To better understand the FFT blocks control behavior and timing please consult the core data sheet How to Migrate from Fast Fourier Transform 7 1 to Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 Design description This example shows how to migrate from the non Al4 FFT block to an AXI4 FFT block using the same or similar block parameters Some of the parameters between non AXI4 and AXI4 versions might not be identical exactly due to some changes in certain features and block interfaces The following model is used to illustrate the design migration between these blocks For more detail refer to the datasheet of this IP core Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 160 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 The Input Source subsystem generates tdata_imag tdata_real and dout_valid signals for the Inverse FFT block The outputs of these signals are then been reconstructed to the original shapes by the Forward FFT Example showing how
240. ed e event_s_ctrl_tdata_invalid this output flag indicates that values provided on ctrl_tdata were illegal This pin is available when Variable Block Length or Variable Number of Check Symbols are selected on the GUI ctrl Channel Note This channel is only present when variable block length or number of check symbols is selected as a block parameter e ctri_tvalid TVALID for the ctrl channel e ctrl_tdata_n_in This signal is only present if Variable Block Length is selected in the GUI This allows the block length to be changed every block The ctrl_tdata_n_in signal must have type UFIX_s_0 where s is the width in bits of each symbol Unless there is an R_IN field the number of check symbols is fixed so varying n automatically varies k e ctrl_tdata_n_r This field is only present if Variable Number of Check Symbols is selected in the GUI It allows the number of check symbols to be changed every block The new block s length r_block is set to ctrl_tdata_r_in sampled The ctrl_tdata_r_in signal must have type UFIX_p_0 where p is the number of bits required to represent the parity bits n k in the default code word n being the Symbols Per Block and k being Data Symbols Selecting this input significantly increases the size of the core Other Optional Pins e aresetn resets the encoder This pin is added to the block when you specify ARESETn on the Detailed Implementation tab The signal driving ARESETn must
241. ed by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the block are as follows e Output Data Type selects the output data type of the RAM You can choose between unsigned and signed two s complement data types e Data Width specifies the width of the input data e Data Binary Point selects the binary point position of the data values stored as the memory contents The binary point position must be between 0 and 16 the data width Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 383 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX XtremeDSP LED Flasher XtremeDSP LED Flasher The Xilinx XtremeDSP LED Flasher block allows System Generator models to use the tri color LEDs on the BenADDA board when a model is prepared for co simulation When the model is co simulated the LEDs will cycle through red green and yellow colors The LEDs are driven by the two most significant LED Flasher bits of a 27 bit free running counter To see the LEDs cycle through the three colors you should select a free running clock during model simulation Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 384 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlAddTerms xlCache xlConfigureSolver xlfda_denominator xlfda_numerator xlGenerateButton xlgetparam and xlsetparam xlgetparams
242. ed to maximize the range of input of ctrl_tdata_n_in Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 268 E XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 e Memory Style Select between Distributed Block and Automatic memory choices This option is available only for CCSDS codes e Number Of Channels specifies the number of separate time division multiplexed channels to be processed by the encoder The encoder supports up to 128 channels Optional Pins e ACLKEN Adds a aclken pin to the block This signal carries the clock enable and must be of type Bool Output TREADY When selected the output channels will have a TREADY and hence support the full AXI handshake protocol with inherent back pressure ARESETn Adds a aresetn pin to the block This signal resets the block and must be of type Bool aresetn must be asserted low for at least 2 clock periods and at least 1 sample period before the decoder can start decoding code symbols e Info bit Adds the output_tdata_info pin Marks the last information symbol of a block on tdata_data_out e Marker Bits Adds the following pins to the block o input_tuser_user carries marker bits for tagging data on input_tdata_ data_in o Output_tuser_user mark_in tagging bits delayed by the latency of the LogiCORE e Number of Marker Bits specifies the number of marker bits Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Optio
243. ee Re daha ka 21 Data lype Blocks aca rd bas dci 23 DSP Blocks sico dalla as adicta lito 24 FloatinesPolntiBlOckKS aia A ga Be aE E E a A A A 25 Index Blocks iii e es 28 MathiBlockKS tics coros acantilado 34 Memory BlOCKS 255s scscesicz esa naam scar whe wrod evince onecee ger ese agG ack Dh cade tala ae we Elias 36 TOOUBIOCKS 2 deta na a acres edged a A aa Bee eee dais ates 37 Simulink Blocks Supported by System Generator 0 ccc eect een n teen en ennes 38 Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes 000 cece cece cence eee eeneeas 39 PEO CISIOM si rra ada 39 Arithmetic TYPE sterrate kaia cdllen A da ate 39 Number of Bits iii a ia 39 Binary POM ss co cen iiaei aaaea dal iaa e diri lie 39 Overflow and Quantization 0 0 0 0 cc en en ene n en en een n eben eet nens 40 LATO CY AAA e We eased ale th daeaate aue ufo lac a Gaia isa eid oa AM oR RA GAA EESAN ROO a aye 40 Provide Synchronous Reset Port 0 ccc eee een ee een ene n tenn een eens 41 Provide Enable POrt sataa s carre cae gts a a tii vane it ea 41 Sample Priod ici A a A A ed 41 Use Behavioral HDL otherwise Use core 1 cn een cence teen tne enn enes 41 Use XtremeDSP Slic een een en nn en eee ene ai aa aa a n eens 42 FPGA Area Slices FFs LUTs OBs Embedded Mults TBUFs Use Area Above For Estimation 42 Display shortened port names 43 Block Reference Pages i isis csc ok bees e EE SE Ce eRe Eee ee eae OOS a SEO 44 Absol te io o
244. efore setting any other parameters When xlsetparam is used to set the compilation parameter it must be the only parameter that is being set on that command For example the form below is not permitted xlsetparam sysgenblock compilation HDL Netlist synthesis_tool Vivado synthesis Examples Example 1 Changing the synthesis tool used for HDL netlist xlsetparam sysgenblock compilation HDL Netlist xlsetparam sysgenblock synthesis_tool Vivado synthesis The first x1setparam is used to set the compilation target to HDL Netlist The second xlsetparam is used to change the synthesis tool used to Vivado synthesis Example 2 Getting family and part information fam part xlgetparam sysgenblock xilinxfamily part fam Virtex2 part xc2v1000 See Also xlGenerateButton xlgetparams Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 398 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlgetparams xlgetparams The xlgetparams command is used to get all parameter values in a System Generator token associated with the current compilation type The xlgetparams command can be used in conjunction with the xlgetparam and xlsetparam commands to change or retrieve a System Generator token s parameters Syntax paramstruct xlgetparams sysgenblock_handle To get the sysgenblock_handle enter gbc or gcbh at the MATLAB command line paramstruct xlgetparams chip System Genera
245. ements and Index The Xilinx Clock Enable CE Probe provides a mechanism for extracting derived ces b clock enable signals from Xilinx signals in System Generator models Clock Enable Probe The probe accepts any Xilinx signal type as input and produces a Bool output signal The Bool output can be used at any point in the design where Bools are acceptable The probe output is a cyclical pulse that mimics the behavior of an ideal clock enable signal used in the hardware implementation of a multirate circuit The frequency of the pulse is derived from the input signal s sample period The enable pulse is asserted at the end of the input signal s sample period for the duration of one Simulink system period For signals with a sample period equal to the Simulink system period the block s output is always one Shown below is an example model with an attached analysis scope that demonstrates the usage and behavior of the Clock Enable Probe The Simulink system sample period for the model is specified in the System Generator token as 1 0 seconds In addition to the Simulink system period the model has three other sample periods defined by the Down Sample blocks Clock Enable Probes are placed after each Down Sample block and extract the derived clock enable signal The probe outputs are run to output gateways and then to the scope for analysis Also included in the model is CLK probe that produces a Double representation of the hardware system clock The
246. emet interface Linksys Instant Gigabit Network Adanter 00 12 14 7 54 41 28 FPGA MAC address 00 04 55 11 22 30 ML402 specific F Has Video I O Daupiher Card VIODC attached to the ML402 hoard ox Cancel Project c benchaniprojectimhweosimdemoicom amp 4 videoiml402_ppethicorx5 video _ml402_ppeth hwe xlHwcosimGetDesignInfo Syntax xlHwcosimGetDesigninfo xlHwcosimGetDesigninfo netlist xlHwcosimGetDesigninfo c design macfir_cw hwc Description xlHwcosimGetDesigninfo is used to retrieve the information of a design in a hwc file By default it takes a hwc file as input and returns the design information in a MATLAB struct array If no hwc file is specified it searches for the project file in the current directory If a directory is provided it searches for a hwc file in the given directory Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 466 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation xlHwcosimSimulate Syntax outData xlHwcosimSimulate project nCycles inData ol 02 xlHwcosimSimulate project nCycles il 12 outData xlHwcosimSimulate project nCycles struct Inport inPorts Outport outPorts inData Description xlHwcosimSimulate provides a one liner function call to simulate a design with predefined input values The simulation is done on a cycle basis The function takes a sequence of data values one for each input port on
247. ented using high speed dedicated block RAM Of the four blocks in the state machine library this is the fastest and most area efficient However the output is registered and thus the input does not affect the output instantaneously The number of bits used to implement a Mealy state machine is given by the equations depth 2K 2i 2k i width k o N depth width k 0 2K i where N total number of block RAM bits s number of states k ceil log2 s i number of input bits o number of output bits The following table gives examples of block RAM sizes necessary for various state machines Numbers ail a e 2 5 10 704 4 1 2 32 8 6 7 5120 16 5 4 4096 32 4 3 4096 52 1 11 2176 100 4 5 24576 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 367 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Moore State Machine Registered Moore State Machine A Moore machine is a finite state machine whose output is only a cunenstarep function of the machine s current state A registered Moore machine is one having registered output and can be described with the following block diagram Registered Moore State Machine Inputs Output Ourpute Register ade There are many ways to implement such state machines in System Generator e g using the Mcode block This reference block provides a method for implementing a Moore machine using block and distribu
248. er A constant can only be used to augment expressions already derived from input ports In other words a BitBasher block cannot be used to simply source constant like the Constant block The following examples make use of this construct al 4 b1100 e if e were 110110110 then a1 would be 1100110110110 al 4 hb e if e were 110110110 then a1 would be 1101110110110 al 4 010 e if e were 110110110 then a1 would be 1000110110110 Limitations e Does not support masked parameterization on the bitbasher expressions e An expression cannot contain only constants that is each expression must include at least one input port Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 62 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box Black Box This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Floating Point and Index The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate hardware description language HDL models into System Generator The block is used to specify both the simulation behavior in Simulink and the implementation files to be used during code generation with System Black Box Generator A black box s ports produce and consume the same sorts of signals as other System Generator blocks When a black box is translated into hardware the associated HDL entity is automatically incorporated and wired to other blocks in the resulting design The
249. er Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient e Sample Period Sample period of input Reference e J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 363 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX n tap MAC FIR Filter n tap MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx n tap MAC FIR Filter reference block implements a multiply accumulate based FIR filter The three filter configurations help op illustrate the trade offs between filter throughput and device resource consumption The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible mac Harite Memory architectures Each filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this ref
250. erations specifying multiple ports by names is not encouraged for the sake of performance It is recommended to resolve a sequence of port names into an equivalent index sequence using the get instruction and then use the index sequence for subsequent read and write operations Run Syntax run h run h n Description When the hardware co simulation object is configured to run in single step mode the run command is used to advance the clock run h will advance the clock by one cycle run h n will advance the clock by n cycles When the hardware co simulation object is configured to run in free running mode the run command has no effect on the clock of the hardware co simulation However in JTAG hardware co simulation write commands are buffered for efficiency reasons and the run command can be used to flush the write buffer Note Currently the run command has no effect on Ethernet hardware co simulation in free running mode but this behaviour might change in the future Get properties Syntax get h getrun h prop Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 458 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Description Get returns the properties associated with the Hwcosim object h The properties are returned as a MATLAB struct with the following fields prop Description Id Internal use Inport A struct describing all the input po
251. ered most significant bit down to least significant bit as in std_logic_vector 7 downto 0 and not std_logic_vector 0 to 7 e Clock and clock enable ports must be named according to the conventions described below Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 63 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box e Any port that is a clock or clock enable must be of type std_logic For Verilog black boxes such ports must be non vector inputs e g input clk e Clock and clock enable ports on a black box are not treated like other ports When a black box is translated into hardware System Generator drives the clock and clock enable ports with signals whose rates can be specified according to the block s configuration and the sample rates that drive it in Simulink e Falling edge triggered output data cannot be used To understand how clocks work for black boxes it helps to understand how System Generator handles Timing and Clockingin general To produce multiple rates in hardware System Generator uses a single clock along with multiple clock enables one enable for each rate The enables activate different portions of hardware at the appropriate times Each clock enable rate is related to a corresponding sample period in Simulink Every System Generator block that requires a clock has at least one clock and clock enable port in its HDL counterpart Blocks having multiple rates have additional clock and clock enable p
252. erence block are as follows e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient Number of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample e Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Reference 1 J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 364 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Mealy State Machine Registered Mealy State Machine A Mealy machine is a finite state machine whose output is a function Cunentstatep Of State transition for example a function of the machine s current state and current input A registered Mealy machine is one having registered output and can be described with the following block diagram Outputs Registered Mealy State Machine Inputs Outpul Oui put gt Outputs Lage Ragister P There are many ways to implement such state machines in System Generator e g using the MCode block to implement the transition function and registers to implement state
253. erface Note that the hardware co simulation configuration is persistent and is saved in the hwe file If the co simulation interface is not changed there is no need to re run this step 2 Create a M Hwcosim instance for a particular design 3 Open the M Hwcosim interface 4 Repeatedly run the following sub steps until the simulation ends a Write simulation data to input ports b Read simulation data from output ports c Advance the design clock by one cycle 5 Close the M Hwcosim interface Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 451 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation 6 Release the M Hwcosim instance Automatic Generation of M Hwcosim Testbench M Hwcosim enables the testbench generation for hardware co simulation When the Create testbench option is checked in the System Generator GUI the hardware co simulation compilation flow generates an M code script lt design gt _hwcosim_test m and golden test data files lt design gt _ lt port gt _hwcosim_test dat for each gateway based on the Simulink simulation The M code script uses the M Hwcosim API to implement a testbench that simulates the design in hardware and verifies the results against the golden test data Any simulation mismatch is reported in a result file lt design gt _hwcosim_test results As shown below in Example 4 the testbench code generated is easily readable and can be used as a basis for
254. eriod is set to 4 and the sample period propagated to a block port is 4 then the normalized period that is displayed for the block port is 1 and if the period propagated to the Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 296 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator block port is 8 then the sample period displayed would be 2 for example a larger number indicates a slower rate Ly design_examplefsub1 Ae Edt Yew Simusteon Format Toob Hep 100 nome gt SF esi 8 00543 a gt Register Up Sample Down Bample AddSub System Generator ROET Register oe Sample frequencies Mhz Displays sample frequencies for each block e Pipeline stages Displays the latency information from the input ports of each block The displayed pipeline stage might not be accurate for certain high level blocks such as the FFT RS Encoder Decoder Viterbi Decoder etc In this case the displayed pipeline information can be used to determine whether a block has a combinational path from the input to the output For example the Up Sample block in the figure below shows that it has a combinational path from the input to the output port Chdesign txamplersubi Be Edt yea Smulation Fama Jods Heb DS i8 r Down Sample System Generator Ragleter Up Sample foo loma G s D e 5 RME Regletert o HDL port names Displays the HDL port name of
255. ers specific to this block are e Frame sampling pattern specifies the size of the serial input data frame The frame sampling pattern must be a MATLAB vector containing only 1 s and 0 s e Implementation specifies the demultiplexer behavior to be either in single or multiple channel mode The behaviors of these modes are explained above e Provide valid Port when selected the demultiplexer has optional input and output valid ports vin vout The vin port allows to qualify every input data value as part of the serial input data frame The vout port marks the state of the output ports as valid or not Parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 301 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Time Division Multiplexer Time Division Multiplexer This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements and Index The Xilinx Time Division Multiplexer block multiplexes values presented at input 4 ports into a single faster rate output stream Ts qf Block Interface Time Division Multiplexer The block has two to 32 input ports and one output port All input ports must have the same arithmetic type precision and rate The output port has the same arithmetic type and precision as the inputs The output rate is nr where n is the number of input ports and r is their common rate The block
256. erts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value Convert Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic Tab are as follows Output Precision Specifies the output data type Can be Boolean Fixed point or Floating point Arithmetic Type If the Output Type is specified as Fixed point you can select Signed 2 s comp or Unsigned as the Arithmetic Type Fixed point Precision Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point where bit zero is the least significant bit Binary point specifies the bit location of the binary point where bit zero is the least significant bit Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Fraction width Specify the fraction width Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 93 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Convert Quantization Quantization errors occur when the number of fractional bits is insufficient to represent the fractional portion of a value The options are to Truncate for example to discard bits to the rig
257. es From the input port inserts symbols at the locations specified by zeros in the puncture code and presents the results at the output port Depuncture Xilinx Depuncturer Hardware notes In hardware this block costs nothing Depuncture code i00 Symbol to insert 100 Simulation r Override with doubles Cancel Help Apply Parameters specific to the Xilinx Depuncturer block are e Depuncture code specifies the depuncture pattern for inserting the string to the input e Symbol to insert specifies the binary word to be inserted in the depuncture code Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 122 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Divide Divide This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Divide block performs both fixed point and floating point division with the a app input being the dividend and the b input the divisor Both inputs must be of the same E data type Divide Basic tab a Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows AXI Interface Flow Control e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel e NonBlocking Selects Non Blockin
258. es not require additional saturation rounding logic then all the registers are used to pipeline the core Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows Use behavioral HDL otherwise use core The block is implemented using behavioral HDL This gives the downstream logic synthesis tool maximum freedom to optimize for performance or area Note For Floating point operations the block always uses the Floating point Operator core Core Parameters e Optimize for Speed Area directs the block to be optimized for either Speed or Area e Use embedded multipliers This field specifies that if possible use the XtremeDSP slice DSP48 type embedded multiplier in the target device e Test for optimum pipelining Checks if the Latency provided is at least equal to the optimum pipeline length Latency values that pass this test imply that the core produced is optimized for speed Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Multiplier v11 2 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 232 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mux Mux This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Mux block implements a multiplexer The block has one select inpu
259. eters iii A a A A A total 337 PRETO FEIN COn naaa nai ideada 338 CORDIC LOG susi is AA A A 339 Block Parameters 00 a dns id wns 339 Redee Cl ae 340 CORDIC SINCOS 50 00 00 a da 341 Block Parameters 200 000 aa aia 341 Referen CE a a A A oh A id ean al 342 CORDIC SORT eresiaren hes wie eee ae es os els ec Os ew A esa Ge Ae Oe Ses 343 Block Parameters siriani i a aai ibi 343 A ea e as nen le E a EE E EOE A EE N E A E a e E O 344 Dual Port Memory Interpolation MAC FIR Filter 0 0 0 2 ccc cece eee eee ee eee teens 345 Block Parameters 00 Us a di a ia weed lave liceos hee aed datas 345 Redee Clive AA alias 345 Interpolation Fite ironia dnd 346 Block Parameters 0 0 mc aaa da 346 Referente iii a ss dl aaa Es 8 346 m channel n tap Transpose FIR Filter o ooooooooooocoorrorcrrrrsarsrnnso 347 Block Parameters 60 A Mice Sg Ae Wg uw A A dia lada 347 Mealy State Machine soii aa AAA A 348 EAU ON arcano a dia 349 Block Para Meter iia A A e a aot 350 Moore State Machine ocio aa aa dia 351 Example 5 bai coals eave donada a ad at Ea 352 BIOCK Parameters oi a ica 353 Multipath Fading Channel Model cece cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e teen ee neees 355 TEON aonana A ARA 355 Implementation Gore Gove Rees YP Vb hPa Wale Reece Ai 356 Block Parameters criar cc a ancien E air EEEE alos deuda 356 FUNCTIONS 20024000 is a A Wee A a at A 358 A tenes AE ve a EEA E EEA E domicile 359 A hdl dod ede a Ea E aE a Gore deere Na
260. ew auto layout and route capabilities to Simulink models Up Sample The Xilinx Up Sample block increases the sample rate at the point where the block is placed in your design The output sample period is n where is the input sample period and n is the sampling rate Vivado HLS The Xilinx Vivado HLS block allows the functionality of a Vivado HLS design to be included in a System Generator design The Vivado HLS design can include C C and System C design sources Viterbi Decoder 8 0 Data encoded with a convolution encoder can be decoded using the Xilinx Viterbi decoder block This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Math Blocks Table 1 9 Math Blocks Math Block Description Absolute The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Absolute The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input AddSub The Xilinx AddSub block implements an adder subtractor The operation can be fixed Addition or Subtraction or changed dynamically under control of the sub mode signal CMult The Xilinx CMult block implements a gain operator with output equal to the product of its input by a constant value This value can be a MATLAB expression that evaluates to a constant Complex Multiplier The Complex Multiplier 5 0 block implements AXI4 Stream 5 0 compliant high performance optimized complex multipliers for devices based on user
261. eway In3 1 Gateway Out 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 425 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Xilinx BlockConnect Smart Connections As shown below a lighting bolt icon indicates a smart connection Smart connections have intelligence built in to help you manage the connection For example right clicking on a block with an AXI interface allows you to 1 group separate the AXI signals to from a bus Or 2 connect to other ports with the same number of AXI connections Means smart connection dout_tvalid f dout_tvalid f gt gt a_tdata_imag gt a_tdata_real dout_tdata_imag fl b_tvalid a E Complex Multiplier 5 0 1 Make Bus b tdata Ry data_real f Complex Multiplier 5 0 AXI1 E Complex Multiplier 5 0 1 AXI1 Complex Multiplier 5 2 Complex Multiplier 5 1 Complex Multiplier 5 3 Complex Multiplier 5 2 Complex Multiplier 5 0 No port data type checking is performed and any AXI ports with the same number of ports are allowed to connect In another smart connection example below right clicking on the Accumulator block output selecting BlockConnect and double clicking on Scope creates a smart connection to the Scope block The Gateway Out block is added automatically VETER l 0 x m fioo Nomai z 5 File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help D S H BaBe T System Accumulator OA Genera
262. ext statement the value of in1 is assigned to ff1 so it can be saved for the next cycle This infers a register for ff1 In code segment 2 the value of in2 is first assigned to persistent variable ff2 then assigned to out2 These two statements can be completed in one cycle so a register is not inferred If you need to insert delay into combinational logic refer to the next topic Pipelining Combinational Logic The generated FPGA bitstream for an MCode block might contain many levels of combinational logic and hence a large critical path delay To allow a downstream logic synthesis tool to automatically pipeline the combinational logic you can add delay blocks before the MCode block inputs or after the MCode block outputs These delay blocks should have the parameter Implement using behavioral HDL set which instructs the code generator to implement delay with synthesizable HDL You can then instruct the downstream logic synthesis tool to implement register re timing or register balancing As an alternative approach you can use the vector state variables to model delays Shift Operations with Multiplication and Division The MCode block can detect when a number is multiplied or divided by constants that are powers of two If detected the MCode block will perform a shift operation For example multiplying by 4 is equivalent to left shifting 2 bits and dividing by 8 is equivalent to right shifting 3 bits A shift is implemented by adjusting
263. ficient memory usage is achieved by exploiting the symmetry of sinusoid waveforms The core can be configured for SINE only output COSINE only output or both quadrature output Each output can be configured independently to be negated Precision can be increased using optional Taylor Series Correction This exploits XtremeDSP slices on FPGA families that support them to achieve high SFDR with high speed operation AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block Depending on the Configuration Options and Phase Increment Offset Programmability options selected different subfield ports for the PHASE channel or the CONFIG channel or both channels are available on the block as described in the table below Configuration Option Phase Increment Programmability Phase Offset Programmability Option Selected Option Selected Available Port Available Port Phase_Generator_only Phase_Generator_and_SI N_COS_LUT Programmable s_axis_config_tdata_pinc Programmable s_axis_config_tdata_poff Streaming s_axis_phase_tdata_pinc Streaming s_axis_phase_tdata_poff Fixed NA Fixed NA None NA SIN_COS_LUT_only In this configuration input port s_axis_phase_tdata_phase_in are available Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 108 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clickin
264. fies if the core is required to operate at maximum possible speed Speed option or minimum area Area option The Area option is the recommended default and will normally achieve the best speed and area for the design however in certain configurations the Speed setting might be required to improve performance at the expense of overall resource usage this setting normally adds pipeline registers in critical paths o Area e Speed o Speed_ Control_only e Speed_ Data_only Memory Options The memory type for MAC implementations can either be user selected or chosen automatically to suit the best implementation options Note that a choice of Distributed might result in a shift register implementation where appropriate to the filter structure Forcing the RAM selection to be either Block or Distributed should be used with caution as inappropriate use can lead to inefficient resource usage the default Automatic mode is recommended for most applications Data Buffer Type Specifies the type of memory used to store data samples Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 173 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 e Coefficient Buffer Type Specifies the type of memory used to store the coefficients Input Buffer Type Specifies the type of memory to be used to implement the data input buffer where present e Output Buffer type Specifies the type of memory to
265. follwing Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 217 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode switch i case 0 where i is type x ix To run from the console this code must changed to switch double i case 0 x 1 case 1 x 2 end The double function call only has an effect when the M code is run from the console The MCode block ignores the double call Passing Parameters It is possible to use the same M function in different MCode blocks passing different parameters to the M function so that each block can behave differently This is achieved by binding input arguments to some values To bind the input arguments select the Interface tab on the block GUI After you bind those arguments to some values these M function arguments will not be shown as input ports of the MCode block Consider for example the following M function function dout xl_sconvert din nbits binpt proto xlSigned nbits binpt dout xfix proto din The following figures shows how the bindings are set for the din input of two separate xl_sconvert blocks MCode iXilinx MCode Block Pass input values to a MATLAB function for evaluation in lnk fixed point ype The input ports of Ihe block are input arguments of Ihe function The autput ports of the block aie output arguments of the function Basic Intelface Advanced Implementation Block Interface Irpul name Bind to value din nbi
266. for example a direct feed through from an input to an output port the block must be tagged as combinational in its configuration M function using the tagAsCombinational method A black box can be a mixture for example some paths can be combinational while others are not It is essential that a block containing a combinational path be tagged as such Doing so allows System Generator to identify such blocks to the Simulink simulator If this is not done simulation results are incorrect The configuration M function for a black box is invoked several times when a model is compiled The function typically includes code that depends on the block s input ports For example sometimes it is necessary to set the data type and or rate of an output port based on the attributes on an input port It is sometimes also necessary to check the type and rate on an input port At certain times when the function is invoked Simulink might not yet know enough for such code to be executed To avoid the problems that arise when information is not yet known in particular exceptions BlockDescriptor members inputTypesKnown and inputRatesKnown can be used These are used to determine if Simulink is able at the moment to provide information about the input port types and rates respectively The following code illustrates this point if this_block inputTypesKnown set dynamic output port types set generics that depend on input port types check types of input
267. fter L cycles The rate and type of the data of the output is inherited from the input This block is used mainly for matching pipeline delays in other portions of the circuit The delay block differs from the register block in that the register allows a latency of only 1 cycle and contains an initial value parameter The delay block supports a specified latency but no initial value other than zeros The figure below shows the Delay block behavior when L 4 and Period 1s Delay Figure 2 dly_block WaveScope File Edit view Cursor Nets Options Help dly_block_in 0 1 dly_block_out o ic lo ck 0 2 4 6 8 Time in seconds For delays that need to be adjusted during run time you should use the Addressable Shift Register block Delays that are not an integer number of clock cycles are not supported and such delays should not be used in synchronous design with a few rare exceptions Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 116 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Delay e Provide synchronous reset port this option activates an optional reset rst pin on the block When the reset signal is asserted the block goes back to its initial state Reset signal has precedence over the optional enable signal available on the block
268. g mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Fixed point Options Algorithm Type e Radix2 This is non restoring integer division using integer operands and allows a remainder to be generated This option is recommended for operand widths less than 16 bits This option supports both unsigned two s complement and signed divisor and dividend inputs e High_Radix This option is recommended for operand widths greater than 16 bits though the implementation requires the use of DSP48 or variant primitives This option only supports signed two s complement divisor and dividend inputs e Output Fractional width For Fixed point division this entry determines the number of bits in the fractional part of the output Optional ports Dividend Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a TLAST port to the Input channel e Has TUSER Adds a TUSER port to the Input channel Divisor Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a TLAST port to the Input channel Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 123 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Divide e Has TUSER Adds a TUSER port to the Input channel Control Options e Provide enable port Adds an enable port to the block interface e Has Result TREADY Adds a TREADY port to the Result channel e Output TLAST behavior Determines the behavior of the result_tlast output port
269. g the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Configuration Options This parameter allows for two parts of the DDS to be instantiated separately or instantiated together Select one of the following e Phase _Generator_and SIN COS LUT e Phase_Generator_only e SIN_COS_LUT_only System Requirements e System Clock Mhz Specifies the frequency at which the block is clocked for the purposes of making architectural decisions and calculating phase increment from the specified output frequency This is a fixed ratio off the System Clock e Number of Channels The channels are time multiplexed in the DDS which affects the effective clock per channel The DDS can support 1 to 16 time multiplexed channels Parameter Selection Choose System_Parameters or Hardware_Parameters System Parameters Spurious Free Dynamic Range dB The targeted purity of the tone produced by the DDS This sets the output width as well as internal bus widths and various implementation decisions e Frequency Resolution Hz This sets the precision of the PINC and POFF values Very precise values will require larger accumulators Less precise values will cost less in hardware resource Noise Shaping Choose one None Phase_Dithering Taylor_Series_Corrected or Auto If the Configuration Options selection is SIN_COS_LUT_only then None and Taylor_Series_Corrected are the only valid options for Noise Shaping
270. g with System Generator www xilinx com 190 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 Control Channel Input Signals s_axis_ctrl_tdata_config_sel A sub field port that represents the CONFIG_SEL field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Forney mode and Number of configurations is greater than one s_axis_ctrl_tdata_row A sub field port that represents the ROW field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Rectangular mode and Row type is Variable s_ axis ctrl_tdata_row sel A sub field port that represents the ROW_SEL field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Rectangular mode and Row type is Selectable s_axis_ctrl_tdata_col A sub field port that represents the COL field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Rectangular mode and Column type is Variable s_axis_ctrl_tdata_col_sel A sub field port that represents the COL_SEL field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Rectangular mode and Column type is Selectable s_axis_ctrl_tdata_block_ size A sub field port that represents the COL field in the Control Channel vector Available when in Rectangular mode and Block Size type is Variable DATA Channel Input Signals s_axis_data_tdata_din Represents the DIN field of the Input Data Channel DATA Channel Output Signals m_axis_data_tdata_dout Represents the DOUT field of the Output Data Channel TUSER Channel Output Signals
271. g with System Generator www xilinx com 434 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator API for Programmatic Generation xBlock The xBlock constructor creates an xBlock object The object can be created from a library block or it can be a subsystem The xBlock constructor can be used in three ways e to add a leaf block to the current subsystem e to add a subsystem to the current subsystem e to attach a top level subsystem to a model The xBlock takes four arguments and is invoked as follows block xBlock source params inports outports If the source argument is a string it is expected to be a library block name If the source block is in the xbsIndex_r4 library or in the Simulink built in library you can use the block name without the library name For example calling xBlock AddSub is equivalent to xBlock xbsIndex_r4 AddSub Fora source block that is not in the xbsIndex_r4 library or built in library you need to use the full path for example xBlock xbsTest_r4 Assert Relation If the source argument is a function handle it is interpreted as a PG API function If it is a MATLAB struct it is treated as a configuration struc to specify how to attach the top level to a model The params argument sets up the parameters It can be a cell array for position based binding or a MATLAB struct for name based binding If the source parameter is a block ina library this argument must be a cell
272. ges used for linear rotation e Input Data Width specifies the width of the input z The input z should be signed data type with the same data width as specified Input Binary Point Position specifies the binary point position for input z The input z should be signed data type with the same binary point position The binary point should be chosen to provide enough bits for representing pi 2 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 341 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC SINCOS e Latency for each Processing element This parameter sets the pipeline latency after each iterative circular rotation stage The latency of the CORDIC SINCOS block is calculated based on the formula specified as follows Latency 3 sum latency of Processing Elements Reference 1 J E Volder The CORDIC Trigonometric Computing Technique IRE Trans On Electronic Computers Vol EC 8 1959 pp 330 334 2 J S Walther A Unified Algorithm for Elementary Functions Spring Joint Computer Conference 1971 pp 379 385 3 Yu Hen Hu CORDIC Based VLSI Architectures for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Signal Processing Magazine pp 17 34 July 1992 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 342 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC SQRT CORDIC SQRT The Xilinx CORDIC SQRT reference block implements a square root circuit using a fully parallel CORDIC COordinate Rotation Digital Compute
273. gh branch 0 appears to be a zero delay connection there will still be a delay of a number of clock cycles between DIN and DOUT because of the fundamental latency of the core For clarity this is not illustrated in the figure The only difference between an interleaver and a de interleaver is that branch 0 is the longest in the deinterleaver and the branch length is decremented by L rather than incremented Branch B 1 has length 0 This is illustrated in the figure below e e If a file is used to specify the branch lengths as shown below it is arbitrary whether the resulting core is called an interleaver or de interleaver All that matters is that one must be the inverse of the other If a file is used each branch length is individually controllable This Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 187 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 is illustrated in the figure below For the file syntax please consult the LogiCORE product specification branch_length_vector 0 branch_length_vector 1 gt branch_length_vector 2 y DOUT Y B 3 branch_length_vector B 3 branch_length_vector B 2 branch_length_vector B 1 The reset pin aresetn sets the commutator arms to branch 0 but does not clear the branches of data Configuration Swapping It is possible for the core to store a number of pre defined configuratio
274. gh progressively smaller angles such that Ygoes to zero 4 Co ordinate Correction If the input was negative and a left shift was applied to x this step assigns the appropriate sign to the output and multiplies it with 2 shift If the input was zero the zero detect flag is used to set the output to 0 Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Number of Processing Elements integer value starting from 1 specifies the number of iterative stages used for linear rotation e Input Data Width specifies the width of the inputs x The input x should be signed data type with the same data width as specified Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 343 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC SQRT Input Binary Point Position specifies the binary point position for input x The input x should be signed data type with the specified binary point position e Latency for each Processing Element 1001 This parameter sets the pipeline latency after each iterative hyperbolic rotation stage The latency of the CORDIC square root block is calculated based on the formula specified below Latency 7 data width binary point mod data width binary point 2 sum latency of Processing Elements Reference e 1 J E Volder The CORDIC Trigonometric Comp
275. gning with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 37 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 11 Tool Blocks Tool Blocks Sample Time Description The Sample Time block reports the normalized sample period of its input A signal s normalized sample period is not equivalent to its Simulink absolute sample period In hardware this block is implemented as a constant Simulation The Simulation Multiplexer has been deprecated in System Multiplexer Generator Single Step The Xilinx Single Step Simulation block pauses the simulation Simulation each clock cycle when in single step mode System Generator The System Generator token serves as a control panel for controlling system and simulation parameters and it is also used to invoke the code generator for netlisting Every Simulink model containing any element from the Xilinx Blockset must contain at least one System Generator token Once a System Generator token is added to a model it is possible to specify how code generation and simulation should be handled Toolbar The Xilinx Toolbar block provides quick access to several useful utilities in System Generator The Toolbar simplifies the use of the zoom feature in Simulink and adds new auto layout and route capabilities to Simulink models Simulink Blocks Supported by System Generator In general Simulink blocks can be included in a Xilinx design fo
276. gular mode Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 189 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 event_halted optional available when Master channel TREADY is enabled e event_col_valid optional event_col_sel_valid optional event_row_valid optional event_row_sel_valid optional event_block_size_valid optional An AXI slave channel to receive configuration information s_axis_ctrl consisting of o axis ctrl_tvalid e S_axis_ctrl_tready axis ctrl_tdata The control channel is only enabled when the core is configured in such a way to require it An AXI slave channel to receive the data to be interleaved s_axis_data consisting of _axis_data_tvalid This is the equivalent of ND pin of SID v6 0 block No longer optional o _axis_data_tready axis data_tdata o axis data_tlast An AXI master channel to send the data that has been interleaved m_axis_data consisting of m_axis data_tvalid o m_axis_data_tready Mm_axis data _tdata m_axis data_tuser m_axis data_tlast AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block This System Generator block exposes the AXI Control and Data channels as a group of sep arate ports based on the following sub field names Note Refer to the Interleaver De Interleaver v7 1 Product Specification for an explanation of the bits in the specified sub field name Vivado Designin
277. h load capability is calculated as follows StartCount if Oorrst x 1 out 9 din if rst 2 Dard load n 1 out n 1 CountByValue mod 2 otherwise Here N denotes the number of bits in the counter The down counter calculations replace addition by subtraction Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Counter type specifies the counter to be a count limited or free running counter Number of bits specifies the number of bits in the block output e Binary point specifies the location of the binary point in the block output e Output type specifies the block output to be either Signed or Unsigned Initial value specifies the initial value to be the output of the counter e Count to value specifies the ending value the number at which the count limited counter resets A value of Inf denotes the largest representable output in the specified precision This cannot be the same as the initial value e Step specifies the increment or decrement value e Count direction specifies the direction of the count up or down or provides an optional input port up when up down is selected for specifying the direction of the counter e Provide load Port when checked the block operates as a free running load counter with explicit load and din port The load capability is availa
278. han or equal to the length of the b bcin pipeline e Pipeline c indicates whether the input from the c port should be registered e Pipeline p indicates whether the outputs p and pcout should be registered Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 146 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 e Pipeline multiplier indicates whether the internal multiplier should register its output e Pipeline opmode indicates whether the opmode port should be registered e Pipeline alumode indicates whether the alumode port should be registered e Pipeline carry in indicates whether the carry in port should be registered e Pipeline carry in select indicates whether the carry in select port should be registered e Pipeline preadder input register d indicates to add a pipeline register to the d input e Pipeline preadder output register ad indicates to add a pipeline register to the ad output e Pipeline INMODE register indicates to add a pipeline register to the INMODE input Reset Enable Ports Parameters specific to the Reset Enable tab are Provide Reset Ports e Reset port for a acin when selected a port rst_a is made available This resets the pipeline register for port a when set to T e Reset port for b bcin when selected a port rst_b is made available This resets the pipeline register for port b when set to 1 e Reset port for c when selected a port rst_c is made available This resets the p
279. hannel BPSK AWGN Channel The Xilinx BPSK AWGN Channel reference block adds scaled white Gaussian noise to an input signal The noise is created by the White Gaussian Noise Generator reference block The noise is scaled based on the SNR to achieve the desired noise variance as shown below The SNR is defined as Eb No in dB for uncoded BPSK with unit BPSK symbol energy Es 1 The SNR input is UFix8_4 and the valid range is from AWGN Channel 0 0 to 15 9375 in steps of 0 0625dB To use the AWGN in a system with coding and or to use the core with different modulation formats it is necessary to adjust the SNR value to accommodate the difference in spectral efficiency If we have BPSK modulation with rate 1 2 coding and keep Es 1 and No constant then Eb 2 and Eb No SNR 3 dB If we have uncoded QPSK modulation with I 1 and Q 1 and add independent noise sequences then each channel looks like an independent BPSK channel and the Eb No SNR If we then add rate 1 2 coding to the QPSK case we have Eb No SNR 3 dB The overall latency of the AWGN Channel is 15 clock cycles Channel output is a 17 bit signed number with 11 bits after the binary point The input port snr can be any type The reset port must be Boolean and the input port din must be of unsigned 1 bit type with binary point position at zero Constanti Constant2 AddSub snr Input Conversion ROM White Gaussian Noise Generator
280. he Jakes or Clarke spectrum It is used to model wireless links with mobile stations 2 3 4 and is defined as ls Sa S 0 elsewhere e Type 3 Specify a rounded spectrum physical path The rounded spectrum is used to model wireless links with fixed stations 5 and is defined as S f 1 17 Z 078 HESA d s f 0 elsewhere Once generated each spectrum is normalized to unity power For example to create and plot spectrum data for a M 7 4 Mp 3 and N 2 channel where the two paths combine to give Rician fading for example impulse and classic We assume that the mobile station MS is receding from the base station BS at 0 707xvMS giving fd 0 707 for the LOS physical paths Mt 4 Mr 3 N 2 spec_type cat 3 ones Mr Mt 1 ones Mr Mt 2 spec_fd cat 3 ones Mr Mt 0 707 ones Mr Mt 1 spec_data calc_path_data spec_type spec_fd plot spec_data spectrum Data Format Internally the model uses a three signal interface for transferring complex vector quantities between blocks This interface allows matrix vector operations to be chained together Vectors are transferred as streams of interleaved real and imaginary samples tagged with frame and repetition handshaking signals This interface allows vectors to be repeated multiple times per frame This feature can be used to simplify matrix vector multiplies where the vector values are required repeatedly once per matrix row The three signal interface
281. he block behaves exactly as the subsystem from which it originated except that the simulation data is processed in hardware instead of software XtremeDSP A h Co simulation The port interface of the co simulation block will vary When a model is compiled for co simulation a new library is created that contains a custom XtremeDSP hardware co simulation block This block has input and output ports that match the gateway names or port names if the subsystem is not the top level from the original model The hardware co simulation block interacts with the XtremeDSP development kit board during a Simulink simulation Simulation data that is written to the input ports of the block are passed to the hardware by the block Conversely when data is read from the co simulation block s output ports the block reads the appropriate values from the hardware and drives them on the output ports so they can be interpreted in Simulink In addition the block automatically opens configures steps and closes the development kit board Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Clock source You can select between Single stepped and Free running clock sources Selecting a Single Stepped clock allows the block to step the board one clock cycle at a time Each clock cycle step corresponds to some duration of time i
282. he bottom one will have a faster hardware implementation The bottom design will have the combinational path formed by Anverfer2 terrunated by a flipflop which has a shorter setup time than an SRL The synthesis results of both designs are shown below with the faster design highlighted in red ly_blockz SRLIGE SRLIGE al cE delay Bee giay reg1 has_only_1 sd1i e_array 0 AAA delav2 sn delay reg has_only_1 sr17e_anray0 de _array 0 has_2_late nverter2 op 0 nly_1 sd17e_arrayD reg_arrayiDi has alency u2 A Note that an equivalent to the faster design results from setting the latency of Inverter2 to 1 and eliminating Delay3 This however is not equivalent to setting the latency of Inverter2 to 4 and eliminating the delay blocks this would yield a synthesis equivalent to the upper slower design Implementing Long Delays For very long delays of say greater than 128 cycles especially when coupled with larger bus widths it might be better to use a block RAM based delay block The delay block is implemented using SRLs which are part of the general fabric in the Xilinx Very long delays should be implemented in the embedded block RAMs to save fabric Such a delay exploits Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 119 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Delay the dual port nature of the blockRAM and can be implemented with a fixed or run time variable delay Such a blo
283. he topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 142 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 DSP48E1 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Index DSP The Xilinx DSP48E1 block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use 7 series devices Enhancements to the DSP48E1 slice provide improved flexibility and utilization improved efficiency of applications reduced overall power consumption and increased maximum frequency The high performance allows designers to implement multiple slower operations in a single DSP48E1 slice using time multiplexing methods _ The DSP48E1 slice supports many independent functions These functions include multiply multiply accumulate MACC multiply add three input add barrel shift wide bus multiplexing magnitude comparator bit wise logic functions pattern detect and wide counter The architecture also supports cascading multiple DSP48E1 slices to form wide math functions DSP filters and complex arithmetic without the use of general FPGA logic 17 Bx Shift E 7 O These signals are dedicated routing paths internal to the DSP48E1 column They are not accessible via fabric routing resources Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are
284. hecked Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 308 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Data Type Translation Data Type Translation C C Data Type System Generator for DSP Data Type float XFloat_32_23 double XFloat_64_52 bool UFix_1_0 unsigned char U Fix_8_0 unsigned short U Fix_16_0 unsigned int U Fix_32_0 unsigned long U FIX_ lt PlatformDependent gt _0 unsigned long long U Fix_64_0 ap_ u fix lt N M gt U Fix_ lt N gt _ lt N M gt ap_ u int lt N gt U Fix_N_0 Design Example Vivado HLS A design that implements a Median Filter using the Vivado HLS block is located in the System Generator examples directory sub folder titled hls_filter Known Issues e Itis not possible to include a purely combinational design from Vivado HLS The design must synthesize into an RTL design that contains a Clock and a Clock Enable input e The top level module cannot contain C C templates e Composite ports will be represented as UFix_ lt N gt _0 only where N is the width of the port Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 309 XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 Viterbi Decoder 8 0 data_tready gt data tdata_data_in1 dstat_tready gt data_tdata_data_inO data_tvalid dstat_tvalid data_tdata_data dstat_tdata_ber_range dstat_tvalid data_
285. hen rst evaluates to true the register s reset input is asserted and the persistent state variable is assigned to constant init When rst evaluates to false the register s reset input is de asserted and persistent state variable r1 is assigned to r1 1 Again if the conditional assignment of a persistent state variable contains three or more branches a reset signal is not inferred on the persistent state variable s register It is possible to infer reset and enable signals on the register of a single persistent state variable The following M code example illustrates simultaneous inference of reset and enable signals for the persistent state variable r1 function myFn aFn rst en persistent rl rl xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 4 0 myFn r1 init 0 tr Est rl init else if en ri Yi 1 end end The reset input for the register of persistent state variable r1 is connected to rst when rst evaluates to true the register s reset input is asserted and r1 is assigned to init The enable input of the register is connected to en when en evaluates to true the register s enable input is asserted and r1 is assigned to r1 1 It is important to note that an inferred reset signal takes precedence over an inferred enable signal regardless of the order of the conditional assignment statements Consider the second code example above if both rst and en evaluate to true persistent state variable r1 would be assigned to init Inference
286. his block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes The Accumulator block always has a latency of 1 LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Accumulator v11 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 48 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Addressable Shift Register Addressable Shift Register This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx Addressable Shift Register block is a variable length shift register in ab which any register in the delay chain can be addressed and driven onto the addr output data port d Addressable Shift Register E E P 7 R The block operation is most easily thought of as a chain of registers where each register output drives an input to a multiplexer as shown below The multiplexer select line is driven by the address port addr The output data port is shown below as q The Addressable Shift Register has a maximum depth of 1024 and a minimum depth of 2 The address input port therefore can be between 1 and 10 bits inclusive The data input port width must be between 1 and 255 bits inclusive when this block is implemented with the Xilinx LogiCORE for example when Use behavioral HDL otherwise use core is unchecked In hardware the address port is asynchronous relative to the output port In the block S function the address port is therefore g
287. ht of the least significant representable bit or to Round unbiased inf or Round unbiased even values Round unbiased inf also known as Symmetric Round towards inf or Symmetric Round away from zero This is similar to the Matlab round function This method rounds the value to the nearest desired bit away from zero and when there is a value at the midpoint between two possible rounded values the one with the larger magnitude is selected For example to round 01 0110 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 0110 is exactly between 01 01 and 01 10 and the latter is further from zero Round unbiased even values also known as Convergent Round toward even or Unbiased Rounding Symmetric rounding is biased because it rounds all ambiguous midpoints away from zero which means the average magnitude of the rounded results is larger than the average magnitude of the raw results Convergent rounding removes this by alternating between a symmetric round toward zero and symmetric round away from zero That is midpoints are rounded toward the nearest even number For example to round 01 0110 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 0110 is exactly between 01 01 and 01 10 and the latter is even To round 01 1010 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 1010 is exactly between 01 10 and 01 11 and the former is even Overflow Overflow errors occur when a value lies outside the representable range For overflow the options
288. ible value should be used for this parameter to keep the core as small as possible e Number of Values This parameter is relevant only when the Selectable row type is selected This parameter defines how many valid selection values have been defined in the COE file You should only add the number of select values you need Row Type e Constant The number of rows is always equal to the Row Constant Value parameter e Variable The number of rows is sampled from the ROW input at the start of each new block Row permutations are not supported for the variable row type e Selectable ROW_SEL is sampled at the start of each new block This value is then used to select from one of the possible values for the number of rows provided in the COE file Number of Columns e Value This parameter is relevant only when the Constant column type is selected The number of columns is fixed at this value e COL Port Width This parameter is relevant only when the Variable column type is selected It sets the width of the COL input bus The smallest possible value should be used to keep the underlying LogiCORE as small as possible Minimum Number of Columns This parameter is relevant only when the Variable column type is selected In this case the core has to potentially cope with a wide range of possible values for the number of columns If the smallest value that will actually occur is known then the amount of logic in the LogiCORE can sometimes be
289. ider Generator 4 0 The Xilinx Divider Generator 4 0 block creates a circuit for integer division based on Radix 2 non restoring division or High Radix division with prescaling DSP48 Macro 2 1 The System Generator DSP48 macro 2 1 block provides a device independent abstraction of the blocks DSP48 DSP48A and DSP48E Using this block instead of using a technology specific DSP slice helps makes the design more portable between Xilinx technologies DSP48E The Xilinx DSP48E block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use supported devices The DSP48E combines an 18 bit by 25 bit signed multiplier with a 48 bit adder and programmable mux to select the adder s input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 24 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 6 DSP Blocks DSP Block Description DSP48E1 The Xilinx DSP48E1 block is an efficient building block for DSP applications that use 7 series devices Enhancements to the DSP48E1 slice provide improved flexibility and utilization improved efficiency of applications reduced overall power consumption and increased maximum frequency The high performance allows designers to implement multiple slower operations in a single DSP48E1 slice using time multiplexing methods Fast Fourier Transform The Xilinx Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 block implements the 8 0 Cooley Tukey FFT algorithm a compu
290. ier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 321 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter reference block implements E a multiply accumulate based FIR filter The 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR he filter exploits coefficient symmetry for an odd number of coefficients to instise Lines Fosse increase filter throughput These filter designs exploit silicon features found MAC FIR Filter in Virtex family FPGAs such as dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient e Num
291. iew Signal Close the Waveform Viewer You can close the waveform viewer as follows 1 Right click on a blank space in the design to bring up the right click menu 2 Select Xilinx View Signals to bring up a signals selection dialog box 5 integrate 2 Current Hierarchy Signals Selected Signals Delay1 Outl a Scale Outl Noise Outl Wave Outl Delay2 Outl Constant Outl Delay Outl IntOut Qutl E Register Outl SigOut Outl Mult Outl Gain Outl RepeatingSequencelnterpolated Outl RandomNumber Outl z Cancel Close Waveform 3 Select Close Waveform Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 433 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Chapter 6 Programmatic Access System Generator API for Programmatic Generation Introduction A script of System Generator for programmatic generation PG API script is a MATLAB M function file that builds a System Generator subsystem by instantiating and interconnecting xBlock xSignal xInport and xOutport objects It is a programmatic way of constructing System Generator diagrams for example subsystems As is demonstrated below with examples the top level function of a System Generator programmatic script is its entry point and must be invoked through an xBlock contructor Upon constructor exit MATLAB adds the corresponding System Generator subsystem to the corresponding model If no model is opened a new
292. ignals must have the same data type Refer to theFast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specification starting on page 53 for an explanation of the bits in this field Represents the real component of the Data Channel The signal driving xn_re can be a signed data type of width S with binary point at S 1 where S is a value between 8 and 34 inclusive eg Fix_8_7 Fix_34_33 Note Both xn_re and xn_im signals must have the same data type Refer to theFast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specification starting on page 53 for an explanation of the bits in this field Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Transform Length e Transform_length one of N 268 16 8 65536 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 157 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 Implementation Options e Target Clock Frequency MHz Enter the target clock frequency e Target Data Throughput MSPS Enter the target throughput e Implementation Options choose between automatically_select pipelined _streaming_io radix_4_burst_io radix_2_burst_io or radix_2_lite_burst_io Transform Length Options Run Time Configurable Transform Length The transform length can be set through the nfft port if this option is selected Valid settings and the corresponding transfo
293. igning with System Generator www xilinx com 382 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX XtremeDSP External RAM XtremeDSP External RAM The Xilinx XtremeDSP External RAM block allows System Generator components to connect to the external 256K x 16 ZBT SRAM on the P Nallatech BenAdda board when a model is prepared for hardware co simulation External RAM The block provides a Simulink simulation model for the memory device The ports on the block look and behave like ports on a traditional synchronous RAM device The address port should be driven by an unsigned 18 bit Xilinx fixed point signal having binary point at position 0 The we port should be driven by a Xilinx Boolean signal The data port should be driven by a 16 bit Xilinx fixed point signal The block drives 16 bit Xilinx fixed point data values on its output port In hardware components that read from and write to the block in Simulink read from and write to the Micron ZBT SRAM device on the BenAdda board When a System Generator model that uses an external RAM block is translated into hardware the ports on the RAM block are translated into top level input and output ports on the model HDL The appropriate pin location constraints for these ports are included in the BenAdda constraints file The ZBT SRAM device uses the same clock as the System Generator portion of the hardware co simulation implementation Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invok
294. ilinx LOBICORE sae cria a a Gd wd waar maser suena 130 DSP48 Macro Z I osi 5cccn ccc oes a ew eee a OS SESS ee OS eee ee a eee 131 Block ParaMeters 2 enn nnn enn teen tenn eee e ene n ens 131 LOZICORE Documentati N s ais ico ae Sia ete ae sien een Sa ww ava ie wna GPR Aa BEA a eed a due died ad aa a 136 DSPASE Lai a a fe ar da aaa ai ape ees 137 Block Parameters lia do dis eee at eRe ewe WON GN AOE EN ew PE Le eed Wa wee wa Ohara 137 DS PAS ED iii Site areata Baa AR aes a eed eh a See Si Sk Race ee ate Sas 143 Block Parameters ovio ee nwt whiodeeunnrscntsned dae dd 143 Dual POFERAM ee eee a ae a A a E 150 Block Interfaces siii ca aia a Peace a adios 150 Block Parameter Sesa ta stat A daa ideada 152 LogiCORE DocUMentati0N o ooccococoo eee eee ee eee eee ee nee nee n tenn eens 153 EXPTESSION sopiri ori 154 Block Parameters tii taa EE 154 Fast Fourier Transform BO pora AAA AAA AAA 156 Theory OM OPEATION ri A ai ido 156 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block o oooooococnocnonnncono n tenet ene eens 156 Block Parameters ress a aero tapes dye i E Bilas T E E a a Je dene ae did ened lt 157 Block DEIN TI Beco casas a sient seca Seatac A aa liada 160 LogICORE Documentation iio sted ape ace alee se ah nig allay a aig eed ea GBS BAG E a abe wee te 163 EDATOOL cri cc rr nt ad a one 6 eo Lo 164 Example OT USE ance hota merci geen c a ston A he Bb isa Ane eee Sct ath Rh one ei adm a a aaa 164 FDA T ollnterfat isc
295. implement the delay as it desires performing optimizations such as moving parts of the delay line back or forward into blockRAMs DSP48s or embedded IOB flip flops employing the dedicated SRL cascade outputs for long delay lines based on the architecture selected and using flip flops to terminate either or both ends of the delay line based on path delays Using this setting also allows the logic synthesis tool if sophisticated enough to perform retiming by moving portions of the delay line back into combinational logic clouds Logic Synthesis using Structural HDL If you do not check the box Implement using behavioral HDL then structural HDL is used This is the default setting and results in a known but less flexible implementation which is often better for use with Vivado synthesis In general this setting produces structural HDL comprising an SRL Shift Register LUT delay of L 1 cycles followed by a flip flop with the SRL and the flip flop getting packed into the same slice For a latency greater than L 17 multiple SRL flip flop sets are cascaded albeit without using the dedicated cascade routes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 117 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Delay For example the following is the synthesis result for a 1 bit wide delay block with a latency of L 32 hy _blocks SRLIGE SRLIBE af GE delays cdelaw regl has_only_1 s1 2_arrayD CE D Lo O D del
296. in this_block port din parity setRate din rate end if inputRatesKnown this_block addFile word_parity_block vhd return Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 70 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CIC Compiler 3 0 CIC Compiler 3 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 DSP and Index The Xilinx CIC Compiler provides the ability to design and implement AXI4 Stream compliant Cascaded Integrator Comb CIC filters for a variety of Xilinx FPGA devices data_tready gt CIC filters also known as Hogenauer filters are multi rate filters often dala_idala data data_wal gt Used for implementing large sample rate changes in digital systems They are typically employed in applications that have a large excess sample rate That is the system sample rate is much larger than the data tdata data f gt bandwidth occupied by the processed signal as in digital down converters DDCs and digital up converters DUCs Implementations of CIC filters have structures that use only adders subtractors and delay elements These structures make CIC filters appealing for their hardware efficient implementations of multi rate filtering CIC Compiler3 0 Sample Rates and the CIC Compiler Block The CIC Compiler block must always run at the system rate because the CIC Compiler block has a programmable rate change option and Simulink cannot inherently support it You
297. inary 0000 digo ton is type Fix_11_7 maxlen 4 length 4 0 binary 0011 1 binary 0010 2 binary 0001 3 binary 0000 a 0 000000 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator s 0 000000 0000 b xl_state zeros 1 xl_state 3 2 1 1 1 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 8 01 num2str dly he 4 a a Simulink time 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 0 000000 double 3 0 double 2 0 double 1 0 double 0 0 0 000000 b 0 000000 x UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com FPGA clock 0 000000 213 XILINX MCode disp 10 is type UFix_4_0 binary 1010 double 10 0 disp 10 is type Fix_5_0 binary 10110 double 10 0 disp a is type Fix_11_7 binary 0000 0000000 double 0 000000 disp a b type Bool binary 1 double 1 You can find the above example in the topic Compiling MATLAB into an FPGA error Displays message and abort function See Matlab help on this function for more detailed information Message formatting is not supported by the MCode block For example if latency lt 0 error latency must be a positive end isnan Returns true for Not a Number isnan X returns true
298. ined in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 234 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Natural Logarithm Natural Logarithm This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI Floating Point Index and Math The Xilinx Natural Logarithm block produces the natural logarithm of the input a InfxjopP sensor Block Parameters Dialog Box Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Flow Control Options e Blocking In this mode the block waits for data on the input as indicated by TREADY which allows back pressure e NonBlocking In this mode the block operates every cycle in which the input is valid no back pressure Optional ports tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Input Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a tlast input port to the block e Has TUSER Adds a tuser input port to the block Control Options e Provide enable port Adds an enable port to the block interface e Has Result TREADY Adds a TREADY port to the output channel Exception Signals e INVALID_OP Adds an output port that serves as an invalid operation flag e DIVIDE_BY_ZERO Adds an output port that serves as a divide by zero flag LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xili
299. ing the layout process xITBUtils RedrawLines optionStruct The RedrawLines command will redraw all lines in a Simulink model If there are lines selected only selected lines are redrawn otherwise all lines are redrawn If a branch is selected the entire line is redrawn main trunk and all other sub branches Field Names Description Default values autoroute Turns on Simulink auto routing of lines 1 0 1 sys Name of the system to layout gcs lines blks xITBUtils GetSelected arg The GetSelected command returns handles to selected blocks and lines of the system in focus The argument arg is optional It should be a one of the string values described in the table below Field Names Description Default values all Gets both selected lines and blocks default lines Gets only selected lines blocks Gets only selected blocks Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 411 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xITBUtils The GetSelected command will return an array with two items an array of a structure containing line information lines and an array of block handles blks If the lines argument is used blks is an empty array similarly when the blocks argument is used lines is an empty array Examples Example 1a Performing Layouts a verbose 1 a autoroute 0 x1TBUtils Layout a This will invoke
300. ing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 447 XILINX PG API Error Warning Handling amp Messages xInport Error Messages Condition Error Message s If you try to create an xInport A new block named untitled Subsystem a object with the same name the cannot be added second time an error is thrown For example if you call p xInport a ta a xOutport Error Messages Condition Error Message s If you try to create an xOutport A new block named untitled Subsystem a object with the same name the cannot be added second time an error is thrown For example if you call p xOutport a tat a If you try to bind an xOutport object The destination port already has a line twice an error is thrown For connection example the following sequence of calls will cause an error a b xInport a b c xOutport c c bind a c bind b xSignal Error Messages Condition Error Message s If you try to bind an xSignal Source of xSignal object already exists object with two sources an error is thrown For example the following sequence of calls will cause an error a b xInport a b sig xSignal sig bind a sig bind b Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 448 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PG API Error Warning Handling amp Messages
301. instruction can consists of the opmode carry in carry in select inmode and either the subtract or alumode bits depending upon the selection of DSP48 or DSP48E type Parallel to Serial The Parallel to Serial block takes an input word and splits it into N time multiplexed output words where N is the ratio of number of input bits to output bits The order of the output can be either least significant bit first or most significant bit first Pause Simulation The Xilinx Pause Simulation block pauses the simulation when the input is non zero The block accepts any Xilinx signal type as input Puncture The Xilinx Puncture block removes a set of user specified bits from the input words of its data stream PicoBlaze6 The Xilinx PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller block implements an Microcontroller 8 bit microcontroller Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal block performs the reciprocal on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal SquareRoot block performs the reciprocal SquareRoot squareroot on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage Reed Solomon The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting Encoder 8 0 codes with a wide range of a
302. int input produces a floating point output a fixed point input produces a fixed point output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 25 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 7 Floating Point Blocks Index Block Description AXI FIFO The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface Absolute The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Addressable Shift Register The Xilinx Addressable Shift Register block is a variable length shift register in which any register in the delay chain can be addressed and driven onto the output data port AddSub The Xilinx AddSub block implements an adder subtractor The operation can be fixed Addition or Subtraction or changed dynamically under control of the sub mode signal Assert The Xilinx Assert block is used to assert a rate and or a type on a signal This block has no cost in hardware and can be used to resolve rates and or types in situations where designer intervention is required Black Box The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate hardware description language HDL models into System Generator CMult The Xilinx CMult block implements a gain operator with output equal to the product of its input by a constant value This value can be a MATLAB expression that evaluates to a constant
303. invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the block are as follows e Disable Display When selected the display is no longer updated which will speed up your simulation when not in debug mode Xilinx LogiCORE The PicoBlaze6 Instruction Display block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 247 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Index and Tools mad strobe f write_stiobe f interrupt k_write_strobe gt intermupt_ack gt bram_enabk gt PioBlaze6 Microcontroller The Xilinx PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller block implements an 8 bit microcontroller Applications requiring a complex but non time critical state machine as well as data processing applications are candidates to employ this block The microcontroller is fully embedded into the device and requires no external support Any additional logic can be connected to the microcontroller inside the device providing ultimate flexibility This block supports 7 Series FPGAs Some architecture highlights are e Predictable performance two clock cycles per instruction e 52 120 MIPS dependent upon device type and speed grade e Fast interrupt response e 26 slices 0 5 to 2 block RAM depend on device and program size
304. inx portion of your Simulink design These blocks convert Simulink integer double and fixed point data types into the System Generator fixed point type Each block defines a top level input port in the HDL design generated by System Generator Gateway Out Xilinx Gateway Out blocks are the outputs from the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design This block converts the System Generator fixed point or floating point data type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type Inverter The Xilinx Inverter block calculates the bitwise logical complement of a fixed point number The block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module LFSR The Xilinx LFSR block implements a Linear Feedback Shift Register LFSR This block supports both the Galois and Fibonacci structures using either the XOR or XNOR gate and allows a re loadable input to change the current value of the register at any time The LFSR output and re loadable input can be configured as either serial or parallel ports Logical The Xilinx Logical block performs bitwise logical operations on fixed point numbers Operands are zero padded and sign extended as necessary to make binary point positions coincide then the logical operation is performed and the result is delivered at the output port The Xilinx Mult block implements a multiplier It computes the product of the data on its two input ports producing the result on its output port
305. ion Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 339 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC LOG e Input Data Width specifies the width of input x The inputs x should be signed data type having the same data width Input Binary Point Position specifies the binary point position for input x The input x should be signed data type with the same binary point position e Latency for each Processing Element 1001 This parameter sets the pipeline latency after each circular rotation stage The latency of the CORDIC LOG block is calculated based on the formula specified as follows Latency 2 Data Width sum latency of Processing Elements Reference 1 J E Volder The CORDIC Trigonometric Computing Technique IRE Trans On Electronic Computers Vol EC 8 1959 pp 330 334 2 J S Walther A Unified Algorithm for Elementary Functions Spring Joint Computer Conference 1971 pp 379 385 3 Yu Hen Hu CORDIC Based VLSI Architectures for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Signal Processing Magazine pp 17 34 July 1992 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 340 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC SINCOS CORDIC SINCOS The Xilinx CORDIC SINCOS reference block implements Sine and Cosine cosp generator circuit using a fully parallel CORDIC COordinate Rotation Digital Computer algorithm in Circular Rotation mode That is given input angle z it computes
306. ion and simulation should be handled The System Generator token serves as a control panel for controlling system and For a detailed discussion on how to use the token see Compiling and Simulating Using the System Generator Token Token Parameters The parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Compilation tab Parameters specific to the Compilation tab are as follows e Compilation Specifies the type of compilation result that should be produced when the code generator is invoked See System Generator Compilation Types for more details e Part Defines the FPGA part to be used e Synthesis tool Specifies the tool to be used to synthesize the design The possibilities are Synplify Pro and Xilinx s Vivado synthesis e Hardware Description Language Specifies the HDL language to be used for compilation of the design The possibilities are VHDL and Verilog e Target directory Defines where System Generator should write compilation results Because System Generator and the FPGA physical design tools typically create many files it is best to create a separate target directory for example a directory other than the directory containing your Simulink model files e Project type Select Vivado The generated Vivado project file can be found in the hdl_netlist subfolder e Synthesis strategy file Choose a Synthesis strategy from the pre defined strategies in the drop down list
307. ion changes to the block leaving the box open on the screen Help displays HTML help for the block Cancel closes the box without saving changes OK applies changes and closes the box Precision The fundamental computational mode in the Xilinx blockset is arbitrary precision fixe point arithmetic Most blocks give you the option of choosing the precision for example the number of bits and binary point position By default the output of Xilinx blocks is full precision that is sufficient precision to represent the result without error Most blocks have a User Defined precision option that fixes the number of total and fractional bits Arithmetic Type In the Type field of the block parameters dialog box you can choose unsigned or signed two s complement as the data type of the output signal Number of Bits Fixed point numbers are stored in data types characterized by their word size as specified by number of bits binary point and arithmetic type parameters The maximum number of bits supported is 4096 Binary Point The binary point is the means by which fixed point numbers are scaled The binary point parameter indicates the number of bits to the right of the binary point for example the size of the fraction for the output port The binary point position must be between zero and the specified number of bits Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 39 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Common
308. ion mismatches d n num_mismatches fprintf fd n fprintf fd Simulation mismatches n fprinti td sSsssssss ssSsehses 5 n fprintf fd 10s 40s 40s n Cycle Expected values Actual values fprintf fd 10d 40 16f 40 16f n mismatches 1 expected mismatches actual mismatches return end ok true fprintf fd Simulation OK n Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 454 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Resource Management M Hwcosim manages resources that it holds for an hardware co simulation instance It releases the held resources upon the invocation of the release instruction or when MATLAB exits However it is recommended to perform an explicit cleanup of resources when the simulation finishes or throws an error To allow proper cleanup in case of errors it is suggested to enclose M Hwcosim instructions in a MATLAB try catch block as illustrated below try M Hwcosim instructions here catch err lasterror Release any Hwcosim Shmem or Shfifo instances try release hwcosim_instance end try release shmem_instance end try release shfifo_instance end rethrow err end 1 The following commands can be used to release all hardware co simulation or shared memory instances oe xlHwcosim release Release all Hwcosim instances xlHwcosim releaseMem Release all Shmem instances
309. ional output is available when a selectable number of rows is chosen ROW_SEL_ VALID This optional output is available when a selectable number of rows is chosen BLOCK_SIZE_VALID This optional output is available when the block size is not constant that is if the block size type is either Variable or equal to Rows Columns Port Parameters 2 tab Parameters specific to the Port Parameters 2 tab are as follows Data Output Channel Options Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 196 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 e TREADY TREADY for the Data Input Channel Used by the Symbol Interleaver De interleaver to signal that it is ready to accept data e FDO Adds a data_tuser_fdo First Data Out output port e RDY Adds a data_tuser_rdy output port e BLOCK_START Adds a data_tuser_block_start output port e BLOCK_END Adds a data_tuser_block_end output port Pipelining e Pipelining Pipelines the underlying LogiCORE for Minimum Medium or Maximum performance Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Interleaver De interleaver v7 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 197 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Inverter Inverter This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Contro
310. ipeline register for port c when set to 1 e Reset port for multiplier when selected a port rst_m is made available This resets the pipeline register for the internal multiplier when set to 1 e Reset port for P when selected a port rst_p is made available This resets the output register when set to 1 Reset port for carry in when selected a port rst_carryin is made available This resets the pipeline register for carry in when set to 1 e Reset port for alumode when selected a port rst_alumode is made available This resets the pipeline register for the alumode port when set to 1 e Reset port for controls opmode and carry_in_sel when selected a port rst_ctrl is made available This resets the pipeline register for the opmode register if available and the carry_in_sel register if available when set to 1 e Reset port for d and ad e Reset port for INMODE Provide Enable Ports Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 147 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 Enable port for first a acin register when selected an enable port ce_al for the first a pipeline register is made available Enable port for second a acin register when selected an enable port ce_a2 for the second a pipeline register is made available Enable port for first b bcin register when selected an enable port ce_b1 for the first b pipeline register is made available e Enable port for
311. ister for carry in when set to 1 e Reset port for alumode when selected a port rst_alumode is made available This resets the pipeline register for the alumode port when set to 1 e Reset port for controls opmode and carry_in_sel when selected a port rst_ctrl is made available This resets the pipeline register for the opmode register if available and the carry_in_sel register if available when set to 1 Enable port for first a acin register when selected an enable port ce_al for the first a pipeline register is made available e Enable port for second a acin register when selected an enable port ce_a2 for the second a pipeline register is made available Enable port for first b bcin register when selected an enable port ce_b1 for the first b pipeline register is made available e Enable port for second b bcin register when selected an enable port ce_b2 for the second b pipeline register is made available e Enable port for c when selected an enable port ce_c for the port C register is made available Enable port for multiplier when selected an enable port ce_m for the multiplier register is made available Enable port for p when selected an enable port ce_p for the port P output register is made available Enable port for carry in when selected an enable port ce_carry_in for the carry in register is made available e Enable port for alumode when selected an enable port ce_alumode for the
312. ith System Generator www xilinx com 419 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlVersion xlVersion It is possible to have multiple versions of System Generator installed The MATLAB command x1Version displays which versions are installed and makes it possible to switch from one to another Occasionally it is necessary to restart MATLAB to make it possible to switch versions the x1Version command will instruct you to do so in these cases If you install System Generator 8 1 after you install 8 2 you need to install 8 2 again in order to make x1Version work Syntax xlVersion xlVersion ver xlVersion add directory Description A call to xl Version with no parameters will display the current version of System Generator installed and also all available versions The ver option specifies the version of System Generator to switch to The add option allows a directory to be specified The directory is expected to hold a System Generator installation The specified instance of System Generator is loaded as the current working System Generator installation See Also Real Time Signal Processing using Hardware Co Simulation Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 420 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generat Xilinx BlockAdd Xilinx Tools gt Save as blockAdd default Xilinx BlockConnect Xilinx Tools gt Terminate Xilinx View Signal Vivado Designing with Syste
313. ither the bit locations of both end points of the slice or one end point along with number of bits to be taken in the slice e Offset of top bit specifies the offset for the ending bit position from the LSB MSB or binary point e Offset of bottom bit specifies the offset for the ending bit position from the LSB MSB or binary point Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 289 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Slice e Relative to specifies the bit slice position relative to the Most Significant Bit MSB Least Significant Bit LSB or Binary point of the top or the bottom of the slice Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 290 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX SquareRoot SquareRoot This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx SquareRoot block performs the square root on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Square Root Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Flow Control e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data i
314. itly for floating point constants All values must be scalar arrays are not supported Functions that return xfix properties xl_nbits Returns number of bits xl_binpt Returns binary point position xl_arith Returns arithmetic type Bit wise logical functions xl_and Bit wise and xl_or Bit wise or xl_xor Bit wise xor xl_not Bit wise not Shift functions x1_1sh and x1_rsh Slice function x1_slice Concatenate function x1_concat Reinterpret function x1_force Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 204 XILINX MCode Internal state variables x1_state MATLAB Functions disp Displays variable values error Displays message and abort function isnan Tests whether a number is NaN NaNQ Returns Not a Number num2str Converts a number to string ones 1 N Returns 1 by N vector of ones pi Returns pi zeros 1 N Returns 1 by N vector of zeros Data Types There are three kinds of xfix data types unsigned fixed point x1Unsignead signed fixed point x1Signed and boolean x1Boolean Arithmetic operations on these data types produce signed and unsigned fixed point values Relational operators produce a boolean result Relational operands can be any xfix type provided the mixture of types makes sense Boolean variables can be compared to boolean
315. ivado HLS block allows the functionality of a Vivado HLS design to be and System C design sources Vivado HLS There are two steps to the method of including a Vivado HLS design into System Generator The first step is to use the Vivado HLS RTL Packaging feature to package the design files into a Solution directory Refer to Vivado HLS documentation for more information regarding RTL Packaging The second step is to place the Vivado HLS block in your System Generator design and specify the Vivado HDL Solution directory as the target Block Parameters Dialog Box 3 Vivado HLS Xilinx High Level Synthesis o amp 53 This block allows induding C C and SystemC source files in System Generator for DSP designs Solution autoesl_packages fir solution 1 Browse Refresh Edt Display signal types x J cae j Hep aw e Solution The path to the Solution space directory containing RTL packaged for System Generator This path is usually the path to a directory contained in a Vivado HLS project The path must be included in single quotes and must evaluate to a string e Browse A standard directory browse button e Refresh Updates the block ports to the latest package contained in the solution space e Edit Opens the Vivado HLS project associated with Solution space e Display signal types Signal types to be used to drive input ports and emanating from output ports are displayed on the block icon when c
316. iven priority over the input data port for example on each successive cycle the addressed data value is read from the register and driven to the output before the shift operation occurs This order is needed in the Simulink software model to guarantee one clock cycle of latency between the data port and the first register of the delay chain If the shift operation were to come first followed by the read then there would be no delay and the hardware would be incorrect Block Interface The block interface inputs and outputs as seen on the Addressable Shift Register icon are as follows Input Signals d data input addr address en enable signal optional Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 49 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Addressable Shift Register Output Signals q data output Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to this block are as follows e Infer maximum latency depth using address port width you can choose to allow the block to automatically determine the depth or maximum latency of the shift register based on the bit width of the address port e Maximum latency depth in the case that the maximum latency is not inferred previous option the maximum latency can be set explicitly Initial value vector specifies the initial register values When the vector
317. ividend_TLAST Pass the value of the dividend_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port o Pass Divsor_TLAST Pass the value of the divisor_tlast input port to the dout_tlast output port o OR_all_TLASTS Pass the logical OR of all the present TLAST input ports o AND_all_TLASTS Pass the logical AND of all the present TLAST input ports Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Divider Generator 4 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 127 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Down Sample Down Sample This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements and Index The Xilinx Down Sample block reduces the sample rate at the point where the block is dz placed in your design Down Sample The input signal is sampled at even intervals at either the beginning first value or end last value of a frame The sampled value is presented on the output port and held until the next sample is taken A Down Sample frame consists of input samples where is sampling rate An example frame for a Down Sample block configured with a sampling rate of 4 is shown below First Value in Frame L Last Value in Frame PA FRAME CLK TLUU UU uo The Down Sample block is realized in hardware using one of three possible implementations that vary in terms of imple
318. ization of Blockset Libraries Block Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 Description The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Viterbi Decoder 8 0 Data encoded with a convolution encoder can be decoded using the Xilinx Viterbi decoder block This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Basic Element Blocks Table 1 2 Basic Element Blocks Block Absolute Description The Xilinx Absolute block outputs the absolute value of the input Addressable Shift Register The Xilinx Addressable Shift Register block is a variable length shift register in which any register in the delay chain can be addressed and driven onto the output data port Assert The Xilinx Assert block is used to assert a rate and or a type on a signal This block has no cost in hardware and can be used to resolve rates and or types in situations where designer intervention is required BitBasher The Xilinx BitBasher block performs slicing concatenation and augmentation of inputs attached to the block Black Box The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate hardware description language HDL models into System Generator Clock Enable Probe The Xilinx Clock Enable CE Probe provides a mechanism for extracting derived clock enable
319. k inputs and outputs must be of Xilinx fixed point type e The block must have at least one output port e The code for the block must exist on the MATLAB path or in the same directory as the directory as the model that uses the block The topic Compiling MATLAB into an FPGAshows three examples of functions for the MCode block The first example also described below consists of a function x1max which returns the maximum of its inputs The second illustrates how to do simple arithmetic The third shows how to build a finite state machine Configuring an MCode Block The MATLAB Function parameter of an MCode block specifies the name of the block s M code function This function must exist in one of the three locations at the time this parameter is set The three possible locations are e The directory where the model file is located e A subdirectory of the model directory named private e Adirectory in the MATLAB path The block icon displays the name of the M function To illustrate these ideas consider the file xlmax m containing function x1max function z xlmax x y if x gt y Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 202 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode Z Ei else z Y end An MCode block based on the function x1max will have input ports x and y and output port z The following figure shows how to set up an MCode block to use function x1max MCode Xilinx Code Block
320. k system period is the greatest common divisor of the sample periods that appear in the model These sample periods are set explicitly in the block dialog boxes inherited according to Simulink propagation rules or implied by a hardware oversampling rate in blocks with this option In the latter case the implied sample time is in fact faster than the observable simulation sample time for the block in Simulink In hardware a block having an oversampling rate greater than one processes its inputs at a faster rate than the data For example a sequential multiplier block with an over sampling rate of eight implies a Simulink sample period that is one eighth of the multiplier block s actual sample time in Simulink This parameter can be modified only in a master block General tab Parameters specific to the General tab are as follows e Block icon display Specifies the type of information to be displayed on each block icon in the model after compilation is complete The various display options are described below o Default Displays the default block icon information on each block in the model A blocks s default icon is derived from the xbsIndex library E design_examplefsub1 Ae Edt Yew Simulation Format Took Hep D amp h amp n b 100 Mormel 7 Sa Ae ROT System Generator e Normalized Sample Periods Displays the normalized sample periods for all the input and output ports on each block For example if the Simulink System P
321. k that occur during Simulink simulation are logged as a logic vector in a data file During HDL simulation an entity that is inserted in the top level testbench checks this vector and the corresponding vectors produced by Gateway Out blocks against expected results e Naming the corresponding port in the top level HDL entity Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic Tab Parameters specific to the Basic Tab are as follows Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 179 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Gateway In Output Precision Specifies the output data type Can be Boolean Fixed point or Floating point Arithmetic Type If the Output Type is specified as Fixed point you can select Signed 2 s comp or Unsigned as the Arithmetic Type Fixed point Precision e Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point where bit zero is the least significant bit gt Binary point specifies the bit location of the binary point where bit zero is the least significant bit Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Fraction width Specify the fraction width Quantization Quantization erro
322. kbox ensures the glbl v module is compiled and invoked during simulation Add custom scripts The term script refers to a Tcl macro file DO file executed by ModelSim Selecting this checkbox activates the fields Script to Run Before Starting Compilation Script to Run in Place of vsim and Script to Run after vsim The DO file scripts named in these fields are not run unless this checkbox is selected Script to run before starting compilation Enter the name of a Tcl macro file DO file that is to be executed by ModelSim before compiling black box HDL files Note For information on how to write a ModelSim macro file DO file refer to the Chapter in the ModelSim User s Manual titled Tcl and macros DO files Script to run in place of vsim ModelSim uses Tcl tool command language as the scripting language for controlling and extending the tool Enter the name of a ModelSim Tcl macro file DO file that is to be executed by the ModelSim do command at the point when System Generator would ordinarily instruct ModelSim to begin a simulation To start the simulation after the macro file starts executing you must place a vsim command inside the macro file Normally if this parameter is left blank or Add custom scripts is not selected then System Generator instructs ModelSim to execute the default command vsim toplevel title System Generator Co Simulation from block blockname Here toplevel is the name Vivado Designing wi
323. ke ONE ad Wee aa a ae Eaa a 360 QUIPUE ara ad as oh os ae S ee S 360 A AN 361 Malla ia dia iaa dat 361 Demonstrationsin is ia a A a AA a inthis 361 Hardware Co Simulation Example oocoocococono ee ee nen eee ee nen e nent eens 361 Retenes adas 362 n tap Dual Port Memory MAC FIR Filter oo oooooooocooncooncrrrsorsrononsss 363 Block Parameters iss ici sd sce a caub ade tema eve eneleloceeal iia 363 RETO FENCE 3 secs ioe e seb dideke Rate ach wills ot Baio wins eh dicted BAG OE ACA AR Sl i tedden deh 8 ben dee wes 363 n tap MAC FIR Filter o s 02 seis terikut we AA AA See dae 364 Block Parameter sota tato is s 364 RETErENCE cd co cs ce see ds cb Dahan lc sn Tad ad ak weenie ons 364 Registered Mealy State Machine 0 ccc cece cece c eect eee cent eee e eee eeeeeeees 365 EX a eR een mm aan A ee gO ae eee 366 BlOCK Parameters ccrirorii thn idee ead nd diia 367 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 10 XILINX Registered Moore State Machine 0 ccc cece ccc cece cece caco 368 Example tn Sst cee Pa AS A A AA mene Marte 369 Block Parameters sessin diia 370 Virtex Line BUE chive cise si seen ata ws aoe Re ti ae we a eas as 372 Block Parameters crorer sinere dree A E Mice Ws A Weg rai 372 Virtex2 Line Butter 0 00 cred eh Sek eee hank see ae ee AA eda we eae 373 BlOCkPAraMeters miii oe Mi suse os 373 Virtex2 5 Line Buffer o oomoososms
324. king the icon in your Simulink model The next state logic state register and output logic are implemented using high speed dedicated block RAM The output logic is implemented using a distributed RAM configured as a lookup table and therefore has zero latency The number of bits used to implement a Mealy state machine is given by the equations depth 2k 2i 2k i width k o N depth width k 0 2K i where N total number of block RAM bits number of states n K ceil log2 s i number of input bits o number of output bits The following table gives examples of block RAM sizes necessary for various state machines Number of States ee Input Sint Bre ae e ain 2 5 10 704 4 1 2 32 8 6 7 5120 16 5 4 4096 32 4 3 4096 52 1 11 2176 100 4 5 24576 The block RAM width and depth limitations are described in the online help for the Single Port RAM block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 350 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Moore State Machine Moore State Machine A Moore machine is a finite state machine whose output is only a Curl function of the machine s current state A Moore state machine can be In puts described with the following block diagram Outputs Moore State Machine Inputs p Outputs There are many ways to implement such state machines in System Generator e g using the MCode block to imple
325. ks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Interface The CIC Block has a single data input port and a data output port e xn data input port can be between 1 and 128 bits inclusive e yn data output port The two basic building blocks of a CIC filter are the integrator and the comb A single integrator is a single pole IIR filter with a transfer function of H z 1 z71y1 The integrator s unity feedback coefficient is y n y n 1 x n A single comb filter is an odd symmetric FIR filter described by y n x n x n RM M is the differential delay selected in the block dialog box and R is the selected integer rate change factor The transfer function for a single comb stage is H z 1 z RM As seen in the two figures below the CIC filter cascades N integrator sections together with N comb sections To keep the integrator and comb structures independent of rate change a rate change block for example an up sampler or down sampler is inserted between the sections In the interpolator the up sampler causes a rate increase by a factor of R by inserting R 1 zero valued samples between consecutive samples of the comb section Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 331 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CIC Filter output In the decimator the down sampler reduces the sample rate by a factor of R by taking subsamples of the output from the last integrator stage
326. l Logic Math and Index The Xilinx Inverter block calculates the bitwise logical complement of a fixed point ES number The block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module Inverter Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 198 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX LFSR LFSR This block ts listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements DSP Memory and Index The Xilinx LFSR block implements a Linear Feedback Shift Register LFSR This in aut block supports both the Galois and Fibonacci structures using either the XOR load or XNOR gate and allows a re loadable input to change the current value of the register at any time The LFSR output and re loadable input can be configured as either serial or parallel ports LFSR LFSR Block Interface Port Name Port Description Port Type din Data input for re loadable seed Optional serial or parallel input load Load signal for din Optional boolean input rst Reset signal Optional boolean input en Enable signal Optional boolean input dout Data output of LFSR Required serial or parallel output As shown in the table above there can be between 0 and 4 block input ports and exactly on
327. l block takes a series of inputs of any size and creates a single output of a specified multiple of that size The input series can be ordered either with the most significant word first or the least significant word first Shift The Xilinx Shift block performs a left or right shift on the input signal The result will have the same fixed point container as that of the input Slice The Xilinx Slice block allows you to slice off a sequence of bits from your input data and create a new data value This value is presented as the output from the block The output data type is unsigned with its binary point at zero DSP Blocks Table 1 6 DSP Blocks DSP Block Description CIC Compiler 3 0 The Xilinx CIC Compiler provides the ability to design and implement AXI4 Stream compliant Cascaded Integrator Comb CIC filters for a variety of Xilinx FPGA devices Complex Multiplier 5 0 The Complex Multiplier 5 0 block implements AXI4 Stream compliant high performance optimized complex multipliers for devices based on user specified options CORDIC 5 0 The Xilinx CORDIC 5 0 block implements a generalized coordinate rotational digital computer CORDIC algorithm and is AXI compliant DDS Compiler 5 0 The Xilinx DDS Direct Digital Synthesizer Compiler 5 0 block implements high performance optimized Phase Generation and Phase to Sinusoid circuits with AXI4 Stream compliant interfaces for supported devices Div
328. l configuration packets are consumed every processing cycle of the block o On_Packet Further qualifies the consumption of configuration packets Packets will only be consumed once the block has received a transaction on the s_axis_data channel where s_axis_data_tlast has been asserted e Configuration Method e Single A single coefficient set is used to process all interleaved data channels e By_Channel A unique coefficient set is specified for each interleaved data channel Reload Channel Options e Num reload slots Specifies the number of coefficient sets that can be loaded in advance Reloaded coefficients are only applied to the block once the configuration packet has been consumed Range 1 to 256 Control Options e ACLKEN Active high clock enable Available for MAC based FIR implementations e ARESETn active low Active low synchronous clear input that always takes priority over ACLKEN A minimum ARESETn active pulse of two cycles is required since the signal is internally registered for performance A pulse of one cycle resets the core but the response to the pulse is not in the cycle immediately following Advanced tab Block Icon Display Display shortened port names On by default When unchecked data_tvalid for example becomes m_axis_data_tvalid Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx
329. l features of the Xilinx block This includes access to the layout rerouting functions and to functions that return selected blocks and lines Syntax xlTBUtils function args e g xlTBUtils ToolBar xlTBUtils Layout struct verbose 1 autoroute 0 xlTBUtils Layout optionStruct xlTBUtils Redrawlines struct autoroute 0 xlTBUtils RedrawLines optionStruct lines blks x1TBUtils GetSelected A11 Description xITBUtils function args xITBUtils is a collection of functions that are used by the Xilinx Toolbar block The function argument specifies the name of the function to execute Further arguments if required can be tagged on as supplementary arguments to the function call Note that the function argument string is not case sensitive Possible values are enumerated below and explained further in the relevant subtopics Function Description ToolBar Launches the Xilinx Toolbar GUI If the GUI is already open it is brought to the front Layout Runs the layout algorithm on a model to place and reroute lines on the model Layout can be customized using the option structure that is detailed below RedrawLines Runs the routing algorithm on a model to reroute lines on the model RedrawLines can be customized using the option structure detailed below GetSelected Returns MATLAB Simulink handles to blocks and lines that are selected on the system in focus
330. l from the list fr gt gt integrate P Current Hierarchy Signals Selected Signals Delay1 Outl Noise Outl Wave Outl Delay2 Outl Constant Outl Delay Outl Double Click IntOut Outl Register O SigOut Outl Mult Outl Gain Outl RepeatingSequencelnterpolated Outl RandomNumber Outl y E 5 E AN 4 Click OK to confirm the selection and the selected signals will be highlighted H E File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help DISUSE teles T 2S ajo om aaam Basic Integrator Example c Copyright 1995 2012 Xilinx Inc All rights reserved Double Click for Copyright Notice 1100 f f lode Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 431 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx View Signal View Signals in the Waveform Viewer To view the added signals in the waveform viewer you need to run a simulation to generate the simulation data Click on the simulation button to simulate the design BW integrate File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Dees Nomal De BEE After the simulation is finished the generated waveform data is displayed the waveform viewer 54 Waveform Status C 5 Waveform Status ll ES Generating Waveform Data ve Launching Waveform Viewer Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 432 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx V
331. l when you select Info on the Optional Pins tab The signal marks the last information symbol of a block on tdata_data_out output_tdata_data_del Added to the channel when you select Original Delayed Data on the Optional Pins tab The signal marks the last information symbol of a block on tdata_data_out stat Channel stat_tready TREADY for the stat channel stat_tvalid TVALID for the stat channel You should tie this signal high if the downstream slave is always able to accept data or if the stat channel is not used stat_tdata_err_cnt presents a value at the time data_out presents the last symbol of the block The value is the number of errors that were corrected err_cnt must have type UFIX_b_0 where b is the number of bits needed to represent n k Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 258 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 e stat_tdata_err_found presents a value at the time output_tdata_data_out presents the last symbol of the block The value 1 if the decoder detected any errors or erasures during decoding err_found must have type UFIX_1_0 e stat_tdata_fail presents a value at the time output_tdata_data_out presents the last symbol of the block The value is 1 if the decoder was unable to recover the information symbols and 0 otherwise This signal must be of type UFIX_1_0 e stat_tdata_erase_cnt only available when erasure decoding is enabled Presents a value at th
332. le clicking the icon in your Simulink model The only parameter that is specific to the Scale block is Scale factor s It can be a positive or negative integer The output of the block is i 2 k where i is the input value and k is the scale factor The effect of scaling is to move the binary point which in hardware has no cost a shift on the other hand might add logic Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCore The Scale block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 279 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Serial to Parallel Serial to Parallel This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Data Types and Index The Serial to Parallel block takes a series of inputs of any size and creates a single output of a specified multiple of that size The input series can be ordered either with the most significant word first or the least significant word first Serial to Parallel The following waveform illustrates the block s behavior Dout 0101 1011 Din mputeik J11_f21 131 J 4L 1L f2l fal f L L_f2 Output CLK This example illustrates the case where the input width is 1 output width is 4 word size is 1 bit and the block is configured for most significant word first Block Interface The Serial to Parallel block has one input
333. le in the following function is mapped into a single port ROM function q addrsr contents addr arith nbits binpt proto arith nbits binpt persistent mem mem xl_state contents proto q mem addr Single Port RAM The state variable in the following function is mapped to a single port RAM in fabric Distributed RAM function dout ram addr we din depth nbits binpt proto xlSigned nbits binpt persistent mem mem xl_state zeros 1 depth proto dout mem addr if we mem addr din end The state variable in the following function is mapped to BlockRAM as a single port RAM function dout ram addr we din depth nbits binpt ram_enable proto xlSigned nbits binpt persistent mem mem xl_state zeros 1 depth proto persistent dout_temp dout_temp xl_state 0 proto dout dout_temp dout_temp mem addr if we mem addr din end MATLAB Functions disp Displays the expression value In order to see the printing on the MATLAB console the option Enable printing with disp must be checked on the Advanced tab of the MCode block parameters dialog box The argument can be a string an x ix number or an MCode state variable If the argument is an x ix number it will print the type binary value and double precision value For example if variable x is assigned with xfix xlSigned 10 7 2 75 the disp x will print the following line type Fix_10_7 binary 010 1100
334. le provide a means to increase or decrease sample rates Specify Explicit Sample Period If you select Specify explicit sample period rather than the default you can set the sample period required for all the block outputs This is useful when implementing features such as feedback loops in your design In a feedback loop it is not possible for System Generator to determine a default sample rate because the loop makes an input sample rate depend on a yet to be determined output sample rate System Generator under these circumstances requires you to supply a hint to establish sample periods throughout a loop Use Behavioral HDL otherwise use core When this checkbox is checked the behavioral HDL generated by the M code simulation is used instead of the structural HDL from the cores The M code simulation creates the C simulation and this C simulation creates behavioral HDL When this option is selected it is this behavioral HDL that is used for further synthesis Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 41 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes When this option is not selected the structural HDL generated from the cores and HDL templates corresponding to each of the blocks in the model is used instead for synthesis Cores are generated for each block in a design once and cached for future netlisting This capability ensures the fastest possible netlist generation
335. lement of a fixed point number The block is implemented as a synthesizable VHDL module Logical The Xilinx Logical block performs bitwise logical operations on fixed point numbers Operands are zero padded and sign extended as necessary to make binary point positions coincide then the logical operation is performed and the result is delivered at the output port MCode The Xilinx MCode block is a container for executing a user supplied MATLAB function within Simulink A parameter on the block specifies the M function name The block executes the M code to calculate block outputs during a Simulink simulation The same code is translated in a straightforward way into equivalent behavioral VHDL Verilog when hardware is generated The Xilinx Mux block implements a multiplexer The block has one select input type unsigned and a user configurable number of data bus inputs ranging from 2 to 1024 PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller The Xilinx PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller block implements an 8 bit microcontroller Register The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Relational The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator ROM The Xilinx ROM block is a single port read only memory ROM Shift The Xilinx Shift block performs a left or right shift on the input signal The result will have the same fixed point container as that of the input Singl
336. level script The argument can also be a model By default the generated M function file is named after the name of the subsystem with white spaces replaced with underscores Once the xlsub2script finishes a help message will guide you how to use the generated script The main purpose of this x1sub2script function is to make learning Sysgen Script easier This is also a nice utility that allows you to construct a subsystem using graphic means and then convert the subsystem to a PG API M function xlsub2script block where block is a leaf block prints out the xBlock call that creates the block The following are the limitations of xlsub2script e If the subsystem has mask initialization code that contains function calls such as gcb set_param get_param add_block and so on the function will error out and you must modify the mask initialization code to remove those Simulink calls e If there is an access to global variables inside the subsystem you need add corresponding mask parameters to the top subsystem that you run the xlsub2script e If a block s link is broken that block is skipped xlsub2script can also be invoked as the following xlsub2script subsyste options where options is a MATLAB struct The options struct can have two fields forcewrite and basevars If xlsub2script is invoked for the same subsystem the second time x1sub2script will try to overwrite the existing M function file By default xlsub2script will po
337. level xBlock as the following config source str2func MACC_sub config toplevel gcb config debug 1 xBlock config latency nbits By setting the debug field of the configuration struct to be 1 you re running the PG API in debug mode where every action will trigger an auto layout Caching Tip Most often you only want to re generate the subsystem if needed The xBlock constructor has a caching mechanism You can specify the list of dependent files in a cell array and set the depend field of the toplevel configuration with this list If any file in the depend list is changed or the argument list that passed to the toplevel function is changed the subsystem is re generated If you want to have the caching capability for the MACC_sub invoke the toplevel xBlock as the following config source str2func MACC_sub config toplevel gcb config depend MACC_sub m xBlock config latency nbits The depend field of the configuration struct is a cell array Each element of the array is a file name You can put a p file name or an M file name You can also put a name without a suffix The xBlock will use the first in the path Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 446 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PG API Error Warning Handling amp Messages xBlock Error Messages PG API Error Warning Handling amp Messages Condition When calling xBlock NoSubSourceBlock
338. lier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 326 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 5x5Filter 5x5Filter The Xilinx 5x5 Filter reference block is implemented using 5 n tap MAC FIR Filters The filters can be found in the DSP library of the Xilinx Reference Blockset Nine different 2 D filters have been provided to filter grayscale images The filter can be selected by changing the mask parameter on the 5x5 Filter block 5S Filter The 2 D filter coefficients are stored in a block RAM and the model makes no specific optimizations for these coefficients You can substitute your own coefficients and scale factor by modifying the mask of the 5x5 filter block under the Initialization tab The coefficients used are shown below for the 9 filters The output of the filter is multiplied by the scale factor named lt filter name gt Div edge 0 0 0 00 O 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 00 edgeDiv 1 sobelX 0 0 0 00 0 1 0 10 0 2 0 20 0 1 O 10 0 0 0 00 sobelXDiv 1 sobelY 0 0 0 00 O TZ Lo 0 0 0 00 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 00 sobelYDiv 1 sobelXY 0 0 0 00 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 O 2 1 005 0 0 0 00 sobelXYDiv 1 blur 1 2 2 11 1 0 0 01 1 0 0 01 L O 0 OTe aas Lo Le T A Els blurDiv 1 16 smooth 1 1 1 1 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx co
339. lign binary points automatically If not selected all inputs must have the same binary point position Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCORE This block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 201 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode MCode This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Math and Index The Xilinx MCode block is a container for executing a user supplied MATLAB function within Simulink A parameter on the block specifies the M function name The block executes the M code to calculate block outputs during a Simulink simulation The same code is translated in a straightforward way into equivalent behavioral VHDL Verilog when hardware is generated 7 MCode The block s Simulink interface is derived from the MATLAB function signature and from block mask parameters There is one input port for each parameter to the function and one output port for each value the function returns Port names and ordering correspond to the names and ordering of parameters and return values The MCode block supports a limited subset of the MATLAB language that is useful for implementing arithmetic functions finite state machines and control logic The MCode block has the following three primary coding guidelines that must be followed e All bloc
340. listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Communication and Index The Xilinx Depuncture block allows you to insert an arbitrary symbol into your input ePUAP data at the location specified by the depuncture code Depuneture The Xilinx depuncture block accepts data of type UFixN_0 where N equals the length of insert string x the number of ones in the depuncture code and produces output data of type UFixK_0 where K equals the length of insert string multiplied by the length of the depuncture code The Xilinx Depuncture block can be used to decode a range of punctured convolution codes The following diagram illustrates an application of this block to implement soft decision Viterbi decoding of punctured convolution codes EJ punctured_viterbi_decoder File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help DSBS HB gt Normal T4848 al ES Example for Implementing Punctured Soft Decision Decoding using Viterbi Decoder extract_erasure na Depuncture Code 0 1 0 1 Insert Symbol 0001 y UFix_3_0 UFix_4 0 a UFix_8_0 UFix_12_0 UFix 4 0 podata erase add_erasure Serial to Parallel Depuncture Parallel to Serial erase data UFix_3_0 Depuncture Code 0 1 10 Insert Symbol 0001 UFix_3_0 data_erase Q data data_erase add_erasurel Serial to Parallel Depuncturet Parallel to Serial1 erase Matched extract_erasurel Filter Viterbit Data Sink 5 punctured_viterbi_decoder add_erasu
341. lk NET Dout 2 OFFSET OUT 10 0 AFTER clk If Data Rate Set FAST Attribute is selected the OFFSET OUT constraints described above are produced In addition a FAST slew rate attribute is generated for each IOB This reduces delay but increases noise and power consumption For the previous example the following additional attributes are added to the constraints file Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 183 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Gateway Out NET Dout 0 FAST NET Dout 1 FAST NET Dout 2 FAST e Specify IOB Location Constraints Checking this option allows IOB location constraints to be specified e IOB Pad Locations e g MSB LSB IOB pin locations can be specified as a cell array of strings in this edit box The locations are package specific Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 184 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Indeterminate Probe Indeterminate Probe This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The output of the Xilinx Indeterminate Probe indicates whether the input data is indeterminate MATLAB value NaN An indeterminate data value corresponds to a VHDL indeterminate logic data value of X The probe accepts any Xilinx signal as input
342. ll in natural order Cyclic prefix insertion is only available when output ordering is Natural Order When cyclic prefix insertion is used the length of the cyclic prefix can be set frame by frame without interrupting frame processing The cyclic prefix length can be any number of samples from zero to one less than the point size The cyclic prefix length is set by the CP_LEN field in the Configuration channel For example when N 1024 the cyclic prefix length can be from 0 to 1023 samples and a CP_LEN value of 0010010110 produces a cyclic prefix consisting of the last 150 samples of the output data e Output ordering choose between Bit Digit Reversed Order or Natural Order output Throttle Schemes Select the trade off between performance and data timing requirements e Real Time This mode typically gives a smaller and faster design but has strict constraints on when data must be provided and consumed e Non Real Time This mode has no such constraints but the design might be larger and slower Optional Output Fields e XK_INDEX The XK_INDEX field if present in the Data Output channel gives the sample number of the XK_RE XK_IM data being presented at the same time In the case of natural order outputs XK_INDEX increments from 0 to point size 1 When bit reversed outputs are used XK_INDEX covers the same range of numbers but in a bit or digit reversed manner e OVFLO The Overflow OVFLO field in the Data Output and Stat
343. llection of functions used by the Toolbar x1TBUtils Toolbar Only one Toolbar GUI can be opened at a time that is the Toolbar GUI is a singleton Regardless of where a Toolbar block is placed the Toolbar will always perform actions on the current Simulink model in focus In other words if the Toolbar is invoked from model A it can still be used on model B so long as model B is in focus Toolbar Buttons Toolbar Descriptions Buttons P Undo Cancels the most recent change applied to the model layout by x7 the Toolbar and reverts the layout state to the one prior to this change Can undo up to three changes Reroute Reroutes lines to enhance model readability 3 If lines are selected only those lines are rerouted Otherwise all lines in the model are rerouted Auto Layout Relocates blocks and reroutes lines to enhance model readability pS Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 303 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Toolbar Descriptions Buttons P Add Terms Calls on the xlAddTerms function to add sources and sinks a to the current model in focus System Generator blocks are sourced with a System Generator constant block while Simulink blocks are sourced with a Simulink constant block Terminators are used as sinks Help Opens this document Zoom Allows you to get either a closer view of a portion of the Simulink model or a wider view of
344. lockset The CORDIC ATAN algorithm is implemented in the following 3 steps 1 Coarse Angle Rotation The algorithm converges only for angles between pi 2 and pi 2 so if x lt zero the input vector is reflected to the 1st or 3rd quadrant by making the x coordinate non negative 2 Fine Angle Rotation For rectangular to polar conversion the resulting vector is rotated through progressively smaller angles such that y goes to zero In the i th stage the angular rotation is by either atan 1 2 depending on whether or not its input y is less than or greater than zero 3 Angle Correction If there was a reflection applied in Step 1 this step applies the appropriate angle correction by subtracting it from pi Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Number of Processing Elements specifies the number of iterative stages used for fine angle rotation e X Y Data Width specifies the width of the inputs x and y The inputs x and y should be signed data type having the same data width X Y Binary Point Position specifies the binary point position for inputs x and y The inputs x and y should be signed data type with the same binary point position e Latency for each Processing element This parameter sets the pipeline latency after each circular rotation stage The latency of the CO
345. loon Parerneters Infllaltzstlon Dacumertation Dialog variables riritilization caramanda latency config source atr2func NACC_sub rbts config toplevel grb xBlock config latency nbits HAlow librery Hock te modify tts contents Alternatively you can use the MATLAB struct call to create the toplevel configuration xBlock struct source str2func MACC_sub toplevel gcb latency nbits Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 444 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PG API Examples Then click OK You ll get the following subsystem h untitled Ele Edt Wew Simulacion Format Tods Heb Die S S Sot p gt m foo Noma 4 Set the mask parameters as shown in the following figure then click OK E Function Block Parameters Subsystem Subsystem mazk Perameteis Lalency 2 Number ol bils 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 445 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PG API Examples The following diagram is generated 7 untitled Subsystem DE Ble Ede wew simulaci n Forma Jods Heb D eg 10 0 Noma Sey Bh Accumulator Delap1 Debugging Tip Open MACC_sub m in the MATLAB editor to debug the function By default the xBlock constructor will do an auto layout in the end If you want to see the auto layout every time a block is added invoke the top
346. ltipath Fading Channel Model The channel coefficient matrix can be further defined in terms of the spatial covariance matrices of the antenna arrays H nT Rt Hu y nT R Where e Ry Transmit array spatial covariance matrix for path k Hyl Un correlated channel coefficient matrix for path k Mpx Mr elements time varying Rex Receive array spatial covariance matrix for path k Implementation The above equations can be rephrased as sparse matrix operations This allows the elimination of the path summation The model can then be implemented as follows Input R Delay Line Multiply Fading Coefficients Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Paths tab Parameters specific to the Paths tab are as follows e Path Delay Vector Specify the delay spread for each path in the model Each element represents the number of samples to delay the path by The value must be an N element vector e Path Gain Vector Specify the gain for each path in the model Each element represents the linear gain of the path The value must be an N element vector Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 356 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model Covariance tab To support frequency selective channels N gt 1 these parameters can be specified as three dimensional arrays The first tw
347. ltipath Fading Channel Model block implements a model of sua a fading communication channel The model supports both Single Input Single Output SISO and Multiple Input Multiple Output nea ee MIMO channels The model provides functionality similar to the PAT l Simulink Multipath Rayleigh Fading Channel block in a hardware realizable form This enables high speed hardware co simulation of outlieimb entire communication links Multipath Fading Channel Modal Theory The block implements the Kronecker model This model is suitable for systems with antenna arrays not exceeding four elements The primary model parameters are e MT The number of antennas in the transmit array For SISO systems this is 1 e MR The number of antennas in the receive array For SISO systems this is 1 e N The number of discrete paths between the arrays For frequency flat channels this is 1 The model can be represented by the discrete time equation int inTir anT d yini gt 2H 11 X t a_ 4 gt Where e x Transmit symbol column vector MT complex elements time varying e T Sample interval e n Sample index e d Delay for path k e H Channel coefficient matrix MRx MT complex elements time varying e g Gain for path k y Receive symbol column vector MR complex elements time varying Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 355 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mu
348. lver xlfda_denominator xlfda_numerator xlGenerateButton xlgetparam and xlsetparam xlgetparams xlGetReloadOrder xITBUtils xlTimingAnalysis xlUpdateModel xIVDMACreateProject xlVersion Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Automatically adds sinks and sources to System Generator models Used to manage the System Generator caches Configures the Simulink solver settings of a model to provide optimal performance during System Generator simulation Returns the denominator of the filter object in an FDATool block Returns the numerator of the filter object in an FDATool block Provides a programmatic way to invoke the System Generator code generator Used to get and set parameter values ina System Generator block Used to get all parameter values in a System Generator block The xlGetReloadOrder function obtains the reload order of the FIR Compiler block versions 5 0 and greater Provides access to several useful procedures available to the Xilinx Toolbar block such as layout redrawlines and getselected Launches the System Generator Timing Analyzer with the specified timing data Manages System Generator versions Takes a System Generator design with a VDMA Interface block and creates an ISE project with a top level module that stitches the System Generator design with an XPS sub module that instantiates the actual VDMA AXI interconnect and MIG IP
349. m 327 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 5x5Filter L gt 5 al 1 5 44 5 de tS 4 0 Le E Li il smoothDiv 1 100 sharpen 0 0 0 0O 0 0 2 2 2 0 0 2 32 2 0 0 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 00 sharpenDiv 1 16 gaussian 1 1 2 1 1 124241 4 248 4 2 1242 1 141 2 1 11 identity 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 O 0 0 03 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 identityDiv 1 This filter occupies 309 slices 5 dedicated multipliers and 5 block rams of a Xilinx xc2v250 6 part and operates at 213 MHz advanced speeds files 1 96 ISE 4 2 01i software The underlying 5 tap MAC FIR filters are clocked 5 times faster than the input rate Therefore the throughput of the design is 213 MHz 5 42 6 million pixels second For a 64x64 image this is 42 6x1016 64x64 10 400 frames sec For a 256x256 image the throughput would be 650 frames sec and for a 512x512 image it would be 162 frames sec Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e 5x5 Mask The coefficients for an Edge Sobel X Sobel Y Sobel X Y Blur Smooth Sharpen Gaussian or Identity filter can be selected e Sample Period The sample period at which the input signal runs at is required Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 328 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX BPSK AWGN C
350. m Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 or GUI Utilities Facilitates the rapid addition of Xilinx blocks and a limited set of Simulink blocks to a Simulink model Facilitates the rapid addition of pre configured Xilinx blocks to a Simulink model This feature allows you to pre configure a block then add multiple copies of the pre configured block using the BlockAdd feature Facilitates the rapid connection of blocks in a Simulink model Facilitates the rapid addition of Simulink terminator blocks on open output ports and or Xilinx Constant Blocks on open input ports Allows you to generate a waveform diagram of selected signals after a Simulink simulation is run www xilinx com Chapter 5 421 XILINX Xilinx BlockAdd Xilinx BlockAdd Facilitates the rapid addition of Xilinx blocks and a limited set of Simulink blocks to a Simulink model How to Invoke Method 1 Right click on the Simulink canvas and select Xilinx BlockAdd Method 2 Execute the short cut Ctrl 1 one Method 3 From the Simulink model pull down menu select the following item Tools gt Xilinx gt BlockAdd Ctrl 1 How to Use Right click on the Simulink canvas and select Xilinx BlockAdd untitled of x d ion Format Tools Help Ble gt 22 Xilinx Block Add mb loc Bejpigiaece Xilinx Tools gt Bening Right click on the Simulink canvas and select Xilinx BlockAdd
351. m clock is connected JTAG Options System Generator needs to know several things about the FPGA board s JTAG chain to be able to program the FPGA for hardware co simulation If you are unsure of the specifications of your board please refer to the manufacturer s documentation The fields specific to JTAG Options are described below Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 404 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlInstallPlugin e Boundary Scan Position Specifies the position of the target FPGA on the JTAG chain This value should be indexed from 1 e g the first device in the chain has an index of 1 the second device has an index of 2 etc IR Lengths Specifies the lengths of the instruction registers for all of the devices on the JTAG chain This list can be delimited by spaces commas or semicolons e Detect This action attempts to identify the IR Lengths automatically by querying the FPGA board The board must be powered and connected to a Parallel Cable IV for this to function properly Any unknown devices on the JTAG chain are represented with a 2 in the list and must be specified manually Targetable Devices This table displays a list of available FPGAs on the board for programming This is not a description of all of the devices on the JTAG chain but rather a description of the possible devices that can exist at the aforementioned boundary scan position For most boards only one device needs
352. m_axis_data_tuser_fdo Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 191 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 Represents the FDO field of the Output TUSER Channel Available when in Forney mode and Optional FDO pin has been selected on the GUI m_axis_data_tuser_rdy Represents the RDY field of the Output TUSER Channel Available when in Forney mode and Optional RDY pin has been selected on the GUI m_axis_data_tuser_block_start Represents the BLOCK_START field of the Output TUSER Channel Available when in Rectangular mode and Optional BLOCK_START pin has been selected on the GUI m_axis_data_tuser_block_end Represents the BLOCK_END field of the Output TUSER Channel Available when in Rectangular mode and Optional BLOCK_END pin has been selected on the GUI Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic Parameters Tab Parameters specific to the Basic Parameters tab are as follows e Memory Style Select Distributed if all the Block Memories are required elsewhere in the design select Block to use Block Memory where ever possible select Automatic and let Sysgen use the most appropriate style of memory for each case based on the required memory depth e Symbol Width this is the number of bits in the symbols to be processed e Type Select Forney Convolutional or Rectangular Block e Mode Select Inte
353. mber of entries in the cache The default is 20 000 entries To set the size of the cache entry database you should set the SYSGEN_CACHE_ENTRIES environment variable to the desired number of entries Setting this number too small will adversely affect cache performance You should set this number to a higher value when working on several large designs See Also Configuring the System Generator Cache Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 392 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlConfigureSolver xlConfigureSolver The xlConfigureSolver function configures the Simulink solver settings of a model to provide optimal performance during System Generator simulation Syntax xlConfigureSolver lt model_handle gt Description The xlConfigureSolver function configures the model referred to by lt model_handle gt lt model_handle gt canbe a string or numeric handle to a Simulink model Library models are not supported by this function since they have no simulation solver parameters to configure For optimal performance during System Generator simulation the following Simulink simulation configuration parameters are set SolverType Variable step Solver VariableStepDiscrete SolverMode SingleTasking Examples To illustrate how the xlConfigureSolver function works do the following 1 Open the following MDL file sysgen examples chipscope chip mdl 2 Enter the following at the MAT
354. ment the transition function and registers to implement state variables This reference block provides a method for implementing a Moore machine using block and distributed memory The implementation is very fast and efficient For example a state machine with 8 states 1 input and 2 outputs that are registered can be realized with a single block RAM that runs at more than 150 MHz in a Xilinx Virtex device The transition function and output mapping are each represented as an N x M matrix where N is the number of states and M represents the number of possible input values e g M 2 for a one bit input It is convenient to number rows and columns from 0 to N 1 and O to M 1 respectively Each state is represented as an unsigned integer from 0 to N 1 and each alphabet character is represented as an unsigned integer from 0 to M 1 The row index of each matrix represents the current state and the column index represents the input character For the purpose of discussion let F be the N x M transition function matrix and O be the N x M output function matrix Then F ij is the next state when the current state is i and the current input character is j and O i is the corresponding output of the Moore machine Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 351 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Moore State Machine Example Consider the problem of designing a Moore machine to recognize the pattern 1011 in a se
355. mentation efficiency The block receives two clock enable signals in hardware Src_CE and Dest_CE Src_CE is the faster clock enable signal and corresponds to the input data stream rate Dest_CE is the slower clock enable corresponding to the output stream rate for example down sampled data These enable signals control the register sampling in hardware Zero Latency Down Sample The zero latency Down Sample block must be configured to sample the first value of the frame The first sample in the input frame passes through the mux to the output port A register samples this value during the first sample duration and the mux switches to the register output at the start of the second sample of the frame The result is that the first sample in a frame is present on the output port for the entire frame duration This is the least efficient hardware implementation as the mux introduces a combinational path from Din to Dout A single bit register adjusts the timing of the destination clock enable so that Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 128 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Down Sample it is asserted at the start of the sample period instead of the end The hardware implementation is shown below Down Sample with Latency If the Down Sample block is configured with latency greater than zero a more efficient implementation is used One of two implementations is selected depending on whether the Down Sample
356. meters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Block Memory Generator v6 3 LogiCORE IP Distributed Memory Generator v6 3 For the block memory the address width must be equal to ceil log2 d where d denotes the memory depth The maximum width of data words in the block memory depends on the depth specified the maximum depth is depends on the device family targeted The tables below provide the maximum data word width for a given block memory depth Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 276 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Register Register This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Memory Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Register Block Interface The block has one input port for the data and an optional input reset port The initial output value is specified by you in the block parameters dialog box below Data presented at the input will appear at the output after one sample period Upon reset the register assumes the initial value specified in the parameters dialog box The Register block differs from the Xilinx Delay block by providing an optional reset port and a user specifiable initial value Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can
357. metric filter all 5 coefficients are loaded with the reload order as shown above 5th 1 Ath 2 3rd 3 2nd 2 1st 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 403 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlInstallPlugin xlInstallPlugin This function installs the specified System Generator hardware co simulation plugin Once the installer has completed the new compilation target can be selected from the System Generator token dialog box Syntax xlInstallPlugin lt plugin_name gt Description This function accepts one parameter plugin which contains the name of the plugin file to install The plugin parameter can include path information if desired and the zip extension is optional Examples Example 1 xlInstallPlugin plugin zip Example 2 xlInstallPlugin plugin Once the main dialog box is open you can create a board support package by filling in the required fields described below Board Name Tells a descriptive name of the board This is the name that is listed in System Generator when selecting your JTAG hardware co simulation platform for compilation System Clock JTAG hardware co simulation requires an on board clock to drive the System Generator design The fields described below specify information about the board s system clock e Frequency MHz Specifies the frequency of the on board system clock in MHz e Pin Location Specifies the FPGA input pin to which the syste
358. model Double click on the Gateway In block change the Output type to Boolean and click OK Select the modified Gateway In block right click and select Xilinx Tools gt Save as blockAdd default Now every time you add addition Gateway In blocks to the model using the BlockAdd feature the block is of Output type Boolean How to Restore the Block Default 1 2 Select a block with pre configured changed defaults Right click and select Xilinx Tools gt Clear blockAdd defaults Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 424 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Xilinx BlockConnect Xilinx BlockConnect Facilitates the rapid connection of blocks in a Simulink model Simple Connections 1 As shown below select an open port of a block right click and select Xilinx BlockConnect untitled Fie Edt View Simulation Fomst Tools Help 1 Right click m System Generator Gateway In1 AddSub Gateway In3 AddSub1 2 BlockConnect proposes the nearest connection with a green line To confirm you can double click the selected connection in the table The connection then turns black Otherwise select another connection in the table to see if the new green line connection is correct Ple Edt view Simulation Fan 1 Verify connection e System Generator Gateway In1 AddSub gt gt i h Gateway In3 AddSub1 f 2 Gateway In2 1 Gat
359. mple that customizes the waveform viewer It is often convenient to use relative paths in a custom script Relative paths are interpreted with respect to the directory that contains the model s MDL file A relative path in the Run co simulation in directory field is also interpreted with respect to the directory that contains the model s MDL file Thus for example if Run co Simulation in directory specifies modelsim as the directory in which ModelSim should run the relative path foo do in a script definition field refers to a file named foo do in the directory that contains the mdl Fine Points The time scale in ModelSim matches that in Simulink for example one second of Simulink simulation time corresponds to one second of ModelSim simulation time This makes it easy to compare times at which events occur in the two settings The typically large Simulink time scale is also useful because it allows System Generator to schedule events without running into problems related to the timing characteristics of the HDL model Users needn t worry too much about the details System Generator event scheduling in co simulation models The following example is offered to illustrate the broader points This example model shown here can be found in the System Generator directory lt ISE_Design_Suite_tree gt sysgen example black_box example4 The example Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 227 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
360. ms To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient Number of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample e Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 324 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX 4 channel 8 tap Transpose FIR Filter 4 channel 8 tap Transpose FIR Filter The Xilinx 4 channel 8 tap Transpose FIR Filter reference block implements a 4 channel 8 tap transpose FIR filter The transpose ache structure is well suited for data path processing in Xilinx FPGAs
361. mulation XtremeDSP Co Simulation Can be used in place of a Simulink subsystem that was compiled for XtremeDSP co simulation XtremeDSP Digital to Analog Converter Allows System Generator components to connect to the two analog output channels on the Nallatech BenAdda board when a model is prepared for hardware co simulation XtremeDSP External RAM Allows System Generator components to connect to the external 256K x 16 ZBT SRAM on the Nallatech BenAdda board when a model is prepared for hardware co simulation XtremeDSP LED Flasher Allows System Generator models to use the tri color LEDs on the BenADDA board when a model is prepared for co simulation Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 378 XILINX XtremeDSP Analog to Digital Converter XtremeDSP Analog to Digital Converter The Xilinx XtremeDSP ADC block allows System Generator components to connect to the two analog input channels on the Nallatech BenAdda board Y when a model is prepared for hardware co simulation Separate ADC blocks ADC1 and ADC2 are provided for analog input channels one and two respectively In Simulink the ADC block is modeled using an input gateway that drives a register The ADC block accepts a double signal as input and produces a signed 14 bit Xilinx fixed point signal as output The output signal uses 13 fractional bits In hardware a componen
362. n Simulink Using this clock source ensures the behavior of the co simulation hardware during simulation is bit and cycle accurate when compared to the simulation behavior of the subsystem from which it originated Sometimes single stepping is not necessary and the board can be run with a Free Running clock In this case the board will operate asynchronously to the Simulink simulation e Frequency MHz When Free Running clock mode is selected you can specify the operating frequency that the free running clock should be programmed to run at during simulation The selected clock frequency is rounded to the nearest valid frequency available from the programmable oscillator Note You must take care to specify a frequency that does not exceed the maximum operating frequency of the Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 380 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX XtremeDSP Co Simulation model s FPGA implementation The valid operating frequencies of the programmable oscillator are listed below 20 MHz 25 MHz 30 MHz 33 33 MHz 40 MHz 45 MHz 50 MHz 60 MHz 66 66 MHz 70 MHz 75 MHz 80 MHz 90 MHz 100 MHz 120 MHz e Card number Specifies the index of the XtremeDSP development kit card to use for hardware co simulation A default value of 1 should be used unless you have multiple XtremeDSP kit boards installed e Bus Allows you to choose the interface in which the co simulation block communicates with the XtremeD
363. n a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows Data Input Bit Width Width of input sample e Data Input Binary Point Binary point location of input e Coefficient Vector Ch 1 Specify coefficients for Channel 1 of the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Coefficient Vector Ch 2 Specify coefficients for Channel 2 of the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector Note Coefficient Vectors must be the same size Pad coefficients if necessary to make them the same size e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point per Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient Note Coefficient Vectors must be the same size Pad coefficients if necessary to make them the same size e Sample Period Sample period of input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 320 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpell
364. n a system that concatenates the two bits from the second signal onto the tail least significant bits of the signed signal We can do so using two Reinterpret blocks and one Concat block The first Reinterpret block is used to force the signed input signal to be treated as an unsigned value with its binary point at zero The result is then fed through the Concat block along with the other signal s UFix_2_0 The Concat operation is then followed by a second Reinterpret that forces the output of the Concat block back into a signed interpretation with the binary point appropriately repositioned Though three blocks are required in this construction the hardware implementation is realized as simply a bus concatenation which has no cost in hardware Block Parameters Parameters specific to the block are e Force Arithmetic Type When checked the Output Arithmetic Type parameter can be set and the output type is forced to the arithmetic type chosen according to the setting Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 271 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reinterpret of the Output Arithmetic Type parameter When unchecked the arithmetic type of the output is unchanged from the arithmetic type of the input e Output Arithmetic Type The arithmetic type unsigned or signed 2 s complement Floating point to which the output is to be forced e Force Binary Point When checked the Output Binary Point parameter can be
365. n auxiliary Tcl script To specify the script select Add Custom Scripts and enter the script name e g myscript do in the Script to Run After vsim field An example showing a customized waveform viewer is included in lt ISE_Design_Suite_tree gt sysgen examples black_box examples This example is in the topic Advanced Black Box Example Using ModelSim Leave ModelSim open at end of simulation When this checkbox is selected the ModelSim session is left open after the Simulink simulation has finished Skip compilation use previous results When this checkbox is selected the ModelSim compilation phase is skipped in its entirety for all black boxes that are using the ModelSim block for HDL co simulation To select this option is to assert that 1 underneath the directory in which ModelSim will run there exists a ModelSim work directory and 2 that the work directory contains up to date ModelSim compilation results for all black box HDL Selecting this option can greatly reduce the time required to start up the simulation however if it is selected when inappropriate the simulation can fail to run or run but produce false results Advanced tab Parameters specific to the Advanced tab are as follows Include Verilog unisim library Selecting this checkbox ensures that ModelSim includes the Verilog UniSim library during simulation Note the Verilog unisim library must be mapped to UNISIMS_VER in ModelSim In addition selecting this chec
366. n sample period is set to GCD 2 4 8 2 cycles which implies a sequence of write read and run operations is invoked on every 2 cycles starting from the first cycle of the execution The minimum execution length is LCM 2 4 8 8 cycles and thus the execution must be run for a multiple of 8 cycles E cn D ao cycle 0 1 2 3 Single step Clock Input x1 sample period 2 Input x1 sample period 4 Output y sample period 8 w write r read X Yun for n cydes A common sample period minimum execution length Vectorized execution Syntax outData exec h execId nCycles inData Description The exec instruction is designed to minimize the overheads inherited in the MATLAB environment It condenses a sequence of operations into a single invocation of the underlying engine and thus reduces the overheads on interpreting M codes and switching between M codes and the engine It can provide a significant performance improvement on simulation compared to using a repetitive sequence of individual write read and run instructions Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 460 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation The execld argument is constructed through a call to initExec nCycles specifies the number of simulation cycles to be run and inData contains the data used to drive the ports at each cycle inData is a 2D matrix M
367. nal and Rectangular Block Although they both perform the general interleaving function of rearranging symbols the way in which the symbols are rearranged and their methods of operation are entirely different For very large interleavers it might be preferable to store the data symbols in external memory The core provides an option to store data symbols in internal FPGA RAM or in external RAM Forney Convolutional Operation In the figure below shows the operation of a Forney Convolutional Interleaver The core operates as a series of delay line shift registers Input symbols are presented to the input commutator arm on DIN Output symbols are extracted from the output commutator arm on DOUT DIN and DOUT are fields in the AXI Data Input and Data Output channels respectively Output symbols are extracted from the output commutator arm on DOUT Both commutator arms start at branch 0 and advance to the next branch after the next rising Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 186 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 clock edge After the last branch B 1 has been reached the commutator arms both rotate back to branch 0 and the process is repeated In the figure above the branches increase in length by a uniform amount L The core allows interleavers to be specified in this way or the branch lengths can be passed in using a file allowing each branch to be any length Althou
368. name of the puncture definition file that is used to define the puncture patterns Optional pins tab e Clock Enable Adds a aclken pin to the block This signal carries the clock enable and must be of type Bool e Info Adds the output_tdata_info pin Marks the last information symbol of a block on tdata_data_out Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 262 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 Synchronous Reset Adds a aresetn pin to the block This signal resets the block and must be of type Bool The signal must be asserted for at least 2 clock cycles however it does not have to be asserted before the decoder can start decoding Original Delayed Data when checked the block is given a tdata_data_del output Indicates that a DAT_DEL field is in the output_tdata output Erase when checked the block is given an input_tdata_erase input pin Error Statistics adds the following three error statistics outputs o bit_err_0_to_1 number of bits received as 1 but corrected to 0 e bit_err_1_to_0 number of bits received as O but corrected to 1 Marker Bits Adds the following pins to the block o input_tuser_mark_in carries marker bits for tagging data on input_tdata_ data_in o output_tuser_mark_out mark_in tagging bits delayed by the latency of the LogiCORE Number of Marker Bits specifies the number of marker bits Other parameters used by this block are explained in
369. ncing a clock cycle all the input ports of the hardware co simulation are written to Next all the output ports are read and the clock is advanced In M Hwcosim the scheduling of when ports are read or written to is left to the user For instance it would be possible to create a program that would only write data to certain ports on every other cycle or to only read the outputs after a certain number of clock cycles This flexibility allows users to optimize the transfer of data for better performance Data Representation M Hwcosim uses fixed point data types internally while it consumes and produces double precision floating point values to external entities All data samples passing through a port or a memory location in a shared memory are fixed point numbers Each sample has a preset data width and an implicit binary point position that are fixed at the compilation time Data conversions from double precision to fixed point happen on the boundary of M Hwcosim In the current implementation quantization of the input data is handled by rounding and overflow is handled by saturation Interfacing to Hardware from M Code When a model has been compiled for hardware co simulation the generated bitstream can be used in both a model based Simulink flow or in M code executed in MATLAB The general sequence of operations to access a bitstream in hardware typically follows the sequence described below 1 Configure the hardware co simulation int
370. nd Auto Layout buttons invoke an open source package called Graphviz More information on this package is also available at http www graphviz org See Also xlAddTerms Once the main dialog box is open you can create a board support package by filling in the required fields described below xITBUtils Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 305 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Up Sample Up Sample This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements and Index The Xilinx Up Sample block increases the sample rate at the point where the block is placed in your design The output sample period is l n where is the input sample period and n is the sampling rate Up Sample The input signal is up sampled so that within an input sample frame an input sample is either presented at the output n times if samples are copied or presented once with n 1 zeroes interspersed if zero padding is used In hardware the Up Sample block has two possible implementations If the Copy Samples option is selected on the block parameters dialog box the Din port is connected directly to Dout and no hardware is expended Alternatively if zero padding is selected a mux is used to switch between the input sample and inserted zeros The corresponding circuit for the zero padding Up Sample block is shown below Block Interface The Up Sample block receives two clock enable signals Src_CE an
371. nd write enable WE Values in a Single Port RAM are stored by word and all words have the same arithmetic type width and binary point position A single port RAM can be implemented using either block memory or distributed memory resources in the FPGA Each data word is associated with exactly one address that must be an unsigned integer in the range 0 to d 1 where d denotes the RAM depth number of words in the RAM An attempt to read past the end of the memory is caught as an error in the simulation though if a block memory implementation is chosen it can be possible to read beyond the specified address range in hardware with unpredictable results The initial RAM contents can be specified through the block parameters The write enable signal must be Bool and when its value is 1 the data input is written to the memory location indicated by the address input The output during a write operation depends on the choice of memory implementation The behavior of the output port depends on the write mode selected see below When the WE is 0 the output port has the value at the location specified by the address line Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this block are e Depth the number of words in the memory must be a positive integer e Initial value vector the initial contents of the memory When the vector length exceeds the
372. ng values Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 250 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller How to Use the PicoBlaze Assembler Note The Xilinx PicoBlaze6 Assembler is only available with the Windows Operating System Third party PicoBlaze6 Assemblers are available for Linux but are not shipped by Xilinx 1 Write a PicoBlaze6 program Save the program with a psm file extension 2 Run the assembler from the MATLAB command prompt The command is xlpb6_as p lt your_psm_file gt This script runs the PicoBlaze6 assembler and generates an M code program which should be used to populate the ROM or RAM used as the program store PicoBlaze6 Microprocessor Online Documentation More information can be found at http www xilinx com products intellectual property picoblaze htm Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 251 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Puncture Puncture This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Communication and Index The Xilinx Puncture block removes a set of user specified bits from the input words of its data stream Puncture Based on the puncture code parameter a binary vector that specifies which bits to remove it converts input data of type UFixN_0 where N is equal to the length
373. ngle rate systems employed to produce efficient realizations of narrow band filters and with some minor enhancements wide band filters can be accommodated The data rate of the input and the output are the same e Rate Change Type This field is applicable to Interpolation and Decimation filter types Used to specify an Integer or Fixed_Fractional rate change e Interpolation Rate Value This field is applicable to all Interpolation filter types and Decimation filter types for Fractional Rate Change implementations The value provided in this field defines the up sampling factor or P for Fixed Fractional Rate P Q resampling filter implementations e Decimation Rate Value This field is applicable to the all Decimation and Interpolation filter types for Fractional Rate Change implementations The value provided in this field defines the down sampling factor or Q for Fixed Fractional Rate P Q resampling filter implementations e Zero pack factor Allows you to specify the number of O s inserted between the coefficient specified by the coefficient vector A zero packing factor of k inserts k 1 Os between the supplied coefficient values This parameter is only active when the Filter type is set to Interpolated Channel Specification tab Parameters specific to the Channel Specification tab are as follows Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 170 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 Inte
374. ning with System Generator www xilinx com 67 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box path Note that MATLAB limits all function names including those for configuration M functions to 63 characters Do not include the file extension m or p in the edit box Simulation Mode Tells the mode Inactive ISE Simulator or External co simulator to use for simulation When the mode is Inactive the black box ignores all input data and writes zeroes to ts output ports Usually for this mode the black box should be coupled using a Configurable Subsystem as described in the topic Configurable Subsystems and System Generator System Generator uses Configurable Subsystems to allow two paths to be identified one for producing simulation results and the other for producing hardware This approach gives the best simulation speed but requires that a simulation model be constructed When the mode is ISE Simulator or External co simulator simulation results for the black box are produced using co simulation on the HDL associated with the black box When the mode is External co simulator it is necessary to add a ModelSim HDL co simulation block to the design and to specify the name of the ModelSim block in the field labeled HDL Co Simulator To Use An example is shown below UD black haa 5x2 Black Box Tutorial Example 2 Input Sequence input Running Party Parallel to Se al Serial to Parallel
375. nnel and output channels denotes the last e Packet_Framing In this mode TLAST is conveyed from the input PHASE channel to the output channels with the same latency as TDATA The DDS does not use or interpret the TLAST signal in this mode Thismode is intended as a service to ease system design for cases where signals must accompany the datastream but which have no application in the DDS e Config_Triggered This is an enhanced variant of the Vector Framing option In this option the TLAST on the input PHASE channel can trigger the adoption of new configuration data from the CONFIG channel when there is new configuration data available This allows the re configuration to be synchronized with the cycle of time division multiplexed DDS channels TREADY o Output TREADY When selected the output channels will have a TREADY and hence support the full AXI handshake protocol with inherent back pressure If there is an input PHASE channel its TREADY is also determined by this control so that the datapath from input PHASE channel to output channels as a whole supports backpressure or not TUSER Options Select one of the following options for the Input DATA Output and PHASE Output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 111 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 e Not_Required Neither of the above uses is required the channel in question will not have a TUSER field e Chan_ID_ Field In
376. nput pin always available This port indicates the values presents on the input data ports are valid e s_axis_data_tready TREADY for S_AXIS_DATA Output pin always available This port indicates that the core is ready to accept data Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 310 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 e s_axis_data_tdata Input TDATA Different input data ports are available depending on the Viterbi Type selected on Pagel tab of block GUI When Trellis Mode is selected 5 input data pins become available these are s_axis_data_tdata_tcm00 s _axis_data_tdata_tcm01l s axis data_tdata_tcm10 s_axis data_tdata_tcm11 and s_axis_data_tdata_sector The width of the Trellis mode inputs s_axis_data_tdata_tcm can range from 4 to 6 corresponding to a data width Soft_Width value on Page2 tab of 3 to 5 s_axis_data_tdata_sector is always 4 bit wide The decoder always functions as a rate 1 2 decoder when Trellis mode is selected For any other Viterbi Type Standard Multi Channel Dual Decoder the Decoder supports rates from 1 2 to 1 7 Therefore the block can have 2 to 7 input data ports labeled s_axis_data_tdata_data_inO s_axis_data_tdata_data_in6 Hard Coding requires each tdata_data_in lt n gt port to be 1 bit wide Soft Coding allows these widths to be between 3 to 5 bits inclusive e s axis_data_tuser TUSER for S AXIS_DATA These ports are only present if External
377. nputs and outputs are expressed as unsigned integers Phase format e Radians The phase is expressed as a fixed point 2 s complement number with an integer width of 3 bits in radian units Scaled_Radians The phase is expressed as fixed point 2 s complement number with an integer width of 3 bits with pi radian units One scaled radian equals Pi 1 radians Input Output Options e Input width Controls the width of the input ports cartesian_tdata_real cartesian_tdata_imag and phase_tdata_phase The Input width range 8 to 48 bits e Output width Controls the width of the output ports dout_tdata_real dout_tdata_imag and dout_tdata_phase The Output width range 8 to 48 bits Round mode e Truncate The real imag and phase outputs are truncated e Round_Pos_Inf The real imag and phase outputs are rounded 1 2 rounded up e Round_Pos_Neg_Inf The real imag and phase outputs are rounded 1 2 rounded up 1 2 rounded down e Nearest_Even The real imag and phase outputs are rounded toward the nearest even number 1 2 rounded down and 3 2 is rounded up Page 2 tab Advanced Configuration Parameters e Iterations Controls the number of internal add sub iterations to perform When set to zero the number of iterations performed is determined automatically based on the required accuracy of the output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 101 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC
378. ns Each configuration can have a different number of branches and branch length constant It is even possible for each configuration to have every individual branch length defined by file The configuration can be changed at any time by sending a new CONFIG_SEL value on the AXI Control Channel This value takes effect when the next block starts The core assumes all configurations are either for an interleaver or de interleaver depending on what was selected in the GUI It is possible to switch between interleaving and de interleaving by defining the individual branch lengths for every branch of each configuration The details for each configuration are specified in a COE file For details please consult the Configuration Swapping section of the LogiCORE IP Interleaver De interleaver v7 1 Product Guide Rectangular Block Operation The Rectangular Block Interleaver works by writing the input data symbols into a rectangular memory array in a certain order and then reading them out in a different mixed up order The input symbols must be grouped into blocks Unlike the Convolutional Interleaver where symbols can be continuously input the Rectangular Block Interleaver inputs one block of symbols and then outputs that same block with the symbols rearranged No new inputs can be accepted while the interleaved symbols from the previous block are being output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 188 UG958 v2012 3 November 16
379. ns in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Reed Solomon Encoder v8 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 269 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Register Register This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Register Block Interface The block has one input port for the data and an optional input reset port The initial output value is specified by you in the block parameters dialog box below Data presented at the input will appear at the output after one sample period Upon reset the register assumes the initial value specified in the parameters dialog box The Register block differs from the Xilinx Delay block by providing an optional reset port and a user specifiable initial value Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Initial value specifies the initial value in the register Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 270 UG958
380. nt Blocks Index Block Gateway In Description The Xilinx Gateway In blocks are the inputs into the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design These blocks convert Simulink integer double and fixed point data types into the System Generator fixed point type Each block defines a top level input port in the HDL design generated by System Generator Gateway Out Xilinx Gateway Out blocks are the outputs from the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design This block converts the System Generator fixed point or floating point data type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type Mult The Xilinx Mult block implements a multiplier It computes the product of the data on its two input ports producing the result on its output port Mux The Xilinx Mux block implements a multiplexer The block has one select input type unsigned and a user configurable number of data bus inputs ranging from 2 to 1024 Natural Logarithm The Xilinx Natural Logarithm block produces the natural logarithm of the input Negate The Xilinx Negate block computes the arithmetic negation of its input Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal block performs the reciprocal on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal SquareRoot block performs the reciprocal SquareRoot squareroot on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Register The
381. nt of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit o Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 45 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Absolute Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 46 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Accumulator Accumulator This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Math and Index The Xilinx Accumulator block implements an adder or subtractor based scaling accumulator ama The block s current input is accumulated with a scaled current stored value The scale factor is a block parameter Block Interface The block has an input b and an output q The output must have the same width as the input data The output will have the same arithmetic type and binary point position as the input The output q is calculated as follows al 50 ifirsi 1 q n 2D xReedhorkiSabag thts otherwise q g A subtractor based accumulator replaces addition of the current input b n with subtraction Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be
382. nto the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design These blocks convert Simulink integer double and fixed point data types into the System Generator fixed point type Each block defines a top level input port in the HDL design generated by System Generator Gateway Out Xilinx Gateway Out blocks are the outputs from the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design This block converts the System Generator fixed point or floating point data type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type Parallel to Serial The Parallel to Serial block takes an input word and splits it into N time multiplexed output words where N is the ratio of number of input bits to output bits The order of the output can be either least significant bit first or most significant bit first Reinterpret The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Scale The Xilinx Scale block scales its input by a power of two The power can be either positive or negative The block has one input and one output The scale operation has the effect of moving the binary point without changing the bits in the container Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 23 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 5 Data Type Blocks Data Type Block Description Serial to Parallel The Serial to Paralle
383. nvolution codes specify which bits in the data window contribute to the modulo two sum Resetting the block will set the shift register to zero The encoder rate is the ratio of input to output bit length thus for example a rate 1 2 encoder outputs two bits for each input bit Similarly a rate 1 3 encoder outputs three bits for each input bit data_out_v 0 code O s 110101111 code 1 100011101 aes eo E Ei z data_in H gt data_out_v 1 Implementation The block is implemented using a form of parameterizable mux based collapsing In this method constants drive logic blocks Here the constant is the convolution code which is used to determine which register in the linear feed forward shift register is to be used in Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 333 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Convolutional Encoder computing the output All logic driven by a constant is optimized away by the down stream logic synthesis tool Block Interface The block currently has three input ports and three output ports The din port must have type UFix1_0 It accepts the values to be encoded The vin port indicates that the values presented on din are valid Only valid values are encoded The rst port will reset the convolution encoder when high To add an enable port you can open the subsystem and change the constant Enable to an input port The output ports dout1 and
384. nx com 235 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Negate Negate This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Negate block computes the arithmetic negation of its input Block Parameters Negate The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point output always has Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need full precision this option allows you to specify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits Fixed Point Output Type Arithmetic Type o Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number e Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number Fixed point Precision e Number of bits Specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit o Binary point Position of the binary point in the fixed point output Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Optional Port Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 236 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Negate e
385. o Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 64 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box directory that contains the model When a new black box is added to a model the Configuration Wizard opens automatically An example is shown in the figure below parity VHDL Parity Block ModelSim Select the file that contains the entity description for th FIR Look in CQ exampled E ex m ES word_parity_block whd Flename fshutery SSS Fles of type All Supported HDL Filas y vhd Cancel From this wizard choose the HDL file that should be associated to the black box then press the Open button The wizard generates a configuration M function described below for the black box and associates the function with the block The configuration M function produced by the wizard can usually be used without change but occasionally the function must be tailored by hand Whether the configuration M function needs to be modified depends on how complex the HDL is The Black Box Configuration M Function A black box must describe its interface e g ports and generics and its implementation to System Generator It does this through the definition of a MATLAB M function or p function called the block s configuration The name of this function must be specified in the block parameter dialog box under the Block Configuration parameter The configuration M function does the following e It specifies the t
386. o Migrate from Complex Multiplier 3 1 to Complex Multiplier 5 0 Design Description This example shows how to migrate from the non axi Complex Multiplier block to AXI4 Complex Multiplier block using the same or similar block parameters Some of the parameters between non AXI4 and AXI4 versions might not be identical exactly due to some changes in certain features and block interfaces Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 82 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 The following model is used to illustrate the design migration For more detail refer to the datasheet for this IP core Example showing how to migrate to AXI4 Complex Multiplier IP block Complex Mattpler 3 1 Rele pret Rente pret Rele prett Costat a Pres Rente pret Prodict_Real_AXIt_o DDSComplkr50 1 Complex Maltpller 40 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 83 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 Ear 68 02 9 ABB 94 Product_Real_non_4XI_o Product_Imag_non_4XI_o dout_tvalid Product_Imag_Axl4_o Product_Real_Axl4_o Time offset O Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 84 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Complex Multiplier 5 0 Complex Multiplier 3 1 Reinterpret1 Reinterpret2 ea dout_tdata_imag Reinterpret4 reinterpret a Reinterpret5 b_tdata_real
387. o calculate block outputs during a Simulink simulation The same code is translated in a straightforward way into equivalent behavioral VHDL Verilog when hardware is generated ModelSim The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate existing HDL files into a model When the model is simulated co simulation can be used to allow black boxes to participate The ModelSim HDL co simulation block configures and controls co simulation for one or several black boxes Mult The Xilinx Mult block implements a multiplier It computes the product of the data on its two input ports producing the result on its output port Mux The Xilinx Mux block implements a multiplexer The block has one select input type unsigned and a user configurable number of data bus inputs ranging from 2 to 1024 Natural Logarithm The Xilinx Natural Logarithm block produces the natural logarithm of the input Negate The Xilinx Negate block computes the arithmetic negation of its input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 31 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Opmode Description The Xilinx Opmode block generates a constant that is a DSP48A DSP48 DS48E or DSP48E1 instruction The instruction is an 11 bit value for the DSP48 8 bit forDSP48A 15 bit value for the DSP48E and a 20 bit value for DSP48E1 The
388. o dimensions specify the square covariance matrix the third specifies the path If a two dimensional array is specified for a frequency selective channel it is automatically replicated to produce a three dimensional array The third dimension is optional for frequency flat N 1 channels e Transmit Array Spatial Covariance Matrices Specify the transmit antenna array covariance matrix for each path The value can be a MyxMy matrix or a MyxM7xN array e Receive Array Spatial Covariance Matrices Specify the receive antenna array covariance matrix for each path The value can be a MpxMp matrix or a MpxMpxN array Fading tab e Spectrum Data Specify the fading phase and frequency response of each physical path The number of physical paths is the product of the number of discrete paths N and the number of paths between each element of the transmit and receive antenna arrays MTxMR Spectrum data must be a multidimensional structure with dimensions MRxMTXN e Rate Specify the interpolation rate from maximum Doppler frequency FDMAX to channel sample frequency FS It can be determined as follows p FS K 256 Fomax Internal tab e Datapath Width in Bits Specify the width in bits of all internal datapaths e Transmit Multiply Binary Point Specify the binary point position at the output of the RT multiply block e Fading Multiply Binary Point Specify the binary point position at the output of the fading multiply bl
389. ock e Receive Multiply Binary Point Specify the binary point position at the output of the RR multiply block e Covariance Matrix Binary Point Specify the binary point position of the covariance matrix coefficients e Random Seed Specify the 61 bit 16 hexadecimal digits seed of the phase noise random number generator Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 357 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Multipath Fading Channel Model Functions The model includes two MATLAB functions to simply parameter generation create_r_la The create_r_la M P phi0 d lambda AS function generates a covariance matrix from steering vectors as described in Reference 1 at the end of this block description e M Specify the number of antennas in the array transmit or receive e P Specify the number of random paths to integrate over to generate the matrix a value of 50000 gives good results e phiO Specify the mean angle of departure for transmit arrays or arrival for receive arrays Value is in radians e d Specify antenna spacing as a vector of antenna positions along a baseline If this value is specified as a scalar value the function assumes a uniform linear array ULA with the elements evenly distributed about the baseline origin lambda Specify the wavelength in meters e AS Specify the angular spread around the mean angle in radians For example to create a matrix for a 3 element
390. ock Interface The block has n input ports where n is some value between 2 and 1024 inclusively and one output port The first and last input ports are labeled hi and 1ow respectively Input ports between these two ports are not labeled The input to the hi port will occupy the most significant bits of the output and the input to the lo port will occupy the least significant bits of the output Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this block are as follows Number of Inputs specifies number of inputs between 2 and 1024 inclusively to concatenate together Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes The Concat block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 86 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Configurable Subsystem Manager Configurable Subsystem Manager This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The Xilinx Configurable Subsystem Manager extends Simulink s configurable subsystem capabilities to allow a subsystem configurations to be selected for hardware generation as well as for simulation Configurable Subsystem This block can be used to create Simulink library blocks subsystems that have special capabilities when used with the System Generator
391. od Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 346 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX m channel n tap Transpose FIR Filter m channel n tap Transpose FIR Filter The Xilinx m channel n tap Transpose FIR Filter uses a fully parallel architecture with Time Division Multiplexing The Virtex FPGA family and an2 Tianspose ynab Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated shift register circuitry called the an3 wp SRL16E which are exploited in the architecture to achieve optimal tit Mplementation of the multichannel architecture The Time Division Multiplexer and Time Division Demux can be selected to be implemented or not Embedded Multipliers are used for the multipliers an0 14 Tap 201 4 Channel Yip As the number of coefficients changes so to does the structure underneath as it is a dynamically built model Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog bo
392. odel option is selected on the implementation tab carry_in_sel DSP48E MULTSIGNOUT ALUMODE CARRYIN OPMODE CARRYINS EL BCIN ACIN These signals are dedicated routing paths intemal to the DSP48E column They are not accessible via fabric routing resources Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are e Aor ACIN input specifies if the A input should be taken directly from the a port or from the cascaded acin port The acin port can only be connected to another DSP48 block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 137 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E B or BCIN input specifies if the B input should be taken directly from the b port or from the cascaded bcin port The bcin port can only be connected to another DSP48 block Pattern Detection Reset p register on pattern detection if selected and the pattern is detected reset the p register on the next cycle Pattern Input o Pattern Input from c port when selected the pattern used in pattern detection is read from the c port Using Pattern Attribute 48bit hex value value is used in pattern detection logic which is best described as an equality check on the output of the adder subtractor logic unit Pattern attribute a 48 bit value tha
393. of type UFIX_32_0 can be done with Source const 10 Source arith_type Unsigned Source bin_pt 0 Source n_bits 32 SourceWith The SourceWith field allows the source block to be specified Default is to use a constant block SourceWith has two sub fields which must be specified SourceWithBlock A string specifying the full path and name of the block to be used e g built in Constant or xbsIndex_r3 AddSub SourceWithPort A string specifying the port number used to connect E g 1 or 3 Specifying 1 instructs xlAddTerms to connect using port 1 etc TermWith The TermWith Field allows the term block to be specified Default is to use a Simulink terminator block TermWith has two sub fields which must be specified TermWithBlock A string specifying the full path and name of the block to be used e g built in Terminator or xbsIndex_r3 AddSub TermWithPort A string specifying the port number used to connect E g 1 or 3 Specifying 1 instructs xlAddTerms to connect using port 1 etc UseGatewaylns Instructs xlAddTerms to insert System Generator gateway ins when required The existence of the field is used to denote insertion of gateway ins This field must not be present if gateway ins are not to be used Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 388 XILINX xlAddTerms optionStruct Description GatewaylIn If ga
394. olution codes Ordinarily used in tandem with a Viterbi decoder this block performs forward error correction FEC in digital communication systems This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Depuncture The Xilinx Depuncture block allows you to insert an arbitrary symbol into your input data at the location specified by the depuncture code Interleaver De interle aver 7 1 The Xilinx Interleaver Deinterleaver block implements an interleaver or a deinterleaver using an AXI4 compliant block interface An interleaver is a device that rearranges the order of a sequence of input symbols The term symbol is used to describe a collection of bits In some applications a symbol is a single bit In others a symbol is a bus Puncture The Xilinx Puncture block removes a set of user specified bits from the input words of its data stream Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 The Reed Solomon RS codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications and storage This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Viterbi Decoder 8 0 Data encoded with a convolution encoder can be decoded using the Xilinx Viterbi decoder block This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Con
395. on Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 405 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlInstallPlugin Load Fill in the form with values stored in an SBDBuilder Saved Description XML file This file is automatically saved with every plugin that you create so it is useful for reloading old plugin files for easy modification Save Zip Prompts you for a filename and a target pathname This will create a zip file with all of the plugin files for System Generator The zip is in a suitable format for passing to the System Generator xlInstallPlugin function Exit Quit the application See Also xlInstallPlugin Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 406 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlSetNonMemMap xlSetNonMemMap Sets a Gateway In or Gateway Out block to be used as a non memory mapped port when doing hardware co simulation This option is often used when a Gateway is intended to be routed to hardware external to the FPGA instead of being routed to the hardware co simulation memory map Syntax xlSetNonMemMap block company project Description A call to xISetNonMemMap must be made with at least three parameters The first is the name or handle of the gateway that is to be marked as non memory mapped The marking of a gateway as non memory mapped is predicated upon a company and project name The second and third parameters are strings that identify the company and
396. on in a new subsystem la b xInport a b mac xOutport mac m xSignal mult xBlock Mult struct latency 0 use_behavioral_HDL on fa b m acc xBlock Accumulator struct rst off use_behavioral_HDL on m mac By directing System Generator to generate behavioral HDL the two blocks should be packed into a single DSP48 block As of this writing Vivado synthesis will do so only if you force the multiplier block to be combinational El untitled Subsystem File Edit Mew Simulation Format Tools Help tT Accumulator Ready 100 Note If you don t close the model that is created in example 1 example 2 is created in a model named untiltled1 Otherwise a new model untitled is created for this example Debugging tip The PG API provides functions to get information about blocks and signals in the generated subsystem After each of the following commands observe the output in the MATLAB console and the effect on the Simulink diagram mult_ins mult getInSignals mult_ins 1 mult_ins 2 src_a mult_ins 1 getSrc src_a 1 m_dst m getDst m_dst 1 m_dst 1 block MACC in a Masked Subsystem If you want a particular subsystem to be generated by the PG API and pass parameters from the mask parameters of that subsystem to PG API you need to run the PG API in production Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 442 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
397. on project file project multi_rates_cw hwc Create a hardware co simulation instance Hwcosim project Open the co simulation interface and configure the hardware try open h catch If an error occurs launch the configuration GUI for the user to change interface settings and then retry the process again release h xlHwcosimConfig project true drawnow h Hwcosim project open h end Simulate for the specified number of cycles for i 0 ncycles 1 Write data to input ports based their sample period if mod i 2 0 h in2 testdata_in2 insp_2 insp_2 insp_2 1 end if mod i 3 h in3 testdata_in3 insp_3 insp_3 insp_3 1 end if mod i 7 h in7 testdata_in7 insp_7 insp_7 insp_7 1 end Read data from output ports based their sample period result_pb00 outsp_1 h pb00 result_pb04 outsp_1 h pb04 outsp_1 outsp_1 1 if mod i 2 0 result_pb01 outsp_2 h pb01 outsp_2 outsp_2 1 end if mod i 3 0 result_pb02 outsp_3 h pb02 outsp_3 outsp_3 1 end if mod i 7 0 result_pb03 outsp_7 h pb03 outsp_7 outsp_7 1 end Advance the hardware clock for one cycle run h end Release the hardware co simulation instance Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 453 XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co
398. op level entity name of the HDL component that should be associated with the black box e It selects the language for example VHDL or Verilog e It describes ports including type direction bit width binary point position name and sample rate Ports can be static or dynamic Static ports do not change dynamic ports Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 65 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box change in response to changes in the design For example a dynamic port might vary its width and type to suit the signal that drives it e It defines any necessary port type and data rate checking e It defines any generics required by the black box HDL e It specifies the black box HDL and other files e g EDIF that are associated with the block e It defines the clocks and clock enables for the block see the following topic on clock conventions e It declares whether the HDL has any combinational feed through paths System Generator provides an object based interface for configuring black boxes consisting of two types of objects SysgenBlockDescriptors used to define entity characteristics and SysgenPortDescriptors used to define port characteristics This interface is used to provide System Generator information in the configuration M function for black box about the block s interface simulation model and implementation If the HDL for a black box has at least one combinational path
399. operties the arithmetic type the bit width and the binary point position The MCode blocks provide three functions to get these properties of a fixed point number The results of these functions are constants and are evaluated when Simulink compiles the model Functiona x1_arith x returns the arithmetic type of the input number x The return value is either 1 2 or 3 for x1Unsigned x1Signed or x1Boolean respectively Function n x1_nbits x returns the width of the input number x Function b x1_binpt x returns the binary point position of the input number x Bit wise Operators xl_or xl_and xl_xor and xl_not The MCode block provides four built in functions for bit wise logical operations x1_or xl_and x1_xor and x1_not Function x1_or x1_and and x1_xor perform bit wise logical or and and xor operations respectively Each function is in the form of x xl_op a b m Each function takes at least two fixed point numbers and returns a fixed point number All the input arguments are aligned at the binary point position Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 207 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode Function x1_not performs a bit wise logical not operation It is in the form of x x1_not a It only takes one xfix number as its input argument and returns a fixed point number The following are some examples of these function calls xl_and a b xl_or a b c xl_xor
400. or at least two clock cycles to initialize the circuit This pin becomes available if ARESETN option is selected on the Page 5 tab It must be of type Bool If this pin is not selected System Generator ties this pin to inactive high on the core e aclken Carries the clock enable signal for the decoder The signal driving aclken must be Bool This pin becomes available if ACLKEN option is selected on Page 5 tab Block Parameters Pagel tab Parameters specific to the Pagel tab are Viterbi Type Number of Channels Used with the Muli Channel selection the number of channels to be decoded can be any value between 2 and 32 e Standard This type is the basic Viterbi Decoder e Multi Channel This type allows many interlaced channels of data to be decoded using a single Viterbi Decoder e Trellis Mode This type is a trellis mode decoder using the TCM and SECTOR_IN inputs Dual Decoder When selected the block behaves as a dual decoder with two sets of convolutional codes This makes the sel input port available Decoder Options e Use Reduced Latency The latency of the block depends on the traceback length and the constraint length If this reduced latency option is selected then the latency of the block is approximately halved and the latency is only 2 times the traceback length Constraint length Equals n 1 where n is the length of the constraint register in the encoder e Traceback length Length of the traceback thr
401. or black box This entity is taken from black box example Importing a VHDL Module library IEEE use IEEE std_logic_1164 all use IEEE numeric_std all entity word _parity_block is generic width integer 8 port din in std_logic_vector width 1 downto 0 parity out std_logic end word_parity_block architecture behavior of word_parity_block is begin WORD_PARITY_Process process din variable partial_parity std_logic 0 begin partial _parity 0 XOR_BIT_LOOP for N in din range loop Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 69 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Black Box partial _parity partial _parity xor din N end loop N parity lt partial_parity after 1 ns end process WORD_PARITY Process end behavior The following is an example configuration M function It makes the VHDL shown above available inside a System Generator black box function word_parity_ block _config this_block this_block setTopLevelLanguage VHDL this_block setEntityName word_parity_block this_block tagAsCombinational this_block addSimulinkInport din this_block addSimulinkO0utport parity parity this_block port parity parity setWidth 1 parity useHDLVector false if this_block inputTypesKnown this_block addGeneric width this_block port din width end if inputTypesKnown if this_block inputRatesKnown d
402. or is saturated or rounded according to the data precision specified for the ROM e Memory Type specifies block implementation to be distributed RAM or Block RAM e Provide reset port for output register when selected allows access to the reset port available on the output register of the Block ROM The reset port is available only when the latency of the Block ROM is set to 1 e Initial value for output register specifies the initial value for output register The initial value is saturated and rounded according to the data precision specified for the ROM Output e Specifies the data type of the output Can be Boolean Fixed point or Floating point Arithmetic Type If the Output Type is specified as Fixed point you can select Signed 2 s comp or Unsigned as the Arithmetic Type Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 275 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ROM Fixed point Precision Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Floating point Precision Single Specifies single precision 32 bits Double Specifies double precision 64 bits Custom Activates the field below so you can specify the Exponent width and the Fraction width Exponent width Specify the exponent width Fraction width Specify the fraction width Other para
403. or is thrown if the vector is empty v push_front_pop_back val Pushes val to the front and pops one element out from the back It s a shift operation The length of the vector is unchanged The vector cannot be empty to perform this operation full v full Returns true if the vector is full otherwise false empty v empty Returns true if the vector is empty otherwise false len v length Returns the number of elements in the vector Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 www xilinx com 210 XILINX MCode A method of a vector that queries a state variable is called a query method It has a return value The following methods are query method v idx v front v back v full v empty v length v maxlen A method of a vector that changes a state variable is called an update method An update method does not return any value The following methods are update methods v idx val v push_front val v pop_front v push_back val v pop_back and v push_front_pop_back val All query methods of a vector must be invoked before any update method is invocation during any simulation cycle An error is thrown during model compilation if this rule is broken The MCode block can map a vector state variable into a vector of registers a delay line an addressable shift register a single port ROM or a single port RAM based on the usage of the state
404. or maximum Performance Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 99 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC 5 0 Displaying Port Names on the Block Icon e You can select Display shortened port names to trim the length of the AXI port names on the block icon Block Parameters Dialog Box Page 1 tab Functional selection e Rotate When selected the input vector real imag is rotated by the input angle using the CORDIC algorithm This generates the scaled output vector Zi real imag e Translate When selected the input vector real imag is rotated using the CORDIC algorithm until the imag component is zero This generates the scaled output magnitude Zi Mag real imag and the output phase Atan imag real e Sin_and_Cos When selected the unit vector is rotated using the CORDIC algorithm by input angle This generates the output vector Cos Sin Sinh_and_Cosh When selected the CORDIC algorithm is used to move the vector 1 0 through hyperbolic angle p along the hyperbolic curve The hyperbolic angle represents the log of the area under the vector real imag and is unrelated to a trigonometric angle This generates the output vector Cosh p Sinh p Arc_Tan When selected the input vector real imag is rotated using the CORDIC algorithm until the imag component is zero This generates the output angle Atan imag real Arc_Tanh When selected the CORD
405. or output register The initial value is saturated and rounded as necessary according to the precision specified on the data port of the Block RAM Other parameters used by this block are explained in the Common Parameters topic at the beginning of this chapter Write Modes During a write operation WE asserted the data presented to the data input is stored in memory at the location selected by the address input You can configure the behavior of the data out port A upon a write operation to one of the following modes e Read after write e Read before write No read On write These modes can be described with the help of the figure shown below In the figure the memory has been set to an initial value of 5 and the address bit is specified as 4 When using No read on write mode the output is unaffected by the address line and the output is the same as the last output when the WE was 0 For the other two modes the output is obtained from the location specified by the address line and hence is the value of the Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 286 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Single Port RAM location being written to This means that the output can be either the old value Read before write mode or the new value Read after write mode MultSignal i ES 2l98Lo Al el 3 4 output or Read Before Wite mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 output or No Read On Write mode Hardw
406. or www xilinx com 337 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC DIVIDER The latency of the CORDIC divider block is calculated based on the formula specified as follows Latency 4 data width sum latency of Processing Elements Reference 1 J E Volder The CORDIC Trigonometric Computing Technique IRE Trans On Electronic Computers Vol EC 8 1959 pp 330 334 2 J S Walther A Unified Algorithm for Elementary Functions Spring Joint Computer Conference 1971 pp 379 385 3 Yu Hen Hu CORDIC Based VLSI Architectures for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Signal Processing Magazine pp 17 34 July 1992 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 338 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC LOG CORDIC LOG The Xilinx CORDIC LOG reference block implements a natural logarithm circuit using a fully parallel CORDIC COordinate Rotation Digital Computer algorithm in Hyperbolic Vectoring mode That is given a input x it computes the output log x and also provides a flag for adding complex pi value to the output if a complex output is desired The CORDIC processor is implemented using building blocks from the Xilinx blockset CORDIC LOG The natural logarithm is calculated indirectly by the CORDIC algorithm by applying the identities listed below log w 2x tanh1 w 1 w 1 log w x 2E log w E x log 2 The CORDIC LOG algorithm is implemented in the following
407. ort property of the Hwcosim object When ports are referred by name a cell array of port names is expected to be followed by an array of data that correspond to the ports Similarly when ports are referred by index an array of port indices is expected to be followed by an array of data Note For a large number of read and write operations specifying multiple ports by names is not encouraged for the sake of performance It is recommended to resolve a sequence of port names into an equivalent index sequence using the get instruction and then use the index sequence for subsequent read and write operations Read data Syntax outData h portName outData h outPortNames Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 457 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation outData h outPortIndices outData read h portName outData read h outPortNames outData read h outPortIndices Description Access to ports can be done by name or by index Port names and indices can be extracted from an Hwcosim instance by getting the Outport property of the Hwcosim object When ports are referred by name a cell array of port names is expected to be followed by an array of data that correspond to the ports Similarly when ports are referred by index an array of port indices is expected to be followed by an array of data Note For a large number of read and write op
408. orts Clocks for black boxes work like those for other System Generator blocks The black box HDL must have a separate clock and clock enable port for each associated sample rate in Simulink Clock and clock enable ports in black box HDL should be expressed as follows e Clock and clock enables must appear as pairs for example for every clock there is a corresponding clock enable and vice versa Although a black box can have more than one clock port a single clock source is used to drive each clock port Only the clock enable rates differ e Each clock name respectively clock enable name must contain the substring clk resp ce e The name of a clock enable must be the same as that for the corresponding clock but with ce substituted for clk For example if the clock is named src_clk_1 then the clock enable must be named src_ce_l Clock and clock enable ports are not visible on the black box block icon A work around is required to make the top level HDL clock enable port visible in System Generator the work around is to add a separate enable port to the top level HDL and AND this signal with the actual clock enable signal The Black Box Configuration Wizard The Configuration Wizard is a tool that makes it easy to associate a Verilog or VHDL component to a black box The wizard is invoked whenever a black box is added to a model To use the wizard copy the file that defines the HDL component for a black box into the Vivad
409. ossible to reduce the size of the core slightly For example for the Intelsat standard the R_IN input is 5 bits wide but only requires r values of 14 16 18 and 20 The core size can be slightly reduced by defining only these four values to be supported If any other value is sampled on R_IN the core will not decode the data correctly e Number of Supported R_IN Values Specify the number of supported R_IN values e Supported R_IN Definition File This is a COE file that defines the R values to be supported It has the following format radix 10 legal_r_vector 14 16 18 20 The number of elements in the legal_r_vector must equal the specified Number of Supported R_IN Values Attributes 2 tab Implementation State Machine o Self Recovering when checked the block synchronously resets itself if it enters an illegal state e Memory Style Select between Distributed Block and Automatic memory choices e Number Of Channels specifies the number of separate time division multiplexed channels to be processed by the encoder The encoder supports up to 128 channels e Output check symbols If selected then the entire n symbols of each block are output on the output channel If not selected then only the k information symbols are output Puncture Options Number of Puncture Patterns Specifies how many puncture patterns the LogiCORE needs to handle It is set to 0 if puncturing is not required e Puncture Definition File Specifies the
410. ou can configure the behavior of each data out port A and B to one of the following choices Read after write Read before write No read on write The write modes can be described with the help of the figure below In the figure the memory has been set to an initial value of 5 and the address bit is specified as 4 When using No read on write mode the output is unaffected by the address line and the output is the same as the last output when the WE was 0 For the other two modes the output is obtained from the location specified by the address line and hence is the value of the location being written to This means that the output can be the old value which corresponds to Read after write MultSignal Oy x fe Collision Behavior The result of simultaneous access to both ports is described below Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 151 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Dual Port RAM Read Read Collisions If both ports read simultaneously from the same memory cell the read operation is successful Write Write Collisions If both ports try to write simultaneously to the same memory cell both outputs are marked as invalid nan Write Read Collisions This collision occurs when one port writes and the other reads from the same memory cell While the memory contents are not corrupted the validity of the output data on the read port depends on the Write Mode of the write por
411. ough the Viterbi trellis Optimal length is 5 to 7 times the constraint length Page2 tab Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 313 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 Architecture e Parallel Large but fast Viterbi Decoder e Serial Small but processes the input data in a serial fashion The number of clock cycles needed to process each set of input symbols depends on the output rate and the soft width of the data Best State e Use Best State Gives improved BER performance for highly punctured data e Best State Width Indicates how many of the least significant bits to ignore when saving the cost used to determine the best state Puncturing None Input data has not been punctured e External Erased Symbols When selected an erase port is added to the block The presence of null symbols that is symbols which have been deleted prior to transmission across the channel is indicated using the erasure input erase Coding e Soft Width The input width of soft coded data can be anything in the range 3 to 5 Larger widths require more logic If the block is implemented in serial mode larger soft widths also increase the serial processing time e Soft Coding Uses the Euclidean metric to cost the incoming data against the branches of the Viterbi trellis e Hard Coding Uses the Hamming difference between the input data bits and the branches of the Viterbi trellis Hard
412. ough the decoder S_AXIS_DSTAT Chamnel Note These ports become available when Use BER Symbol Count is selected on Page 5 tab e s axis dstat_tvalid TVALID for S AXIS_DSTAT channel e s axis_dstat_tready TREADY for S_AXIS_DSTAT channel Indicates that the core is ready to accept data Always high except after a reset if there is not a TREADY on the output e s_axis_dstat_tdata_ber_range TDATA for S_AXIS_DSTAT channel This is the number of symbols over which errors are counted in the BER block M_AXIS_DSTAT Channel Note These ports become available when Use BER Symbol Count is selected on Page 5 tab e m_axis dstat_tvalid TVALID for M_AXIS_DSTAT channel e m_axis_dstat_tready TREADY for M_AXIS_DSTAT channel Do not enable or tie high if downstream slave is always able to accept data It becomes available when TREADY option is selected on Page 5 tab Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 312 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 e m_axis_dstat_tdata_ber TDATA for M_AXIS_DSTAT channel The Bit Error Rate BER bus output fixed width 16 gives a measurement of the channel bit error rate by counting the difference between the re encoded DATA_OUT and the delayed DATA_IN to the decoder Other Optional Pins e aresetn The synchronous reset aresetn input can be used to re initialize the core at any time regardless of the state of aclken signal aresetn needs to be asserted low f
413. ov deena SAN PEAT OM OEE Red Mined etd ed 415 SSH NOE OI ra aunties Sod eon doen deta By e E EEE ve eas ta dae Siei O EEEE 415 EXAMPLES dci ed eed Oe Recetas edad Rada aww NEA Ra Pee DEE E e a aan de 417 XIVDMACreateProject 0 000 cia a Saw See 85 aed A ee 418 XIVEFSION o a a a O48 a cda 420 SM a id dyed Dd Med ws Aha A de da aaa 420 Descrip isis skeri raian iana enee e a aa 6 Siw wot a Eaa ana ara airin eee wee es 420 SEC AIS revoca pein ian ee aE E AE EE E E ene AEA aa kana O a EE ee ee eS 420 Chapter 5 System Generator GUI Utilities Xilinx BIOCKAGG iodo ii RARA AAA A a we 422 Howto WAVOKG ocio td A A a la dis 422 Howto Usina a ata 422 Xilinx Tools gt Save as blockAdd default ccc cece eee e cece nent eee eeeeeeeeees 424 OWN A O O AA A 424 How to Restore the Block Default oooooooocoornronnrr eee nent nett eee n ene e nee 424 Xilinx BIOCKCOMMECE sses es ees 56 cece a A ade 04 aa a a dare 86 aaa ale oe ae 425 Simple CONNECTIONS 2 en ee en en nn enn n eet e nent n tenet etn ene 425 Smart CONNECTIONS wake a e na it id dada tcs 426 Xilinx Tools gt Terminate ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee nena eee eeeeesees 427 HOW TO Use it eas e DI A ni hades 427 Xilinx View Signal 000022 io a a a A a eee as 430 Howto Use cc A A AA AA Ai 430 Chapter 6 Programmatic Access System Generator API for Programmatic Generati0N oo ooooomoomoommm ooso 434 ITTO AUCTION eiii a A A e iaa 434 DEBI ANA
414. oves the input toward the least significant bit within its container with appropriate sign extension Bits shifted out of the container are discarded The Left shift moves the input toward the most significant bit within its container with zero padding of the least significant bits Bits shifted out of the container are discarded e Number of bits specifies how many bits are shifted If the number is negative direction selected with Shift direction is reversed Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Xilinx LogiCORE The Shift block does not use a Xilinx LogiCORE Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 282 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Simulation Multiplexer Simulation Multiplexer This block appears only in the Index library of the Xilinx Blockset 7 The Simulation Multiplexer has been deprecated in System Generator It is expected that the block is eliminated in a future version of the Xilinx Blockset The functionality supplied by this block is now available through System Generator s support for Simulink s configurable subsystem capabilities The use of configurable subsystems offers several advantages over the use of Simulation Multiplexer blocks The Simulation Multiplexer is a System Generator block that allows two portions of a design to work in parallel with simulation results provided by the first portion and h
415. ovide Load Pin option in the block s parameters InitialVal ue ifnu 0 outan iv out 2 1 Step mod 2 otherwise The output for a free running up counter is calculated as follows initial Value ifn 0 owt n 3 dix 2e 1 if load n 1 1 out m 1 Step mod 2 otherwise Here N denotes the number of bits in the counter The free running down counter calculations replace addition with subtraction For the free running up down counter the counter performs addition when input up port is lor subtraction when the input up port is 0 A count limited counter is implemented by combining a free running counter with a comparator Count limited counters are limited to only 64 bits of output precision Count limited types of a counter can be configured to step between the initial and ending values provided the step value evenly divides the difference between the initial and ending values The output for a count limited up counter is calculated as follows bitialValue if n Qor out n 1 Dount Limit ae out n 1 Step mod 2 otherwise The count limited down counter calculation replaces addition with subtraction For the count limited up down counter the counter performs addition when input up port is 1 or subtraction when input up port is 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 104 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Counter The output for a free running up counter wit
416. p b gt MAC FIR illustrate the tradeoffs between filter throughput and device resource consumption The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide ee dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures Each filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient Binary Point for Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient Number of Bits per Input Sample Width of input sample e Binary Point for Input Samples Binary point location of input e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpel
417. p up a question dialog asking whether to overwrite the file or not If the forcewrite field of the options argument is set to be true or 1 x1sub2script will overwrite the M function file without asking Sometimes a subsystem is depended on some variables in the MATLAB base workspace In that case when you run xlsub2script you want x1sub2script to pick these base workspace variables and generate the proper code to handle base workspace variables The Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 438 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator API for Programmatic Generation basevars field of the options argument is for that purpose If you want x1sub2script to pick up every variable in the base workspace you need to set the basevars field to be all If you want xlsub2script to selectively pick up some variables you can set the basevars field to be a cell array of strings where each string is a variable name The following are examples of calling x1sub2script with the options argument xlsub2script subsystem struct forcewrite true xlsub2script subsystem struct forcewrite true basevars all options basevars varl var2 var3 xlsub2script subsystem options xlsub2script subsystem struct basevars varl var2 var3 Note In MATLAB if the field of a struct is a cell array when you call the struct function call you need the extra xBlockHelp
418. pecify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits User Defined Precision Fixed point Precision e Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number o Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number o Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit e Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Optional Port Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 231 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mult e Provide enable port e Latency This defines the number of sample periods by which the block s output is delayed Saturation and Rounding of User Data Types in a Multiplier When saturation or rounding is selected on the user data type of a multiplier latency is also distributed so as to pipeline the saturation rounding logic first and then additional registers are added to the core For example if a latency of three is selected and rounding saturation is selected then the first register is placed after the rounding or saturation logic and two registers are placed to pipeline the core Registers are added to the core until optimum pipelining is reached and then further registers are placed after the rounding saturation logic However if the data type you select do
419. pically be added by hand after xlUpdateModel has been run This is necessary in order to help System Generator determine appropriate rates and types for the path The following error message is an indication that an Assert block is required The data rates could not be established for the feedback paths through this block You might need to add Assert blocks to instruct the system In such a case you should augment each feedback loop with an Assert block and specify rates and types explicitly on this block The update script will annotate the converted model wherever the v7 1 model asserted an explicit period In the converted model you will most often not need to insert Assert blocks To find out where you need them try to update the diagram the Update Diagram control is under the Edit menu If rates do not resolve you will need to insert one or more Assert blocks Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 416 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlUpdateModel The update script can be configured to automatically insert Assert blocks immediately following blocks configured with an explicit sample period setting To use this option run the following command xlUpdateModel designName assert 4 Save and Close the updated model If you did not previously make a backup copy of the old model you can save the updated model under a new name to preserve the old model 5 Verify that Your model Runs Unde
420. plicit ample Period O Specily explicit sample period i As described earlier in this topic the MATLAB function parameter on an MCode block tells the name of the block s function and the Interface tab specifies a list of constant inputs and their values Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 224 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ModelSim ModelSim This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate existing HDL MoadelSim files into a model When the model is simulated co simulation can be used to allow black boxes to participate The ModelSim HDL co simulation block configures and controls co simulation for one or several black boxes ModelSim During a simulation each ModelSim block spawns one copy of ModelSim and therefore uses one ModelSim license If licenses are scarce several black boxes can share the same block In detail the ModelSim block does the following e Constructs the additional VHDL and Verilog needed to allow black box HDL to be simulated inside ModelSim e Spawns a ModelSim session when a Simulink simulation starts e Mediates the communication between Simulink and ModelSim e Reports if errors are detected when black box HDL is compiled e Terminates
421. ports returns the number of outports e insigs block getInSignals returns a cell array of in coming signals e outsigs block getOutSignals returns a cell array of out going signals xInport An xInport object represents a subsystem input port The constructor port xInport port_name creates an xInport object with name port_name port1 port2 port3 xInport namel name2 name2 creates a list of input port with names and port xInport creates an input port with an automatically generated name An xInport object can be passed for port binding METHODS outsigs port getOutSignals returns a cell array of out going signals xOutport An xOutport object represents a subsystem output port The constructor port xOutport port_name creates an xOutport object with name port_name port1 port2 port3 xOutport namel name2 name2 creates a list of output port with names and port xOutport Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 436 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator API for Programmatic Generation creates an output port with an automatically generated name An xOutport object can be passed for port binding METHODS port bind obj connects the object to port where port is an xOutport object and obj is an xSignal or xInport object insigs port getInSignals returns a cell array of incoming signals xSignal An xSignal represents
422. pplications in digital communications and storage This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal block performs the reciprocal on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reciprocal The Xilinx Reciprocal SquareRoot block performs the reciprocal SquareRoot squareroot on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Register The Xilinx Register block models a D flip flop based register having latency of one sample period Reinterpret The Xilinx Reinterpret block forces its output to a new type without any regard for retaining the numerical value represented by the input Relational The Xilinx Relational block implements a comparator Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 32 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 8 Index Blocks Index Block Reset Generator Description The Reset Generator block captures the user s reset signal that is running at the system sample rate and produces one or more downsampled reset signal s running at the rates specified on the block ROM The Xilinx ROM block is a single port read only memory ROM Sample Time The Sample Time block reports the normalized sample period of its input A signal s normalized sample period is not equivalent to its Simulink absolute sample period In hardwar
423. presented at the module s data input port are written to the next available empty memory location when the write enable input is one By asserting the read enable input port data can be read out of the FIFO using the data output port dout in the order in which they were written The FIFO can be implemented using block RAM distributed RAM SRL or built in FIFO FIFO The fu11 output port is asserted to one when no unused locations remain in the module s internal memory The percent_fu11 output port indicates the percentage of the FIFO that is full represented with user specified precision When the empty output port is asserted the FIFO is empty Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are FIFO Implementation Memory Type This block implements FIFOs built from block RAM distributed RAM shift registers or the 7 series built in FIFOs Memory primitives are arranged in an optimal configuration based on the selected width and depth of the FIFO The following table provides best use recommendations for specific design requirements Independent Small Medium Large High Minimal Clocks Buffering Buffering Performance Resources Block RAM an nae a ae a IA Distributed RAM Performance Options Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 166 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XIL
424. priate source and sink blocks The whole model is simulated while the compiled System Generator design is executed on an FPGA device Alternatively it is possible to programmatically control the hardware created through the System Generator hardware co simulation flow using MATLAB M code M Hwcosim The M Hwcosim interfaces allow for MATLAB objects that correspond to the hardware to be created in pure M code independent of the Simulink framework These objects can then be used to read and write data into hardware This capability is useful for providing a scripting interface to hardware co simulation allowing for the hardware to be used in a scripted test bench or deployed as hardware acceleration in M code Apart from supporting the scheduling semantics of a System Generator simulation M Hwcosim also gives the flexibility for any arbitrary schedule to be used This flexibility can be exploited to improve the performance of a simulation if the user has apriori knowledge of how the design works Additionally the M Hwcosim objects provide accessibility to the hardware from the MATLAB console allowing for the hardware internal state to be introspected interactively Compiling Hardware for Use with M Hwcosim Compiling hardware for use in M Hwcosim follows the same flow as the typical System Generator hardware co simulation flow You start off with a System Generator model in Simulink select a hardware co simulation target in the System Generator
425. project names Examples Example 1 xlSetNonMemMap gcbh Xilinx jtaghwcosim The first parameter in the example returns the handle of the block that is currently selected That gateway is marked as non memory mapped when generating for Xilinx JTAG hardware co simulation Example 2 xlSetNonMemMap gcbh Nallatech xdspkit The first parameter in the example returns the handle of the block that is currently selected That gateway is marked as non memory mapped when generating for Nallatech s xTreme DSP kit See Also Using Hardware Co Simulation Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 407 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlSetUseHDL xlSetUseHDL This function sets the Use behavioral HDL option of blocks in a model or subsystem Syntax x1 1SetUseHDL system mode Description The model or system specified in the parameter system is set to either use cores or behavioral HDL depending on the mode Mode is a number where 0 refers to using cores and 1 refers to using behavioral HDL Examples Example 1 x1SetUseHDL gcs 0 This call sets the currently selected system to use cores See Also xlSetNonMemMap Once the main dialog box is open you can create a board support package by filling in the required fields described below Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 408 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlSwitchLibrary xlSwitch
426. ptional adder to provide addition of phase offset When the core is customized the phase increment and offset can be independently configured to be either fixed programmable using the CONFIG channel or dynamic using the input PHASE channel Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 107 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 When set to fixed the DDS output frequency is set when the core is customized and cannot be adjusted once the core is embedded in a design When set to programmable the CONFIG channel TDATA field will have a subfield for the input in question PINC or POFF or both if both have been selected to be programmable If neither PINC nor POFF is set to programmable there is no CONFIG channel When set to streaming the input PHASE channel TDATA port s_axis_phase_tdata will have a subfield for the input in question PINC or POFF or both if both have been selected to be streaming If neither PINC nor POFF is set to streaming and the DDS is configured to have a Phase Generator then there is no input PHASE channel Note that when the DDS is configured to be a SIN COS Lookup only the PHASE_IN field is input using the input PHASE channel TDATA port SIN COS LUT When configured as a SIN COS Lookup only the Phase Generator is not implemented and the PHASE_IN signal is input using the input PHASE channel and transformed into the SINE and COSINE outputs using a look up table Ef
427. r x 734 sqtxp algorithm in Hyperbolic Vectoring mode That is given input x it Computes the output sqrt x The CORDIC processor corpicsart js implemented using building blocks from the Xilinx blockset The square root is calculated indirectly by the CORDIC algorithm by applying the identity listed as follows sqrt w sqrt w 0 25 2 w 0 25 The CORDIC square root algorithm is implemented in the following 4 steps 1 Co ordinate Rotation The CORDIC algorithm converges only for positive values of x If x lt zero the input data is converted to a non negative number If x 0 a zero detect flag is passed to the co ordinate correction stage The square root circuit has been designed to converge for all values of x except for the most negative value 2 Normalization The CORDIC algorithm converges only for x between 0 25 inclusive and 1 During normalization the input x is shifted to the left till it has a 1 in the most significant non signed bit If the left shift results in an odd number of shift values a right shift is performed resulting in an even number of left shifts The shift value is divided by 2 and passed on to the co ordinate correction stage The square root is derived using the identity sqrt w sqrt w 0 25 w 0 25 2 Based on this identity the input x gets mapped to X x 0 25 and Y x 0 25 3 Hyperbolic Rotations For sqrt X2 Y2 calculation the resulting vector is rotated throu
428. r System Generator v9 1 01 If you have followed the instructions in the previous steps your model should run with System Generator v9 1 01 Open the model with System Generator v9 1 01 and run it Examples Example 1 gt gt xlUpdateModel my_model_name Update the file my_model_name md1 that is located in the current working directory Example 2 gt gt xlUpdateModel my_model_name lib Update the file my_model_name md1 that is located in the current working directory along with the libraries that are associated with the model Example 3 gt gt xlUpdateModel my_model_name assert Update the file my_model_name mdl that is located in the current working directory Add Assert blocks where necessary Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 417 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xIVDMACreateProject xIVDMACreateProject The xIVDMACreateProject utility takes a System Generator design with a VDMA Interface block and creates an ISE project with a top level module that stitches the System Generator design with an XPS sub module that instantiates the actual VDMA AXI interconnect and MIG IP VDMA The created ISE and XPS projects are initially set up for one of the following boards based on the FPGA device chosen for the System Generator design Xilinx ML605 for all Virtex 6 devices Xilinx SP601 for all Spartan 6 LX devices Xilinx SP605 for all Spartan 6 LXT devices Other
429. r circuits are removed from the core in order to streamline and minimize the size of logic for this IP This has some implications when migrating from an existing design with DSP48 Macro to the new DSP48 Macro 2 1 You can no longer specify multiple input operands for example Al A2 B1 B2 etc Because of this you must add a simple MUX circuit when designing with the new DSP48 Macro 2 1 if there is more than one unique input operand as shown in the following example DSP48 Macro Based Signed 35x35 Multiplier The following DSP48 Macro consists of multiple 18 bit input operands such as alo ahi for input to port A and blo bhi for input to port B The input operands and Opcode instructions Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 133 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 are specified as shown below Notice that the multiple input operands are handled internally by the DSP48 Macro block DSP4S Macro a OSP4E Macro Xilinx DSP46 Macro Muro furstion to cimplify uce of the D5P48 prmitive esp acad Basic Pipeliring Output Type Poris Advanced Irouts toport A oa Mubiple input operands Zor A inputs Irputs toport B bio bhi Inputs toport Inetructions pralo bb psalo bhi Poot a peahi blo P Old Opcode Pr1 instructions DSP48 Macro 2 1 Based Signed 35x35 Multiplier The same model shown above can be migrated to the new DSP4
430. r output ports The number of output ports is equal to the number of expressions The block does not cost anything in hardware Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e BitBasher Expression Bitwise manipulation expression based on Verilog Syntax Multiple expressions limited to a maximum of 4 can be specified using new line as a separator between expressions Output Type tab e Output This refers to the port on which the data type is specified e Output type Arithmetic type to be forced onto the corresponding output e Binary Point Binary point location to be forced onto the corresponding output Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Supported Verilog Constructs The BitBasher block only supports a subset of Verilog expression constructs that perform bitwise manipulations including slice concatenation and repeat operators All specified expressions must adhere to the following template expression output_var bitbasher_expr Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 59 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX BitBasher bitbasher_expr A slice concat or repeat expression based on Verilog syntax or simply an input port identifier output_var The output port identifier An output port with
431. r simulation purposes but will not be mapped to Xilinx hardware However the following Simulink blocks are fully supported by System Generator and is mapped to Xilinx hardware Table 1 12 Simulink Blocks Supported by System Generator Simulink Block Description Demux The Demux block extracts the components of an input signal and outputs the components as separate signals From The From block accepts a signal from a corresponding Goto block then passes it as output Goto The Goto block passes its input to its corresponding From blocks Mux The Mux block combines its inputs into a single vector output Refer to the corresponding Simulink documentation for a complete description of the block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 38 XILINX Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Each Xilinx block has several controls and configurable parameters seen in its block parameters dialog box This dialog box can be accessed by double clicking on the block Many of these parameters are specific to the block Block specific parameters are described in the documentation for the block The remaining controls and parameters are common to most blocks These common controls and parameters are described below Each dialog box contains four buttons OK Cancel Help and Apply Apply applies configurat
432. r_tvalid Block Parameters dout_tdata_remainder f gt divisor_tdata_divisor The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Divider Generator 4 0 Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are Common Options Algorithm Type o Radix 2 non restoring integer division using integer operands allows a remainder to be generated This is recommended for operand widths less than around 16 bits This option supports both unsigned and signed 2 s complement divisor and dividend inputs o High_Radix division with prescaling This is recommended for operand widths greater than 16 bits though the implementation requires the use of DSP48 or variant primitives This option only supports signed 2 s complement divisor and dividend inputs Output channel e Remainder type e Remainder Only supported for Radix 2 o Fractional Determines the number of bits in the fractional port output e Fractional width If Fractional Remainder type is selected this entry determines the number of bits in the fractional port output Radix2 Options e Radix2 throughput Determines the interval in clocks between new data being input and output Choices are 1 2 4 and 8 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 125 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Divider Generator 4 0 High Radix Options e Detect divide by zero Determines if the core shall have a divi
433. rameters specific to the block are as follows e Puncture Code the puncture pattern represented as a bit vector where a zero in position i indicates bit i is to be removed Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 253 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reciprocal Reciprocal This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Floating Point Math and Index The Xilinx Reciprocal block performs the reciprocal on the input Currently only the floating point data type is supported Reciprocal Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Flow Control e Blocking Selects Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel e NonBlocking Selects Non Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Optional ports Input Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a TLAST port to the Input channel e Has TUSER Adds a TUSER port to the Input channel e Provide enable port Adds an enable port to the block interface e Has Result TREAD
434. rd According to Block Masks deprecated_control off block_icon_display Default xilinxfamily virtex5 part xcbvsxb0t speed 1 package ff1136 synthesis_tool Vivado synthesis directory bitstream testbench off sysclk_period 10 core_generation According to Block Masks run_coregen off eval_field 0 clock_loc AH15 clock_wrapper Clock Enables dcm_input_clock_period 100 synthesis _ language VHDL ce_clr 0 preserve_hierarchy 0 postgeneration_fcn xlBitstreamPostGeneration settings_fcn xlTopLevelNetlistGUIL xlgetparams The compilation_lut parameter is another structure that lists the other compilation types that are stored in this System Generator token Using xlsetparam to set the compilation type allows the parameters associated with that compilation type to be visible to either xlgetparams or x1getparan See Also xlGenerateButton xlgetparam and xlsetparam www xilinx com 400 E XILINX xlGetReloadOrder xlGetReloadOrder The xlGetReloadOrder function obtains the reload order of the FIR Compiler block versions 5 0 and greater Syntax A xlGetReloadOrder block_handle paramStruct returnType Description block_handle FIR Compiler block handle in the design If a FIR Compiler block is selected then this function can be invoked as follows x1GetReloadOrder gcbh This is the only mandatory parameter for this function paramStr
435. rd AXI channels and pins on the interface Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 257 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 input Channel input_tvalid TVALID for the input channel input_tdata_erase indicates the symbol currently presented on data_in should be treated as an erasure The signal driving this pin must be Bool input_tdata_data_in presents blocks of n symbols to be decoded This signal must have type UFIX_s_0 where s is the width in bits of each symbol input_tlast Marks the last symbol of the input block Only used to generate event outputs Can be tied low or high if event outputs are not used input_tready TREADY for the input channel input_tuser_mark_in marker bits for tagging data on data_in Added to the channel when you select Marker Bits from the Optional Pins tab output Channel output_tready TREADY for the output channel output_tvalid TVALID for the output channel output_tdata_data_out produces the information and parity symbols resulting from decoding The type of data_out is the same as that for data_in output_tlast Goes high when the last symbol of the last block is on tdata_data_out output_tlast produces a signal of type UFIX_1_0 output_tuser_mark_out mark_in tagging bits delayed by the latency of the LogiCORE Added to the channel when you select Marker Bits on the Optional Pins tab output_tdata_info Added to the channe
436. rdware Oversampling Rate dialog box Enter the Hardware Oversampling Rate specification below Hardware Oversampling Rate The hardware over sampling rate determines the degree of parallelism A rate of one produces a fully parallel filter A rate of n resp n 1 for an n bit input signal produces a fully serial implementation for a non symmetric resp symmetric impulse response Intermediate values produce implementations with intermediate levels of parallelism Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 171 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows e Filter Architecture Choose Systolic_Multiply_Accumulate or Transpose_Multiply_Accumulate The differences in these architectures are fully explained in the associated FIR Compiler V6 2 Product Specification Coefficient Options e Coefficient Type Specify Signed or Unsigned e Quantization Specifies the quantization method to be used for quantizing the coefficients This can be set to one of the following o Integer_Coefficients e Quantize_Only Maximize_Dynamic_Range e Coefficient Width Specifies the number of bits used to represent the coefficients e Best Precision Fractional Bits When selected the coefficient fractional width is automatically set to maximize the precision of the specified filter coefficients e Coefficient Fractional Bits Specifies
437. re N 2 m 3 16 For fixed point inputs the input data is a vector of N complex values represented as dual b bit two s complement numbers that is b bits for each of the real and imaginary components of the data sample where b is in the range 8 to 34 bit inclusive Similarly the phase factors by can be 8 to 34 bits wide For single precision floating point inputs the input data is a vector of N complex values represented as dual 32 bit floating point numbers with the phase factors represented as 24 or 25 bit fixed point numbers Refer to the topic AXI Interfacefor more detailed information on the AXI Interface Theory of Operation The FFT is a computationally efficient algorithm for computing a Discrete Fourier Transform DFT of sample sizes that are a positive integer power of 2 The DFT of a sequence is defined as N 1 X k gt x n N n k 0 N 1 where N is the transform length and j is the square root of 1 The inverse DFT IDFT is 1 N 1 a x n K k pfnk2zi N n N 2 ky r 0 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block This Sysgen Generator block exposes the AXI CONFIG channel as a group of separate ports based on sub field names The sub field ports are described as follows Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 156 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 Configuration Channel Input Signals config_tdata_scale_sc h
438. re fx 5 punctured_viterbi decoder extract_erasure z e File Edt View Simulation Format Tools Help Ele Edt View Simulation Format Tools Help 4 Ea c DSHS telz m Normal 0 a S t e RA fiom UFix_3_0 i CACA UFix_4_0 tea data o UFix_1_0 C13 data_erase data_erase Concat Slice1 The previous diagram shows a matched filter block connected to a add_erasure subsystem which attaches a 0 to the input data to mark it as a non erasure signal The output from the add_erasure subsytem is then passed to a serial to parallel block The serial to parallel block concatenates two continuous soft inputs and presents it as a 8 bit word to the depuncture block The depuncture block inserts the symbol 0001 after the 4 bits from the MSB for code 0 1 0 1 and 8 bits from the MSB for code 1 1 1 0 to form a 12 bit word The output of the depuncture block is serialized as 4 bit words using the parallel to serial block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 121 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Depuncture The extract_erasure subsystem takes the input 4 bit word and extracts 3 bits from the MSB to form a soft decision input data word and 1 bit from the LSB to form the erasure signal for the Viterbi decoder Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model lolx Depunctures convolutional codes Reads valu
439. re subsequent executions so that it is only a one time overhead It is particularly important when we need to break down a simulation into multiple executions under certain circumstances for example when the memory cannot hold the input data for all simulation cycles An execution operates on a cycle basis where input and output data are given on every cycle In multi rate designs the internal operations are scheduled on a period of the GCD Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 459 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation rate the common sample period of involved ports The number of cycles is required to be a multiple of the LCM rate the minimum execution length of involved ports Special care is required when mixing the exec with individual read write and run instructions Before an execution the samplings of all involved input and output ports should be aligned on their common sample period boundary In other words it is expected to sample the involved ports at the first cycle of the execution Provided this condition holds the alignment of sampling is guaranteed for the involved ports when the execution completes because the execution length is a multiple of the LCM rate The figure below illustrates an execution which involves two input ports operating at a sample period of 2 and 4 cycles respectively and one output port with a sample period of 8 cycles The commo
440. ream can be simulated but cannot be translated into hardware If the HDL used to produce the bitstream is available a black box can incorporate the HDL Driving a Simulation Multiplexer s For Simulation port with the token and its For Generation port with the black box makes it possible both to simulate the design and to produce hardware Another use for the multiplexer is to switch between black boxes that incorporate different types of HDL One might provide behavioral HDL to be used in simulation and the other might provide RTL to be used for implementation Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the block are For Simulation Pass Through Data from Input Port Determines which input port either 1 or 2 is used for simulation For Generation Pass Through Data from Input Port Determines which input port either 1 or 2 is used for generation Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 284 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Single Port RAM Single Port RAM This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Floating Point Memory and Index The Xilinx Single Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM with one data input and one data output port Single Port RAM Block Interface The block has one output port and three input ports for address input data a
441. reating a Hwcosim object informs the Hwcosim engine where to locate the FPGA bitstream it does not download the bitstream into the FPGA The bitstream is only downloaded to the hardware after an open command is issued The project argument should point to the hwc file that describes the hardware co simulation Destructor Syntax release h Description Releases the resources used by the Hwcosim object h If a link to hardware is still open release will first close the hardware Open hardware Syntax open h Description Opens the connection between the host PC and the FPGA Before this function can be called the hardware co simulation interface must be configured Use the xlHwcosimConfig Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 456 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation utility to configure the hardware co simulation interface The argument h is an Hwcosim object Close hardware Syntax close h Description Closes the connection between the host PC and the FPGA The argument h is an Hwcosim object Write data Syntax h portName inData h inPortNames inData h inPortIndices inData write h portName inData write h inPortNames inData write h inPortIndices inData Description Access to ports can be done by name or by index Port names and indices can be extracted from an Hwcosim instance by getting the Inp
442. rial stream of bits The state transition diagram and equivalent transition table are shown below Ea Ru pat u7 0 sequence vy 1 een y 13 Ouip 1 0 J E Hal Eass 4 0 A 7 a Scer firt 1 a Bee Cr iam 1 A Onipi N at aoe re at S wh 2 Geen 17411 i f A Cupu 1 a ti Ay 5 1 f f es y nee sare e y s y 1 f a I 2 AN O Z dean dl E Dutput 0 S ot 3 m3 p t BEMER at Dd x e a 4 Orpi w ES os re Sn AA Next State Output Table Current State _ lf Input o If Input 1 Output uN oO VYVNON NO k Ja Ca oe 0000 The table lists the next state and output that result from the current state and input For example if the current state is 4 the output is 1 indicating the detection of the desired sequence and if the input is 1 the next state is state 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 352 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Moore State Machine The Registered Moore State Machine block is configured with next state matrix and output array obtained from the next state output table discussed above They are constructed as follows Next State Output lable Darrel Scale Wouput 3 Ifi yu 1 Qu pul I N A i 1 2 1 fo 2 0 3 0 3 2 4 u 2 uF NG 4 a Y rl y o gt 7d ij I 0 3 0 2 d 0 yo e Next State Matrix Output Array The rows of the matrices correspond to the current state The next state matrix has one column for each input value The output arr
443. riting to a shared memory addresses can be an integer or an array of integers specifying the address to write to When writing to a shared register addresses should be set to 0 Read data Syntax outData read m addresses outData m addresses Description When reading from a shared memory addresses can be an integer or an array of integers specifying the address to read from When reading from a shared register addresses should be set to 0 Set properties Syntax set m prop data Description Used to set the properties of the Shmem object Get properties Syntax data get m data get m prop Description Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 462 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation Used to get the properties of the Shmem object M Hwcosim Shared FIFO MATLAB Class Shfifo The Shfifo MATLAB class provides an interface into shared FIFOs embedded in hardware co simulation objects Actions Syntax Constructor m Shfifo memName Destructor release m Write data write m numValues inData Read data outData read m numValues Set properties set m prop data Get properties data get m prop Constructor Syntax m Shfifo fifoName Description Creates an object handle to a Shared FIFO object The argument is the name of the shared FIFO as defined in the System Generator model This
444. rleaved Channel Specification e Channel Sequence Select Basic or Advanced See the LogiCORE IP FIR Compiler v6 3 Product Specification for an explanation of the advanced channel specification feature e Number of Channels The number of data channels to be processed by the FIR Compiler block The multiple channel data is passed to the core in a time multiplexed manner A maximum of 64 channels is supported e Sequence ID List A comma delimited list that specifies which channel sequences are implemented Parallel Channel Specification e Number of Paths Specifies the number of parallel data paths the filter is to process As shown below when more than one path is specified the data_tdata input port is divided into sub ports that represent each parallel path data_treacy i gt data_tdata_path2 data_tvalid f gt data_tdata_path data tdata path2 f gt data_tdata_path1 f gt data_tdata_pathO data_tdata_pathO f gt Hardware Oversampling Specification e Select format o Maximum_Possible Specifies that oversampling be automatically determined based on the din sample rate oe Sample_Period Activates the Sample period dialog box below Enter the Sample Period specification Selecting this option exposes the s_axis_data_tvalid port called ND port on earlier versions of the core With this port exposed no input handshake abstraction and no rate propagation takes place o Hardware Oversampling Rate Activates the Ha
445. rleaver or Deinterleaver Symbol memory Specifies whether or not the data symbols are stored in Internal FPGA RAM or in External RAM Forney Parameters Tab Parameters specific to the Forney Parameters tab are as follows Dimensions Number of branches 1 to 256 inclusive Architecture Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 192 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 e ROM based Look up table ROMs are used to compute some of the internal results in the block e Logic based Logic circuits are used to compute some of the internal results in the block Which option is best depends on the other core parameters You should try both options to determine the best results This parameter has no effect on the block behavior Configurations e Number of configurations If greater than 1 the block is generated with CONFIG_SEL and NEW_CONFIG inputs The parameters for each configuration are defined in a COE file The number of parameters defined must exactly match the number of configurations specified Length of Branches e Branch length descriptions for Forney SID o constant_difference_between_consecutive_branches specified by the Value parameter o use_coe file_to_define_branch_lengths location of file is specified by the COE File parameter o coe file defines individual_branch_lengths_for_every_branch_in_each_configurat ion location of file is specified by the COE
446. rm sizes are provided in the section titled Transform Size in the associated LogiCORE data sheet Fast Fourier Transform v8 0 Product Specification Advanced tab Parameters specific to the Advanced tab are as follows Precision Options e Phase Factor Width choose a value between 8 and 34 inclusive to be used as bit widths for phase factors Scaling Options Select between Unscaled Scaled and Block Floating Point output data types Rounding Modes e Truncation to be applied at the output of each rank e Convergent Rounding to be applied at the output of each rank Control Signals e ACLKEN Enables the clock enable aclken pin on the core All registers in the core are enabled by this control signal ARESETn Active low synchronous clear input that always takes priority over ACLKEN A minimum ARESETn active pulse of two cycles is required since the signal is internally registered for performance A pulse of one cycle resets the core but the response to the pulse is not in the cycle immediately following Output Ordering e Cyclic Prefix Insertion Cyclic prefix insertion takes a section of the output of the FFT and prefixes it to the beginning of the transform The resultant output data consists of the cyclic prefix a copy of the end of the output data followed by the complete output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 158 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 data a
447. ro 2 1 Product Specification for details on all the parameters on this tab Implementation tab The Implementation tab is used to define implementation options Output Port Properties e Precision Specifies the precision of the P output port o Full The bit width of the output port P is set to the full XtremeDSP Slide width of 48 bits o User_Defined The output width of P can be set to any value up to 48 bits When set to less than 48 bits the output is truncated LSBs removed e Width Specifies the User Defined output width of the P output port e Binary Point Specifies the placement of the binary point of the P output port Special ports e Use ACOUT Use the optional cascade A output port e Use BCOUT Use the optional cascade B output port e Use CARRYCASCOUT Use the optional cascade carryout output port e Use PCOUT Use the optional cascade P output port Control ports Refer to the topic Implementation Page page 4 of the document LogiCORE IP DSP48 Macro 2 1 for details on all the parameters on this tab Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 132 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48 Macro 2 1 Migrating a DSP48 Macro Block Design to DSP48 Macro 2 1 The following text describes how to migrate an existing DSP Macro block design to DSP Macro 2 1 One fundamental difference of the new DSP48 Macro 2 1 block compared to the previous version is that internal input multiplexe
448. rounds the value to the nearest desired bit away from zero and when there is a value at the midpoint between two possible rounded values the one with the larger magnitude is selected For example to round 01 0110 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 0110 is exactly between 01 01 and 01 10 and the latter is further from zero Round unbiased even values also known as Convergent Round toward even or Unbiased Rounding Symmetric rounding is biased because it rounds all ambiguous midpoints away from zero which means the average magnitude of the rounded results is larger than the average magnitude of the raw results Convergent rounding removes this by alternating between a symmetric round toward zero and symmetric round away from zero That is midpoints are rounded toward the nearest even number For example to round 01 0110 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 0110 is exactly between 01 01 and 01 10 and the latter is even To round 01 1010 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 1010 is exactly between 01 10 and 01 11 and the former is even It is important to realize that whatever option is selected the generated HDL model and Simulink model behave identically Latency Many elements in the Xilinx blockset have a latency option This defines the number of sample periods by which the block s output is delayed One sample period might Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 40 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012
449. rovide pattern detect port when selected the pattern detection output port is provided When the pattern either from the mask or the c register is matched the pattern detection port is set to 1 Provide pattern bar detect port when selected the pattern bar detection patternbdetect output port is provided When the inverse of the pattern either from the mask or the c register is matched the pattern bar detection port is set to 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 145 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 Provide overflow port when selected the overflow output port is provided This port indicates when the operation in the DSP48E has overflowed beyond the bit P N where N is between 1 and 46 N is determined by the number of 1s in the mask whether set by the GUI mask field or the c port input Provide underflow port when selected the underflow output port is provided This port indicates when the operation in the DSP48E has underflowed Underflow occurs when the number goes below P N where N is determined by the number of 1s in the mask whether set by the GUI mask field or the c port input Provide ACOUT port when selected the acout output port is made available The acout port must be connected to the acin port of another DSP48E block Provide BCOUT port when selected the bcout output port is made available The bcout port must be connected to the bcin port of another DSP48E blo
450. rs o aa 254 Lao giICORE DOCUMENTATION mico A A A ad n i ae 254 Reciprocal SquareROOt sic cise ae eee cee edie rr a we 255 Block Parameters 300 rica is a is added ola hed atid 255 LogiCORE DocUMentati0N o ooocococo ee eee en nent eee e a e nee nnes 256 Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 52s 604 ts 4 baie estes ts aeiesiseo ass 257 Block Interface Channels and Pins 0 ccc eee ee eee tent e teen tenn eee nee 257 Block Parameters se ee ak ce ee kee Wetec itenv a Scan tote A a ac eee arlene oreo 260 LOZICORE DG CUM Tita tO A mcr a ee Ria ies nina 263 Reed Solomon Encoder 8 086 ie cdisees sawees i dies betes as 264 Block Interface Channels and Pins 0 0 ccc cee teen e ete e teen tenn nee nnes 265 Oth r Optional PINOS xi sei sn ci held eal de ade tease aca Hee SeeLaww i Inala a i tena 266 Block Pata Gt ers ara Rtdsind apn idca ade nia aay BAe ARR Wk Rw id fc dye 266 LogiCORE Documentation oocccccoc eee eee nen e nee ens 269 Registe a A ott secre asada A lig asin Ge SRLS ane GaN Gusta dees weg ew ene aes Mee 270 154 01 61 492 ic lt a ae en nee 270 Block Parameters 5 56 ii ded erence it popes Mtg Oe Wa BESS ia E i s 270 LogiCORE DocUMentati0N ccc eee ee eee eee nee nent ene eee n ee nnes 270 Reint rpr t A A E NN 271 Block iPAraMeters iii io a ea ad id dada 271 LogiCORE Documentation cc SS SAE ee ard eee eae 272 Relational ii ii ewe ee awe Se Vee oa Aen eA See eae eae See ee 273 Block Parameters sis
451. rs occur when the number of fractional bits is insufficient to represent the fractional portion of a value The options are to Truncate for example to discard bits to the right of the least significant representable bit or to Round unbiased inf or Round unbiased even values Round unbiased inf also known as Symmetric Round towards inf or Symmetric Round away from zero This is similar to the Matlab round function This method rounds the value to the nearest desired bit away from zero and when there is a value at the midpoint between two possible rounded values the one with the larger magnitude is selected For example to round 01 0110 to a Fix_4_2 this yields 01 10 since 01 0110 is exactly between 01 01 and 01 10 and the latter is further from zero Overflow Overflow errors occur when a value lies outside the representable range For overflow the options are to Saturate to the largest positive smallest negative value to Wrap for example to discard bits to the left of the most significant representable bit or to Flag as error an overflow as a Simulink error during simulation Flag as error is a simulation only feature The hardware generated is the same as when Wrap is selected Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 180 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Gateway In Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 181 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILIN
452. rts Outport A struct describing all the output ports Execution A struct describing the execution schedule SharedMemory A struct describing the available shared memories in the object Create Exec Id Syntax execId initExec h inPorts outPorts getrun h prop Description The exec instruction is designed to minimize the overheads inherited in the MATLAB environment It condenses a sequence of operations into a single invocation of the underlying hardware co simulation engine and thus reduces the overheads on interpreting M codes and switching between M codes and the engine It can provide a significant performance improvement on simulation compared to using a repetitive sequence of individual write read and run instructions An execution definition is initialized using the initExec instruction before subsequent executions of that definition can be invoked Defining an execution is to specify which input and output ports involve in the execution An execution can be defined on a subset of input and output ports Only involved ports are read or written during the execution while other input ports are expected to be driven by the same values and other output ports are simply ignored The inPorts and outPorts argument in initExec can either be cell arrays of portnames or arrays or port indexes Note Having initExec and exec instructions separated is solely for performance concerns The initialization phase is performed befo
453. ry MAC FIR Filter n tap Dual Port Memory MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx n tap Dual Port Block RAM MAC FIR Filter reference block implements a multiply accumulate based FIR filter One dedicated multiplier and one dual port block RAM are used in the filter The filter configuration illustrates a technique for storing coefficients and data samples in filter design Dual Pot Memoy The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated menm circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures The filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient 160 tap MAC FIR Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then right click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Data Input Bit Width Width of input sample e Data Input Binary Point Binary point location of input e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point p
454. s however it does not have to be asserted before the decoder can start decoding If this pin is not selected System Generator ties this pin to inactive high on the core Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Convolution Encoder 8 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 97 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CORDIC 5 0 CORDIC 5 0 This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries DSP and Index and Math The Xilinx CORDIC 5 0 block implements a generalized coordinate gt cartesian tvaiki dut mam gt rotational digital computer CORDIC algorithm and is AXI compliant cartesian_tdata_imag cartesian_tdata_meal dout_tdata_imag f gt phase_tvalid phase_tdata_phase dout_tdata_real f gt CORDIC 5 0 The CORDIC core implements the following equation types e Rotate e Translate e Sin _and_Cos Sinh_and_Cosh e Arc Tan e Arc_Tanh e Square_Root Two architectural configurations are available for the CORDIC core e A fully parallel configuration with single cycle data throughput at the expense of silicon area e A word serial implementation with multiple cycle throughput but occupying a small silicon area A coarse rotation is performed to rotate the input sample from the full circle into the first quadrant The coarse rotation stage is required
455. s into the System Generator fixed point type Each block defines a top level input IN port in the HDL design generated by System Generator While converting a double type to a System Generator fixed point type the Gateway In uses the selected overflow and quantization options For overflow the options are to saturate to the largest positive smallest negative value to wrap for example to discard bits to the left of the most significant representable bit or to flag an overflow as a Simulink error during simulation For quantization the options are to round to the nearest representable value or to the value furthest from zero if there are two equidistant nearest representable values or to truncate for example to discard bits to the right of the least significant representable bit It is important to realize that overflow and quantization do not take place in hardware they take place in the block software itself before entering the hardware phase Gateway Blocks As listed below the Xilinx Gateway In block is used to provide a number of functions e Converting data from Simulink integer double and fixed point types to the System Generator fixed point type during simulation in Simulink e Defining top level input ports in the HDL design generated by System Generator e Defining testbench stimuli when the Create Testbench box is checked in the System Generator token In this case during HDL code generation the inputs to the bloc
456. s are used to register each of these objects These objects are typically freed when a release command is called on the object xlHwcosim provides an easy way to release all resources used by M Hwcosim in the event of an unexpected error The release functions for each of the objects should be used if possible since the xlIHwcosim call release the resources for all instances of a particular type of object xlHwcosim release release all instances of Hwcosim objects xlHwcosim releaseMem release all instances of Shmem objects xlHwcosim releaseFifo release all instances of Shfifo objects xlHwcosimConfig Syntax xlHwcosimGetDesigniInfo xlHwcosimGetDesigniInfo netlist xlHwcosimGetDesigniInfo c design macfir_cw hwc Description xlHwcosimConfig launches a graphical front end shown below to configure the settings of the Hardware Co simulation interface It is equivalent to the block GUI launched by double Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 465 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX M Code Access to Hardware Co Simulation clicking a Hardware Co simulation block in Simulink Its invocation is similar to xlHwcosimGetDesignInfo py aloe Point to point Ethernet Hardware Co simulation Clocking Clock source Bingle stepped C Free running Configuration Cable Type Parallel Cable YC Platform USB Ethernet Cable Speed f5 MHz e Timeout ms B000 Interface Elh
457. s in the Latency pulldown menu below This generally results in less resources consumed Control Signals e Has phase out When checked the DDS will have the phase_output port This is an output of the Phase_Generator half of the DDS so it precedes the sine and cosine outputs by the latency of the sine cosine lookup table e ACLKEN Enables the clock enable aclken pin on the core All registers in the core are enabled by this control signal Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 110 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DDS Compiler 5 0 ARESETn Active low synchronous clear input that always takes priority over ACLKEN A minimum ARESETn active pulse of two cycles is required since the signal is internally registered for performance A pulse of one cycle resets the core but the response to the pulse is not in the cycle immediately following Explicit Sample Period e Use explicit period When checked the DDS Compiler block uses the explicit sample period that is specified in the dialog entry box below AXI Channel Options tab AXI Channel Options TLAST Enabled when there is more than one DDS channel as opposed to AXI channel as TLAST is used to denote the transfer of the last time division multiplied channel of the DDS Options are e Not_Required In this mode no TLAST appears on the input PHASE channel nor on the output channels e Vector_Framing In this mode TLAST on the input PHASE cha
458. s of each symbol e input_tlast Marks the last symbol of the input block Only used to generate event outputs Can be tied low or high if event outputs are not used e input_tready TREADY for the input channel e input_tuser_user marker bits for tagging data on input_tdata_data_in Added to the channel when you select Marker Bits from the Detailed Implementation tab output Channel e output_tready TREADY for the output channel Added to the channel when you select Output TREADY from the Optional Pins tab e output_tvalid TVALID for the output channel e output_tdata_data_out produces the information and parity symbols resulting from decoding The type of data_out is the same as that for data_in e output_tlast Goes high when the last symbol of the last block is on tdata_data_out output_tlast produces a signal of type UFIX_1_0 e output_tuser_tuser This pin is available when user selects Marker Bits from the Detailed Implementation tab event Channel e event_s_input_tlast_missing this output flag indicates that the input_tlast was not asserted when expected You should leave this pin unconnected if it is not required Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 265 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Encoder 8 0 e event_s_input_tlast_unexpected this output flag indicates that the input_tlast was asserted when not expected You should leave this pin unconnected if it is not requir
459. s received on another input channel e NonBlocking Selects Non Blocking mode In this mode the lack of data on one input channel does not block the execution of an operation if data is received on another input channel Optional ports Input Channel Ports e Has TLAST Adds a TLAST port to the Input channel e Has TUSER Adds a TUSER port to the Input channel e Provide enable port Adds an enable port to the block interface e Has Result TREADY Adds a TREADY port to the Result channel Exception Signals INVALID_OP Adds an output port that serves as an invalid operation flag Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 291 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX SquareRoot LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 292 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator System Generator This token ts listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Tools and Index simulation parameters and it is also used to invoke the code generator for netlisting Every Simulink model containing any element from the Xilinx Blockset must contain at System least one System Generator token Once a System Generator token is added to a model Sener it is possible to specify how code generat
460. scope output shows the output from the four Clock Enable probes in addition to the CLK probe output Constant Clock Enable Probe Clock Ensble Probe2 Clock Enable Probe Clock Enable Frobe Down Sample2 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 74 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Clock Enable Probe di la Ea o Time offset 0 The Clock Enable block has no parameters Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 75 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Clock Probe Clock Probe This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Tools and Index The Xilinx Clock Probe generates a double precision representation of a clock signal D with a period equal to the Simulink system period The output clock signal has a 50 50 duty cycle with the clock asserted at the start of the Simulink sample period The Clock Probe s double output is useful only for analysis and cannot be translated into hardware There are no parameters for this block Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 76 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CMult CMult This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Math Floating Point and Index The Xilinx CMult block implements a gain operator with output equal to the product of its input by a constant value This value can be a MATLAB expression that evaluates to a constant CMult
461. second b bcin register when selected an enable port ce_b2 for the second b pipeline register is made available e Enable port for c when selected an enable port ce_c for the port C register is made available Enable port for multiplier when selected an enable port ce_m for the multiplier register is made available Enable port for p when selected an enable port ce_p for the port P output register is made available Enable port for carry in when selected an enable port ce_carry_in for the carry in register is made available Enable port for alumode when selected an enable port ce_alumode for the alumode register is made available Enable port for multiplier carry in when selected an enable port mult_carry_in for the multiplier register is made available Enable port for controls opmode and carry_in_sel when selected the enable port ce_ctrl is made available The port ce_ctrl controls the opmode and carry in select registers e Enable port for d when selected an enable port is added input register d Enable port for ad when selected an enable port is add for the preadder output register ad Enable port for INMODE when selected an enable port is added for the INMODE register Implementation Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are e Use synthesizable model when selected the DSP48E is implemented from an RTL description which might not map directly to the DSP48E hardware This is
462. selected the sub block specified as the representative for the configurable subsystem is also used for generating hardware Otherwise the sub block selected from the list is used as the hardware representative Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 88 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Constant Constant This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements Control Logic Math Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can be a fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Constant DSP48 Instruction Mode The constant block when set to create a DSP48 instruction is useful for generating DSP48 control sequences The the figure below shows an example The example implements a 35x35 bit multiplier using a sequence of four instructions in a DSP48 block The constant blocks supply the desired instructions to a multiplexer that selects each instruction in the desired sequence op select P P2 gt 1T 4 B P P gt gt 17 27B Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Constant Value Specifies the value of the constant When changed the new value appears on th
463. sers with a way to generate highly parameterizable area efficient high performance FIR filters with an ee gt AXI4 Stream compliant interface Refer to the topic AXI Interfacefor more detailed information on the AXI data_tdata data_tvalid f gt Interface data_tdata f gt FIR Compiler 6 3 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block This Sysgen Generator block exposes the AXI CONFIG channel as a group of separate ports based on sub field names The sub field ports are described as follows Configuration Channel Input Signals config_tdata_fsel A sub field port that represents the fsel field in the Configuration Channel vector fsel is used to select the active filter set This port is exposed when the number of coefficient sets is greater than one Refer to the FIR Compiler V6 3 Product Specification starting on page 5 for an explanation of the bits in this field Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Filter Specification tab Parameters specific to the Filter Specification tab are as follows Filter Coefficients e Coefficient Vector Specifies the coefficient vector as a single MATLAB row vector The number of taps is inferred from the length of the MATLAB row vector If multiple coefficient sets are specified then each set is appended to the previous set in the vector It is possible to enter these coefficients using the FDATool block as well
464. si ieee aca sca ewe wa eet wheats verter a wie wave eden seneser es 165 FIFO sired gees it obs Sah Ga ee Ween we ew Ow Sheol RG SoS ens oes eal ee ieee ae eee 166 Block Parameters sit A a A fete Be 166 LogiCORE Documentation o aia 168 FIR Compiler 6 3 ooo a a a A A AAA A A RA 169 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block o oooooocconocnonnocone n ent e ene eens 169 Block Parameters xt atari a daze te aaa rd ie aah eileen di lil san 169 Channel Specification tab ccoo a dons edb a bE Aa See a OH a ee we de Sie eae 170 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX LogI CORE DOCUMENtAtION asco ico A di RA Ree ote a aa cada ia dia 178 Gate way IN costra a ro a a ts as a es Ea 179 Gateway BlOCKS vecinas ia iaa ba NGA BAAN Aloe AI tia edn 179 Block Pala Gt ers ii addons 179 Gateway QU viii AS A A A AAA AAA 182 Gateway BIOCKS 10 A A iii aed 182 BlOCk Para meters 00 aaa ia 182 Indeterminate Probe 0 0 ca A i 185 Interleaver De interleaver 7 1 oooooooooococococncoc rr 186 Forney Convolutional Operation o oooococooor eee ence nee ene n teenies 186 Configuration Swapping 0 en nnn ee nen nee n teen ene enes 188 Rectangular Block Operation 0 0 0 cc ene een eee n ee nen ee ene a 188 NARA 189 AXI Ports that are Unique to this Block o oooooocconononnco tenn eben een ene 190 Block Parameters ii A A ade E ad ele 192 LogiCOR
465. sies scscsgescsdselsastna seesds ses a se toveseauah ea ac 273 LogiCORE DOCUMENTATION iii iaa 273 Reset Generator io AA sew A ii 274 Block Parameters 05 tiros ali tii ds ds io e a a hed aon 274 ROM saco acia oil lanas dias sao tio a every ees raid 275 Block Parameters 00 A A it A 275 LogiCORE DocuMentatiO caco tada discal hinds Say fms ag ada a E reeset 276 RegiStO iria A AS A AA 277 Block interfaces coo a A RE ibe a ed 277 Block Parameters cise sce et acace ecacaces acne a wat 277 XillInxILOSICORE ss es ac ea a tine aiii eyeing kod areca Seabee wan wb tein Acetate Retard lark tebe at aa dead ae 277 Sample TIME si eriaren ania tbe ch A ace crake wae aR 278 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX A Sasa 2 Bae HOD SON Se ee ee A ee eee 279 Bl ck PAM ii eae 279 XilINX LOBICOFE paia 000 a dd 279 Serial to Parallels vices osc esis cca it wees Bee a a eats ais 280 Block Interface tino A Sie Wk cook aba BOS aca de EAAS 280 Block Parameters iaa dd ase ii 280 E y y PAI RR EN 282 Block Parameters errituen a A ia ara RA A ii dod ands ds 282 Xi ey s4 X ia did 282 Simulation Multiplexer 0 ccc eee eee ee ee eee tence eee eee e ee eeeees 283 Using Subsystem for Simulation and Black Box for Hardware 0 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eee as 283 Block Parameters rai A Wow ies ides Wea aac a e E EA 284 Single Port RAM sss sess sits cie adn ace Spain A A
466. signals from Xilinx signals in System Generator models Concat The Xilinx Concat block performs a concatenation of n bit vectors represented by unsigned integer numbers for example n unsigned numbers with binary points at position zero Constant The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can be a fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Convert The Xilinx Convert block converts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 18 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 2 Basic Element Blocks Block Description Counter The Xilinx Counter block implements a free running or count limited type of an up down or up down counter The counter output can be specified as a signed or unsigned fixed point number Delay The Xilinx Delay block implements a fixed delay of L cycles Down Sample The Xilinx Down Sample block reduces the sample rate at the point where the block is placed in your design Expression The Xilinx Expression block performs a bitwise logical expression Gateway In The Xilinx Gateway In blocks are the inputs into the Xil
467. sion Demultiplexer This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Basic Elements and Index The Xilinx Time Division Demultiplexer block accepts input serially and presents it to multiple outputs at a slower rate Block Interface Time Division Demultiplexer The block has one data input port and a user configurable number of data outputs ranging from 1 to 32 The data output ports have the same arithmetic type and precision as the input data port The time division demultiplexer block also has optional input valid port vin and output valid port vout Both the valid ports are of type Bool The block has two possible implementations single or multiple channel Single Channel Implementation For single channel implementation the time division demultiplexer block has one data input and output port Optional data valid input and output ports are also allowed The length of the frame sampling pattern establishes the length of the input data frame The position of 1 indicates the input value to be downsampled and the number of 1 s correspond to the downsampling factor The behavior of the demultiplexer block in single channel mode can best be illustrated with the help of the figure below Based on the frame sampling pattern entered the first and second input values of every input data frame are sampled and presented to the output at the rate of 2 Frame Sampling Patem 1100 Se a ao len ey soe cle A For singl
468. sion by zero indication output port AXI Interface AXI behavior e NonBlocking This e Blocking This AXI implementation emphasis o Resources Automatic fully pipelined or Manual determined by following field o Performance This Latency Options o Latency configuration Automatic fully pipelined or Manual determined by following field o Latency This field determines the exact latency from input to output in terms of clock enabled clock cycles Optional Ports tab Parameters specific to the Optional Ports tab are Optional Ports Divided Channel Ports Has TUSEER Adds a tuser input port to the dividend channel e Has TLAST Adds a tlast output port to the dividend channel Divsor Channel Ports o Has TUSEER Adds a tuser input port to the divsor channel e Has TLAST Adds a tlast output port to the divsor channel ACLKEN Specifies that the block has a clock enable port the equivalent of selecting the Has ACLKEN option in the CORE Generator GUI ARESETn Specifies that the block has a reset port Active low synchronous clear A minimum ARESETn pulse of two cycles is required m_axis_dout_tready Specifies that the block has a dout_tready output port Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 126 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Divider Generator 4 0 Input TLAST combination for output Determines the behavior of the dout_tlast output port e Null Output is null e Pass_D
469. sleep period This is a power saving feature of picoblaze6 This port is hidden by default and would be tied to ground in HDL generation If user wishes to control this port it can be enabled through block configuration out_port 7 0 Output Output Data Port port_id 7 0 Output Port Address read_strobe Output Read Strobe write_strobe Output Write Strobe k_write_strobe Output K write strobe similar to write_strobe is high for OUTPUTK instruction interrupt_ack Output Interrupt Acknowledge Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 249 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller Signal Direction Description addr 11 0 Output Address of the next instruction This is configurable from block configuration Accepted values are 1024 addr 9 0 2048 addr 10 0 and 4096 addr 11 0 Please note same program instruction size should be set on bram block bram_enable Output This output signal indicates when bram block should be enabled for memory access This is a power saving feature of picoblaze6 Block Parameters Parameters specific to the PicoBlaze6 Microcontroller block are e Program Size accepted values are 1024 2048 and 4096 instructions Address pin width increases with increased program size e Scratch Pad Size accepted values are 64 128 256 bytes This is passed as generic to generated HDL e HW Build This is configurabl
470. smsscos teaser es a a Sb Blew Tie Hed a SOs 374 Block iPArAMETEOS aii a 374 White Gaussian Noise Generator o oooocoocccocccrccana nc 375 4 bit Leap Forward LESR o oocoooococ en ee ene ence teen een eee nee eens 376 Box Miuller Methodi err erriei ada aida lata 376 Block Parameters nta das asias ell EEN 376 ROTTEN A Sa 377 Chapter 3 Xilinx XtremeDSP Kit Blockset XtremeDSP Analog to Digital Converter oo oooooooocooncrncrnororrnnnarnoos 379 Block Parameters 20 A A id ee 379 DataSheet ae lisa rc en ae ee 379 XtremeDSP Co Simulation ccc cece eee eee ee eee naaa e nena eeeeeeesees 380 Block Parameters idilio 380 XtremeDSP Digital to Analog Converter 0 ccc ccc cece ccc cece eee ence eee eeees 382 Block Parameters 25 0 4 e4ese eddie bedded A te ae A bed hehe ia ia dein wee 382 Dada Ae id 382 XtremeDSP External RAM 2 0 ccc cece cece eee e een aaa ee eee nee eeeeesees 383 Block iPAraMeterS minar id AR da delicia licenciada ia ctas 383 XtremeDSP LED Flashers comision rai wie eee HS aS Oe SOS 384 Block Parameters s asire star ii ia 4A HORA meiosis 384 Chapter 4 System Generator Utilities XA Ter MS eir ii A A A NE SOEs Shee 387 NAS 387 A a a nitions a SE E Node Baie edd 387 A A O RE 389 REMATKS vai A A adas 389 Sd a eta 390 ICAC dia ta a ai as 391 SM E A A A a dai 391 DG SGUIDUIOIN 5 5 5 95 25 a Sw Sao neces aia ar aE aniani EEE aE n E a G oa a ee Aaaa E a aE Ea 391 SEA SO mama
471. specified options Constant The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can be a fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 34 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 9 Math Blocks Math Block Description Convert The Xilinx Convert block converts each input sample to a number of a desired arithmetic type For example a number can be converted to a signed two s complement or unsigned value CORDIC 5 0 The Xilinx CORDIC 5 0 block implements a generalized coordinate rotational digital computer CORDIC algorithm and is AXI compliant Counter The Xilinx Counter block implements a free running or count limited type of an up down or up down counter The counter output can be specified as a signed or unsigned fixed point number Divide The Xilinx Divide block performs both fixed point and floating point division with the a input being the dividend and the b input the divisor Both inputs must be of the same data type Divider Generator 4 0 The Xilinx Divider Generator 4 0 block creates a circuit for integer division based on Radix 2 non restoring division or High Radix division with prescaling Expression The Xilinx Expression block performs a bitwise logic
472. specifies whether to generate an instruction for the DSP48A DSP48 DSP48E or DSP48E1 device DSP48 Instruction Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 238 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Opmode Operation displays the instruction that is generated by the block instruction is also displayed on the block Operation select selects the instruction Preadder output Allows you to select the equation for the DSP48E1 Preadder B register configuration Allows you to select the B register configuration for the DSP48E1 Select either B1 or B2 Custom Instruction Note The Custom Instruction field is activated when you select Custom in the Operation select field Instruction allows you to select the instruction for the DSP48A DSP48 DS48E or DSP48E1 Z Mux specifies the Z source to the add sub logic unit to be one of 0 C PCIN P C PCIN gt gt 17 P gt gt 17 Operand specifies whether the DSP48 s adder is to perform addition or subtraction In the DSP48E the operand selection is made in the instruction pulldown XY Muxes specifies the XY source to the DSP48 s adder to be one of 0 P A B A B C P C A B C A B implies that A is concatenated with B to produce a value to be used as an input to the add sub logic unit Carry Input specifies the carry source to the DSP48 s add sub logic unit to be one of 0 1 CIN SIGN P or PCIN SI
473. ssion channel Optional Pins e NORM Indicates when normalization has taken place internal to the Add Compare Select module e Block Valid Check this box if BLOCK_IN and BLOCK_OUT signals are required These signals track the movement of a block of data through the decoder BLOCK_OUT corresponds to BLOCK_IN delayed by the decoder latency e TREADY Selecting this option makes m_axis_data_tready and m_axis_dstat_tready pins available on the block e ACLKEN carries the clock enable signal for the block The signal driving aclken must be Bool e ARESETN Adds a aresetn pin to the block This signal resets the block and must be of type Bool aresetn must be asserted low for at least 2 clock periods and at least 1 sample period before the decoder can start decoding code symbols Common Parameters used by this block such as Display shortened port names are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 315 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Viterbi Decoder 8 0 LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Viterbi Decoder v8 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 316 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Device Support Device Support All System Generator Blocks support the following devices Artix Family Commercial Automotive Defence Grade Artix 7 T artix7 Artix 7 T aartix7 Artix 7Q T qartix7 Arti
474. systems are averaged to obtain a probability density function PDF that is Gaussian to within 0 2 out to 4 8sigma The overall latency of the WGNG is 10 clock cycles The output port noise is a 12 bit signed number with 7 bits after the binary point Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 375 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX White Gaussian Noise Generator 4 bit Leap Forward LFSR Logical3 Reinterpret Box Muller3 Box Mullert Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 376 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 White Gaussian Noise Generator XILINX The block parameter is a decimal starting seed value Reference A Ghazel E Boutillon J L Danger G Gulak and H Laamari Design and Performance Analysis of a High Speed AWGN Communication Channel Emulator IEEE PACRIM Conference Victoria B C Aug 2001 377 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Chapter 3 Xilinx XtremeDSP Kit Blockset Blocks related to the XtremeDSP Kit include the following Library XtremeDSP Analog to Digital Converter Description Allows System Generator components to connect to the two analog input channels on the Nallatech BenAdda board when a model is prepared for hardware co si
475. t e If the write port is in Read before write mode the other port can reliably read the old memory contents If the write port is in Read after write or No read on write data on the output of the read port is invalid nan You can set the Write Mode of each port using the Advanced tab of the block parameters dialog box Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are e Depth specifies the number of words in the memory for Port A which must be a positive integer The Port B depth is inferred from the form factor specified by the input data widths e Initial value vector specifies the initial memory contents The size and precision of the elements of the initial value vector are based on the data format specified for Port A When the vector is longer than the RAM the vector s trailing elements are discarded When the RAM is longer than the vector the RAM s trailing words are set to zero The initial value vector is saturated and rounded according to the precision specified on the data port A of RAM e Memory Type option to select between block and distributed RAM The distributed dual port RAM is always set to use port A in Read Before Write mode and port B in read only mode Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 152 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Dual Port RAM e
476. t type unsigned and a user configurable number of data bus inputs ranging from 2 to 1024 Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Number of inputs specify a number between 2 and 32 Optional Ports Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Output Precision This parameter allows you to specify the output precision for fixed point arithmetic Floating point arithmetic output will always be Full precision e Full The block uses sufficient precision to represent the result without error e User Defined If you don t need full precision this option allows you to specify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits User Defined Precision Fixed point Precision e Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number o Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number e Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit gt Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 233 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mux Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Parameters used by this block are expla
477. t xlSigned 4 0 q S if rst s init else s s din end The state variable s is declared as persistent and the first assignment to s is the result of the x1_state invocation The x1_state function takes two arguments The first is the initial value and must be a constant The second is the precision of the state variable It can be a type cell array as described in the xfix function call It can also be an xfix number In the above code ifs xl_state init din then state variable s will use din as the precision The x1_state function must be assigned to a persistent variable The x1_state function behaves in the following way 1 In the first cycle of simulation the x1_state function initializes the state variable with the specified precision 2 In the following cycles of simulation the x1_state function retrieves the state value left from the last clock cycle and assigns the value to the corresponding variable with the specified precision Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 209 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode v xl_state init precision returns the value of a state variable The first input argument init is the initial value the second argument precision is the precision for this state variable The argument precision can be a cell arrary in the form of type nbits binpt or type nbits binpt quantization overflow The precision argument can also be an xfix number
478. t click on the block and select Explore from the popup menu Double click on one of the sub blocks to open the sub block model and read the annotations Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Data Input Bit Width Width of input sample e Data Input Binary Point Binary point location of input e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Number of Bits per Coefficient Bit width of each coefficient e Binary Point Per Coefficient Binary point location for each coefficient e Interpolation Ratio Select the Interpolation Ratio of the filter 2 to 10 inclusive e Sample Period Sample period of input Reference J Hwang and J Ballagh Building Custom FIR Filters Using System Generator 12th International Field Programmable Logic and Applications Conference FPL Montpellier France September 2002 Lecture Notes in Computer Science 2438 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 345 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Interpolation Filter Interpolation Filter The Xilinx n tap Interpolation Filter reference block implements a mens Multiply accumulate based FIR filter to perform a user selected interpolation f rir One dedicated multiplier and one Dual Port Block RAM are used in the n t
479. t is used in the pattern detector Mask Input Mask input from c port when selected the mask used in pattern detection is read from the c port Using Mask Attribute 48 bit hex value 48 bit value used to mask out certain bits during pattern detection Mask attribute a 48 bit value and used to mask out certain bits during a pattern detection A value of 0 passes the bit and a value of 1 masks out the bit 48 bit value and used to mask out certain bits during a pattern detection A value of O passes the bit and a value of 1 masks out the bit Select rounding mask Selects special masks that can be used for symmetric or convergent rounding in the pattern detector The choices are Select mask Model and Mode2 Optional Ports tab Parameters specific to the Optional Ports tab are Consolidate control port when selected combines the opmode alumode carry_inand carry_in_sel ports into one 15 bit port Bits O to 6 are the opmode bits 7 to 10 are the alumode port bit 11 is the carry_in port and bits 12 to 14 are the carry_in_sel port This option should be used when the opmode block is used to generate a DSP48E instruction Provide c port when selected the c port is made available Otherwise the c port is tied to 0 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 138 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E Provide global reset port when selected the port rst is made available This port is
480. t output Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows e Use behavioral HDL otherwise use core The block is implemented using behavioral HDL This gives the downstream logic synthesis tool maximum freedom to optimize for performance or area Note For Floating point operations the block always uses the Floating point Operator core Core Parameters e Pipeline for maximum performance The XILINX LogiCORE can be internally pipelined to optimize for speed instead of area Selecting this option puts all user defined latency into the core until the maximum allowable latency is reached If this option is not selected and latency is greater than zero a single output register is put in the core and additional latency is added on the output of the core e Implement using Core logic can be implemented in Fabric or in a DSP48 if a DSP48 is available in the target device The default is Fabric Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Adder Subtractor v11 0 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 52 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Assert Assert This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blo
481. t that is driven by the ADC block output is driven by one of the two 14 bit AD6644 analog to digital converter devices on the BenAdda board When a System Generator model that uses an ADC block is translated into hardware the ADC block is translated into a top level input port on the model HDL The appropriate pin location constraints are added in the BenAdda constraints file thereby ensuring the port is driven appropriately by the ADC component A free running clock should be used when a hardware co simulation model contains an ADC block In addition the programmable clock speed should not be set higher than 64 MHz Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to the ADC block are e Sample Period specifies the sample period for the block Data Sheet A data sheet for the AD6644 device is provided in the XtremeDSP development kit install directory If FUSE denotes the directory containing the Nallatech FUSE software the data sheet can be found in the following location FUSE XtremeDSP Development Kit Docs Datasheets ADC ad6644 pdf Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 379 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX XtremeDSP Co Simulation XtremeDSP Co Simulation The Xilinx XtremeDSP Co simulation block can be used in place of a Simulink subsystem that was compiled for XtremeDSP co simulation During simulation p t
482. tant Gateway In Gateway Out Scope Register Ready 100 T 0 00 VariableStepDiscrete b Double click on the System Generator token click the Create interface document box at the bottom of the Compilation tab then click Generate c When netlisting is complete navigate to the documentation subfolder underneath the netlist folder and double click on the HTM document As shown below a Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 294 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator Designer Comments section is created in the document and your personalized comments are included XILINX Jan 06 2011 Introduction This document is generated from a Xilinx System Generator for DSP Syste the interface of this design Each of the subsequent sections provides details on design environmer Designer Comments This is a simple System Generator design Port Interface This section documents the port interface of reg_tb All the Gateway In and Ga top level input and output ports System Generator Type refers to the type of Type refers to one of the following Clocking tab Parameters specific to the Compilation tab are as follows e FPGA clock period ns Defines the period in nanoseconds of the system clock The value need not be an integer The period is passed to the Xilinx implementation tools through a constraints file where it is used as the global PERIOD constraint Multicycle pa
483. tationally efficient method for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT In addition the block provides an AXI4 Stream compliant interface FDATool The Xilinx FDATool block provides an interface to the FDATool software available as part of the MATLAB Signal Processing Toolbox FIR Compiler 6 3 The Xilinx FIR Compiler 6 3 block provides users with a way to generate highly parameterizable area efficient high performance FIR filters with an AXI4 Stream compliant interface LFSR The Xilinx LFSR block implements a Linear Feedback Shift Register LFSR This block supports both the Galois and Fibonacci structures using either the XOR or XNOR gate and allows a re loadable input to change the current value of the register at any time The LFSR output and re loadable input can be configured as either serial or parallel ports Opmode The Xilinx Opmode block generates a constant that is a DSP48A DSP48 DS48E or DSP48E1 instruction The instruction is an 11 bit value for the DSP48 8 bit forDSP48A 15 bit value for the DSP48E and a 20 bit value for DSP48E1 The instruction can consists of the opmode carry in carry in select inmode and either the subtract or alumode bits depending upon the selection of DSP48 or DSP48E type Floating Point Blocks The blocks in this library support the Floating Point data type as well as other data types Only a single data type is supported at a time For example a floating po
484. ted memory The implementation is very fast and efficient For example a state machine with 8 states 1 input and 2 outputs that are registered can be realized with a single block RAM that runs at more than 150 MHz in a Xilinx Virtex device The transition function and output mapping are each represented as an N x M matrix where N is the number of states and M is the size of the input alphabet e g M 2 for a binary input It is convenient to number rows and columns from 0 to N 1 and0toM 1 respectively Each state is represented as an unsigned integer from O to N 1 and each alphabet character is represented as an unsigned integer from 0 to M 1 The row index of each matrix represents the current state and the column index represents the input character For the purpose of discussion let F be the N x M transition function matrix and O be the N x M output function matrix Then F ij is the next state when the current state is i and the current input character is j and O i is the corresponding output of the Mealy machine Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 368 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Moore State Machine Example Consider the problem of designing a Moore machine to recognize the pattern 1011 in a serial stream of bits The state transition diagram and equivalent transition table are shown below rpn Me sartot L 3qLence Lig 1 2831 BA A 1 Uutf t J at 0 Ha mhg
485. tem Generator token Both functions are similar to the Simulink get_param and set_param commands and should be used for the System Generator token instead of the Simulink functions Syntax valuel value2 xlgetparam sysgenblock paraml param2 xlsetparam sysgenblock paraml valuel param2 value2 Description The System Generator token differs from other blocks in one significant manner multiple sets of parameters are stored for an instance of a System Generator token The different sets of parameters stored correspond to different compilation targets available to the System Generator token The compilation parameter is the switch used to toggle between different compilation targets stored in the System Generator token In order to get or set parameters associated with a particular compilation type it is necessary to first use xlsetparam to change the compilation parameter to the correct compilation target before getting or setting further values valuel value2 xlgetparam sysgenblock paraml param2 The first input argument of x1getparam should be a handle to the System Generator block Subsequent arguments are taken as names of parameters The output returned is an array that matched the number of input parameters If a requested parameter does not exist the returned value of x1getparamis empty The x1getparams function can be used to get all the parameters for the current compilation target xlse
486. tent state variable r1 is to a non constant value r1 If there were three branches in the conditional assi a gnment of persistent state variable r1 the enable signal would not be inferred The following M code illustrates the case where there are three branches in the conditional assignment of persistent state variable r1 and the enable signal is not inferred function myFn aFn en en2 a b persistent rl rl xl_state 0 xlUnsigned if en rl ri a elseif en2 rl rl b else rl rl VvV 2 OF The reset signal can be inferred if a persistent state variable is conditionally assigned to a constant the reset is synchronous Consider the following M code example which infers a reset signal for the assignment of persistent state variable r1 to init a constant when rst evaluates to true and r1 1 otherwise function myFn persistent rl myFn rl init 7 if rst rl init else aFn rst rl xl_state 0 xlUnsigned Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 4 O 1 221 XILINX MCode rl rl 1 end The M code example above which infers reset can also be written as function myFn aFn rst persistent rl rl xl_state 0 xlUnsigned 4 0 anat 14 myFn ri rl ri 1 if rst rI init end In both code examples above the reset signal of the register containing persistent state variable r1 is assigned to rst W
487. tes a 1 by N vector of zeros zero M N where M must be 1 It s usually used with x1_state function call For example the following line creates a 1 by 4 vector state variable initialized to 0 0 O 0 persitent m m xl_state zeros 1 4 proto FOR Loop FOR statement is fully unrolled The following function sums n samples function q sum din n persistent regs regs xl_state zeros 1 4 din q reg 0 for i 1l n 1 q q reg i end regs push_front_pop_back din The following function does a bit reverse function q bitreverse d q xl_slice d 0 0 for i 1 xl_nbits d 1 q xl_concat q xl_slice d i i end Variable Availability MATLAB code is sequential for example statements are executed in order The MCode block requires that every possible execution path assigns a value to a variable before it is used except as a left hand side of an assignment When this is the case we say the variable is available for use The MCode block will throw an error if its M code function accesses unavailable variables Consider the following M code function x y z testl a b x a if a gt b x a b y a Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 215 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX end switch a case 0 z a b case 1 z a b end MCode Here a b and x are available but y and z are not Variable y is not available because the if statement has no
488. teway ins are inserted their parameters can be set using this field in a similar way as for Source and Term For example GatewayIn arith_type Unsigned GatewayIn n_bits 32 GatewayIn bin_pt 0 will set the gateway in to output a ufix_32_0 UseGatewayOuts Instructs xlAddTerms to insert System Generator gateway outs when required The existence of the field is used to denote insertion of gateway outs This field must not be present if gateway outs are not to be used GatewayOut If gateway outs are inserted their parameters can be set using this field in a similar way as for Source and Term For example GatewayOut arith_type Unsigned GatewayOut n_bits 32 Gatewayout bin_pt 0 will set the gateway out to take an input of ufix_32_0 RecurseSubSystems Instructs xlAddTerm to recursively run xlIAddTerm under all child subsystems Expects a scalar number 1 or 0 Examples Example 1 Runs xlAddTerms on the current system with the default parameters constant source blocks are used and gateways are not added Subsystems are recursively terminated xlAddTerms gcs Example 2 runs xlAddTerms on all the blocks in the subsystem tt mySubsystem xlAddTerms find_system tt mySubsystem SearchDepth 1 Example 3 runs xlAddTerms on the current system setting the source block s constant value to 1 using gateway outs and changing the term block to use a Simulink display block s Source const
489. th System Generator www xilinx com 226 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX ModelSim of the top level entity for simulation e g work my_model_mti_block and blockname is the name of the ModelSim block in the Simulink model associated with the current co simulation To avoid problems certain characters in the block name e g newlines are sanitized If this parameter is not blank and Add custom scripts is selected then System Generator instead instructs ModelSim to execute do toplevel blockname Here toplevel and blockname are as above and represents the literal text entered in the field If for example the literal text is foo do then ModelSim executes foo do This macro file can then reference toplevel and blockname as 1 and 2 respectively Thus the command vsim l inside of the macro file foo do runs vsim on topLevel Script to run after vsim Enter the name of a Tcl macro file DO file that is to be executed by ModelSim after all the HDL for black boxes has been successfully compiled and after the ModelSim simulation has completed successfully If the Open Waveform Viewer checkbox has been selected System Generator issues all commands it ordinarily uses to open and customize the waveform viewer before running this script This allows you to customize the waveform viewer as desired either by adding signals to the default viewer or by creating a fully custom viewer The black box example includes an exa
490. the function call is an unsigned fixed point number with zero binary point position Here are some examples slice 7 bits from bit 10 to bit 4 xl_slice a 10 4 to get MSB o Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 208 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode c xl_slice a xl_nbits a 1 xl_nbits a 1 Concatenate Function xl_concat Function x x1_concat hi mid low concatenates two or more fixed point numbers to form a single fixed point number The first input argument occupies the most significant bits and the last input argument occupies the least significant bits The output is an unsigned fixed point number with binary point position at zero Reinterpret Function xl_force Function x xl_force a arith binpt forces the output to a new type with arith as its new arithmetic type and binpt as its new binary point position The arith argument can be one of x1Unsigned x1Signed or x1Boolean The binpt argument must be from 0 to the bit width inclusively Otherwise the block will throw an error State Variables xl_state An MCode block can have internal state variables that hold their values from one simulation step to the next A state variable is declared with the MATLAB keyword persistent and must be initially assigned with an x1_state function call The following code models a 4 bit accumulator function q accum din rst mit 0s persistent s s xl_state ini
491. the binary point expanding the xfix container as needed For example a Fix_8_4 number multiplied by 4 will result in a Fix_8_2 number and a Fix_8_4 number multiplied by 64 will result in a Fix_10_0 number Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 223 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode Using the xl_state Function with Rounding Mode The x1_state function call creates an xfix container for the state variable The container s precision is specified by the second argument passed to the x1_state function call If precision uses x Round for its rounding mode hardware resources is added to accomplish the rounding If rounding the initial value is all that is required an xfix call to round a constant does not require additional hardware resources The rounded value can then be passed to the x1_state function For example init xfix xlSigned 8 5 xlRound xlWrap 3 14159 persistent s s xl_state init xlSigned 8 5 Block Parameters Dialog Box The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the block icon in a Simulink model 5 MCode Xilinx MCode Block Pass input values to a MATLAB function for evaluation in lins fixed point ype The input ports of Ihe block are input arguments of Ihe function The autput ports of the block aie output arpuments of the function Basic Interface Advanced Implementation Block Interlace MATLAB funciion kmax Es
492. the binary point location in the coefficients datapath options e Coefficients Structure Specifies the coefficient structure Depending on the coefficient structure optimizations are made in the core to reduce the amount of hardware required to implement a particular filter configuration The selected structure can be any of the following o Inferred e Non Symmetric o Symmetric oe Negative_Symmetric Half_Band o Hilbert The vector of coefficients specified must match the structure specified unless Inferred from coefficients is selected in which case the structure is determined automatically from these coefficients Datapath Options e Output Rounding Mode Choose one of the following o Full Precision Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 172 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FIR Compiler 6 3 o Truncate_LSBs e Non_Symmetric_Rounding_Down e Non_Symmetric_Rounding_Up o Symmetric_Rounding_to_Zero o Symmetric_Rounding_to_Infinity o Convergent_Rounding_to_Even e Convergent_Rounding_to_Odd Output Width Specify the output width Edit box activated only if the Rounding mode is set to a value other than Full_Precision Detailed Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Detailed Implementation tab are as follows Filter Architecture The following two filter architectures are supported e Systolic_Multiply_Accumulate o Transpose_Multiply_Accumulate Optimization goal Speci
493. the black box are expressed as integer multiples of the system rate as specified by the Simulink System Period field on the System Generator token For example if the Simulink System Period is 1 8 and a black box input port runs at the system rate for example at 1 8 then the configuration M function sees 1 reported as the port s rate Likewise if the Simulink System Period is specified as pi and an output port should run four times as fast as the system rate for example at 4 pi then the configuration M function should set the rate on the output port to 4 The appropriate rate for constant ports is Inf As an example of how to set the output rate on each output port consider the following code segment block outport 1 setRate theInputkRate block outport 2 setRate thelInputRate 5 block outport 3 setRate theInputRate 5 The first line sets the first output port to the same rate as the input port The next two lines set the output rate to 5 times the rate of the input Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Basic tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows e Block Configuration M Function Specifies the name of the configuration M function that is associated to the black box Ordinarily the file containing the function is stored in the directory containing the model but it can be stored anywhere on the MATLAB Vivado Desig
494. the model depending on the ij DEJ position of the slider or the value of the zoom factor You can either position the slider or edit the Zoom Factor The Zoom Factor is limited to be between 5 and 1000 Toolbar Menus Toolbar Buttons Descriptions Tools Create Plugins Launches the System Generator Board Description Builder tool Inspect Selected Opens up the Simulink Inspector with the properties of the blocks that are currently selected This is useful when trying to set the size of several blocks or the horizontal position of blocks drawn on a model Toolbar Properties Launches the Properties Dialog Box shown in the figure below Allows you to set parameters for the Auto Layout and Reroute tool X and Y pitch indicate distances in pixels between blocks placed next to each other in the X and Y directions respectively The toolbar uses the Simulink autorouter when Use simulink autorouter is checked Otherwise a direct line is drawn from source to destination Propertics al O EN X pitch pixels 40 Y pitch pixal 40 Y Use simulirk autoroutes OK Cancel Help Opens this document Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Toolbar 304 XILINX Toolbar References 1 E R Gansner E Koutsofios S C North KVo A Technique for Drawing Directed Graphs http www graphviz org Documentation TSE93 pdf 2 The Reroute a
495. this mode the TUSER field identifies the time division multiplexed channel for the transfer e User_Field In this mode the block ignores the content of the TUSER field but passes the content untouched from the input PHASE channel to the output channels e User and Chan_ID Field In this mode the TUSER field will have both a user field and a chan_id field with the chan_id field in the least significant bits The minimal number of bits required to describe the channel will determine the width of the chan_id field e g 7 channels will require 3 bits e User Field Width This field determines the width of the bit field which is conveyed from input to output untouched by the DDS Config Channel Options e Synchronization Mode o On_Vector In this mode the re configuration data is applied when the channel starts a new cycle of time division multiplexed channels o On_Packet In this mode available when TLAST is set to packet framing the TLAST channel will trigger the re configuration This mode is targeted at the case where it is to be associated with the packets implied by the input TLAST indicator Output Frequency tab e Phase Increment Programmability specifies the phase increment to be Fixed Programmable or Streaming The choice of Programmable adds channel data and we input ports to the block The following fields are activated when Phase_Generator_and_SIN_COS_LUT is selected as the Configuration Options field on the Basic
496. thod for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT In addition the block provides an AXI4 Stream compliant interface FDATool The Xilinx FDATool block provides an interface to the FDATool software available as part of the MATLAB Signal Processing Toolbox FIFO The Xilinx FIFO block implements an FIFO memory queue FIR Compiler 6 3 The Xilinx FIR Compiler 6 3 block provides users with a way to generate highly parameterizable area efficient high performance FIR filters with an AXI4 Stream compliant interface Gateway In The Xilinx Gateway In blocks are the inputs into the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design These blocks convert Simulink integer double and fixed point data types into the System Generator fixed point type Each block defines a top level input port in the HDL design generated by System Generator Gateway Out Xilinx Gateway Out blocks are the outputs from the Xilinx portion of your Simulink design This block converts the System Generator fixed point or floating point data type into a Simulink integer single double or fixed point data type Indeterminate Probe The output of the Xilinx Indeterminate Probe indicates whether the input data is indeterminate MATLAB value NaN An indeterminate data value corresponds to a VHDL indeterminate logic data value of X Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 30 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Organiz
497. three commands in MATLAB command console to create a new subsystem named Subsystem inside a new model named untitled a b xInport a b s xOutport s adder xBlock AddSub struct latency 1 fa b s gt untitled Subsystem File Edit Yiew Simulation Format Tools Help Owed es 68 tT The above commands create the subsystem with two Simulink Inports a and b an adder block having a latency of one and a Simulink Outport s The two Inports source the adder which in turn sources the subsystem outport The AddSub parameter refers to the AddSub block inside the xbsIndex_r4 library By default if the full block path is not specified xBlock will search xbsIndex_r4 and built in libraries in turn The library must be loaded before using xBlock So please use load_system to load the library before invoking xBlock Debugging tip If you type adder in the MATLAB console System Generator will print a brief description of the adder block to the MATLAB console and the block is highlighted in the Simulink diagram Similarly you can type a b and s to highlight subsystem Inports and Outports MACC 1 Run this example in the learning mode To start a new learning session run xBlock Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 441 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX PG API Examples 2 Type the following commands in the MATLAB console window to create a multiply accumulate functi
498. ths are constrained to integer multiples of this value e Clock pin location Defines the pin location for the hardware clock This information is passed to the Xilinx implementation tools through a constraints file This option should not be specified if the System Generator design is to be included as part of a larger HDL design e Multirate implementation e Clock Enables default Creates a clock enable generator circuit to drive the multirate design e Expose Clock Ports This option exposes multiple clock ports on the top level of the System Generator design so you can apply multiple synchronous clock inputs from outside the design Refer to the topic Timing and Clockingfor details e DCM input clock period ns Specify if different than the FPGA clock period ns option system clock The FPGA clock period system clock will then be derived from this hardware defined input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 295 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX System Generator e Provide clock enable clear pin This instructs System Generator to provide a ce_clr port on the top level clock wrapper The ce_clr signal is used to reset the clock enable generation logic Capability to reset clock enable generations logic allows designs to have dynamic control for specifying the beginning of data path sampling Simulink system period sec Defines the Simulink System Period in units of seconds The Simulin
499. tions and the black box HDL to generate hardware The configurable subsystem manager specifies which sub block in a System Generator configurable subsystem should be the hardware representative To specify the hardware representative do the following 1 Place a manager inside one of the sub blocks and 2 Use the manager s When generating use parameter to select the hardware representative Note It is only possible to use a configurable subsystem manager by placing it inside a sub block of a configurable subsystem This means that at least one sub block must be a subsystem Note When several sub blocks contain managers the managers automatically synchronize so they agree on the choice of hardware representative Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 87 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Configurable Subsystem Manager Block Parameters The dialog box for a configurable subsystem manager is shown below Configurable Subsystem Manager 8 a Manage Configurable Subsystem When generating use Configurable Subsystem Black Choice v This block has one parameter labeled When generating use The parameter specifies which sub block to use as the hardware representative An example list of choices is shown below Configurable Subsystem Block Choice y Configurable Subsystem Block Choice DSP Blockset Simulation Model Xilinx DA FIR When Configurable Subsystem Block Choice is
500. to migrate to AXI4 FFT IP block Notice that there are some differences in latency between the AXI4 and non AXI4 versions and this is probably due to some internal differences in implementation However both the amplitude and frequency are correct Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 161 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 A xk_real AXI xk_imag AXI xk real t V Data path and control signals Data paths and control signals between the AXI and non AXI versions are very similar and there are no significant differences some of which is described as follows config_tdata_fwd_inv this signal replaces the fwd_inv signal which is used to configure the FFT as Inverse or Forward config_tvalid is used to signal that it is able to transfer the configuration data data_tlast and data_tready these two input control signals are not used and pulled to proper logic data_tvalid is used to gate both the input and output signals between Master and Slave blocks Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 162 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 LogiCORE Documentation LogiCORE IP Fast Fourier Transform v8 0 LogiCORE IP Floating Point Operator v6 1 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 163 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX FDATool FDATool This block is listed in th
501. tor Scope Accumulator 1 Accumulator 2 We Scope 1 If a second connection is made to this Scope block a second port is automatically added to the Scope The driving signal name is also used to name the signal driving the scope Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 426 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Xilinx Tools gt Terminate Xilinx Tools gt Terminate Facilitates the rapid addition of Simulink terminator blocks on open output ports and or Xilinx Constant Blocks on open input ports How to Use Terminating Open Outputs Consider the following model with open input and output ports HL untitled lolx File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help Ole BEles T 2e gt m fi0 0 Normal BS Gateway Out Gateway Outl data_tvalid data_treacly data_tdata_sine Gateway In data_tdata_cosine gt phase_tvalid f gt phase_tready a System phase_tdata f gt Generalor DDS Compiler 5 0 Right click on the DDS Compiler 5 0 block in this case and select Xilinx Tools gt Terminate gt Outputs Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 427 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Xilinx Tools gt Terminate The following graphic illustrates the resulting terminated outputs untitled Of x File Edit View Simulation Format Tools Help OD So SSCS tle d m fioo Noma JSF Gateway Out Gateway In
502. tor paramstruct xlgetparams gcb paramstruct xlgetparams gcbh Description All the parameters available to a System Generator block can be retrieved using the xletparams command For more information regarding the parameters please refer to the System Generator token documentation paramstruct xlgetparams sysgenblock The first input argument of xlgetparams should be a handle to the System Generator token The function returns a MATLAB structure that lists the parameter value pairs Examples To illustrate how the xlparams function works do the following 1 Open the following MDL file sysgen examples chipscope chip mdl 2 Select the System Generator token 3 Enter the following at the MATLAB command line gcb ans chip System Generator this is the System Genertor token string handle 4 Now enter the following from the MATLAB command line gcbh ans 4 3431 this is the System Genertor token numeric handle 5 Now enter the following from the MATLAB command line xlgetparams gcb the function returns all the parameters associated with the Bitstream compilation type Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 399 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 Vivado Designing with System Generator UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX compilation Bitstream compilation_lut 1x1 struct simulink_period 1 incr_netlist off trim_vbits Everywhere in SubSystem dbl_ov
503. tparam sysgenblock paraml valuel param2 value2 The xlsetparam function also takes a handle to a System Generator token as the first argument Subsequent arguments must be provided in pairs the first should be the parameter name and the second the parameter value Specifying the Compilation Parameter The compilation parameter on the System Generator token captures the compilation type chosen for example HDL Netlist or NGC Netlist As previously stated when a compilation type is changed the System Generator token will remember all the options chosen for that particular compilation type For example when HDL Netlist is chosen the corresponding target directory could be set to hdl_dir but when NGC Netlist is chosen the target directory could point to a different location for example ngc_dir Changing the compilation type causes the System Generator token to recall previous options made for Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 397 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX xlgetparam and xlsetparam that compilation type If the compilation type is selected for the first time default values are use to populate the rest of the options on the System Generator Token When using xlsetparam to set the compilation type of a System Generator token be aware of the above behaviour since the order in which parameters are set is important be careful to first set a block s compilation type b
504. tready dstat_tready dstat_tdata_ber This block ts listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries AXI4 Communications and Index Data encoded with a convolution encoder can be decoded using the Xilinx Viterbi decoder block This block adheres to the AMBA AXI4 Stream standard There are two steps to the decode process The first weighs the cost of incoming data against all possible data input combinations either a Hamming or Euclidean metric can be used to determine the cost The second step traces back through the trellis and determines the optimal path The length of the trace through the trellis can be controlled by the traceback length parameter Viterbi Decoder 8 0 The decoder achieves minimal error rates when using optimal convolution codes the table below shows various optimal codes For correct operation convolution codes used for encoding must match with that for decoding a Optimal convolution A Constraint codes for 1 2 rate Optimal convolution length octal codes for 1 3 rate octal 3 7 5 7 7 5 4 17 13 17 13 15 5 37 33 37 33 25 6 57 65 57 65 71 7 117 127 117 127 155 8 357 233 357 233 251 9 755 633 755 633 447 Block Interface The Xilinx Viterbi Decoder 8 0 block is AXI4 compliant The following describes the standard AXI channels and pins on the interface S_AXIS_DATA Channel e s_axis_data_tvalid TVALID for S_AXIS_DATA channel I
505. trol Logic Blocks Table 1 4 Control Logic Blocks Control Logic Block Description AXI FIFO The Xilinx AXI FIFO block implements a FIFO memory queue with an AXI compatible block interface Black Box The System Generator Black Box block provides a way to incorporate hardware description language HDL models into System Generator Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 21 XILINX Organization of Blockset Libraries Table 1 4 Control Logic Blocks Control Logic Block Description Constant The Xilinx Constant block generates a constant that can be a fixed point value a Boolean value or a DSP48 instruction This block is similar to the Simulink constant block but can be used to directly drive the inputs on Xilinx blocks Counter The Xilinx Counter block implements a free running or count limited type of an up down or up down counter The counter output can be specified as a signed or unsigned fixed point number Dual Port RAM The Xilinx Dual Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM Dual ports enable simultaneous access to the memory space at different sample rates using multiple data widths Expression The Xilinx Expression block performs a bitwise logical expression FIFO The Xilinx FIFO block implements an FIFO memory queue Inverter The Xilinx Inverter block calculates the bitwise logical comp
506. ts 10 binpt 5 Outpul nome Suppres output dot mx Cancel Help roly Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 218 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX MCode S Node Xilinx MCode Block Pass input values to a MATLAB function for evaluation in r limk fed point type The input ports of Ihe block are input arguments of Ihe function The output ports of the block aie output arguments of the function Basic Intelface Advanced Implementation Block Irterface Inpul name Bind lo value din ntits binpt 4 Outpul nome Suppresz output dot E Cancel Help ae The following figure shows the block diagram after the model is compiled Fix_10_4 xLstanvert dout signed conver 1 x stanet dout signed convert 2 The parameters can only be of type double or they can be logical numbers Optional Input Ports The parameter passing mechanism allows the MCode block to have optional input ports Consider for example the following M function function s xl_m_addsub a b sub if sub s a b else s a b end If sub is set to be false the MCode block that uses this M function will have two input ports a and band will perform full precision addition If it is set to an empty cell array the block will have three input ports a b and sub and will perform full precision addition or subtraction based on the value of input port sub
507. type x1UpdateModel designName The xlUpdateModel function performs the following tasks Updates each block in your v7 x design to a corresponding v9 1 01 block with equivalent settings Writes a report explaining all of the changes that were made This report enumerates changes you might need to make by hand to complete the update In most cases x1UpdateModel produces an equivalent v9 1 01 model However there are a few constructs that might require you to edit your model It is important that you read the report and follow the remaining steps in this section 3 Read the xlUpdateModel report and Follow the Instructions If the report contains the issues listed below manual intervention is required to complete the conversion a Xilinx System Generator v7 x models containing removed blocks The following blocks have been removed from System Generator CIC Clear Quantization Error Digital Up Converter J 83 Modulator Quantization Error Sync Xilinx System Generator v7 x Models that Contain Deprecated Blocks The DDSv4 0 block still exist in System Generator but has been deprecated Xilinx System Generator v7 x Models Utilizing Explicit Sample Periods The explicit sample period fields have been removed from most non source blocks in System Generator v9 1 01 Source blocks e g Counter block continue to allow the specification of explicit sample periods When upgrading models containing feedback loops Assert blocks must ty
508. uct Name value pairs of abstracted parameters For example if Hardware Oversampling Specification format is set to Maximum_Possible then the reload order returned could be incorrect unless the hardwareoversamplingrate is explicitly specified as say 4 e g gt gt options struct ratespecification Hardware_Oversampling_Rate hardwareoversamplingrate 4 gt gt xlGetReloadOrder gcbh options This parameter is an optional parameter and the default value is struct returnType This specifies the reload order information format This can either be an address_vector or transform_matrix For example if A is a row vector of coefficients then coefficients sorted in reload order can be obtained as reload_order_coefficients A xlGetReloadOrder gcbh struct address _vector Here reload_order_coefficients specifies the order in which coefficients contained in A should be passed to the FIR Compiler through the reload channel Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 401 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX xlGetReloadOrder Alternatively transform matrix can also be used reload_order_coefficients xlGetReloadOrder gcbh struct transform_matrix A This is an optional parameter and the default value is transform_matrix Example To illustrate how the xlGetReloadOrder can be used do the following 1 Open the model located at the following pathname lt sysgen_p
509. ull precision this option allows you to specify a reduced number of total bits and or fractional bits User Defined Precision Floating point Precision e Signed 2 s comp The output is a Signed 2 s complement number o Unsigned The output is an Unsigned number e Number of bits specifies the bit location of the binary point of the output number where bit zero is the least significant bit gt Binary point position of the binary point in the fixed point output Quantization Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Overflow Refer to the section Overflow and Quantization Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are e Use behavioral HDL description otherwise use core when selected System Generator uses behavioral HDL otherwise it uses the Xilinx LogiCORE Multiplier When this option is not selected false System Generator internally uses the behavioral HDL model for simulation if any of the following conditions are true a The constant value is O or is truncated to 0 b The constant value is less than 0 and its bit width is 1 c The bit width of the constant or the input is less than 1 or is greater than 64 d The bit width of the input data is 1 and its data type is xIFix Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 78 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX CMult Core Parameters e Implement using specifies whether to use distributed RAM or block RA
510. unconnected if it is not required ctrl Channel Note This channel is only present when variable block length number of check symbols or puncture is selected as a block parameter e ctrl_tready TREADY for the ctrl channel e ctri_tvalid TVALID for the ctrl channel e ctri_tdata this input contains the block length the number of check symbols and puncture select if applicable Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 259 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Reed Solomon Decoder 8 0 Other Optional Pins e aresetn resets the decoder This pin is added to the block when you specify Synchronous Reset on the Optional Pins tab The signal driving rst must be Bool Note aresetn must be asserted high for at least 1 sample period before the decoder can start decoding code symbols e aclken carries the clock enable signal for the decoder The signal driving aclken must be Bool Added to the block when you select the optional pin Clock Enable Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Attributes 1 tab Parameters specific to the Basic tab are as follows Code Block Specification e Code specification specifies the type of RS Decoder desired The choices are Custom allows you to set all the block parameters DVB implements DVB Digital Video Broadcasting standard 204 188 shortened RS code ATSC implements ATSC Advanced
511. us channels is only available when the Scaled arithmetic is used OVFLO is driven High during unloading if any point in the data frame overflowed For a multichannel core there is a separate OVFLO field for each channel When an overflow occurs in the core the data is wrapped rather than saturated resulting in the transformed data becoming unusable for most applications Block Icon Display Display shortened port names On by default When unchecked data_tvalid for example becomes m_axis_data_tvalid Implementation tab Parameters specific to the Implementation tab are as follows Memory Options Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 159 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Fast Fourier Transform 8 0 e Data option to choose between Block RAM and Distributed RAM This option is available only for sample points 8 through 1024 This option is not available for Pipelined Streaming 1 O implementation e Phase Factors choose between Block RAM and Distributed RAM This option is available only for sample points 8 till 1024 This option is not available for Pipelined Streaming I O implementation e Number Of Stages Using Block RAM store data and phase factor in Block RAM and partially in Distributed RAM This option is available only for the Pipelined Streaming I O implementation e Reorder Buffer choose between Block RAM and Distributed RAM up to 1024 points transform size Hybrid Memories click ch
512. useful if a design using the DSP48E block is targeted at device families that do not contain DSP48E hardware primitives Other parameters used by this block are explained in the topic Common Options in Block Parameter Dialog Boxes Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 148 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP48E1 Xilinx XtremeDSP Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 149 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Dual Port RAM Dual Port RAM This block is listed in the following Xilinx Blockset libraries Control Logic Memory Floating Point and Index The Xilinx Dual Port RAM block implements a random access memory RAM Dual ports enable simultaneous access to the memory space at different sample rates using multiple data widths Block Interface The block has two independent sets of ports for simultaneous reading and writing Independent address data and write enable ports allow shared access to a single memory space By default each port set has one output port and three input ports for address input data and write enable Optionally you can also add a port enable and synchronous reset signal to each input port set Dual Port RAM Form Factors The Dual Port RAM block also supports various Form Factors FF Form factor is defined as FF Wg Wag where Wp is data width of Port B and W is Data Width of Port A The Depth of port B Dg is inferred
513. uting Technique IRE Trans On Electronic Computers Vol EC 8 1959 pp 330 334 e 2 J S Walther A Unified Algorithm for Elementary Functions Spring Joint Computer Conference 1971 pp 379 385 e 3 Yu Hen Hu CORDIC Based VLSI Architectures for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Signal Processing Magazine pp 17 34 July 1992 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 344 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Dual Port Memory Interpolation MAC FIR Filter Dual Port Memory Interpolation MAC FIR Filter The Xilinx Dual Port Memory Interpolation MAC FIR filter reference block implements a multiply accumulate based FIR filter to perform a user selectable interpolation One dedicated multiplier and one Dual Port Block RAM are used in dual Por memo the N tap filter The filter configuration helps illustrate a cyclic RAM buffer coun technique for storing coefficients and data samples in a single block ram The filter allows users to select the interpolation factor they require The Virtex FPGA family and Virtex family derivatives provide dedicated circuitry for building fast compact adders multipliers and flexible memory architectures The filter design takes advantage of these silicon features by implementing a design that is compact and resource efficient Interpalate f gt by4 Implementation details are provided in the filter design subsystems To read the annotations place the block in a model then righ
514. vel HDL entity Block Parameters Parameters specific to the dialog box are as follows e Propagate data type to output This option is useful when you instantiate a System Generator design as a sub system into a Simulink design Instead of using a Simulink double as the output data type by default the System Generator data type is propagated to an appropriate Simulink data type according to the following table System Generator Data Type Simulink Data Type XFloat_8_24 single XFloat_11_53 double Custom floating point precision data type exponent single width and fraction width less than those for single precision Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 182 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Gateway Out System Generator Data Type Simulink Data Type Custom floating point precision data type with double exponent width or fraction width greater than that for single precision XFix_ lt width gt _ lt binpt gt sfix lt width gt _EN lt binpt gt UFix_ lt width gt _ lt binpt gt ufix lt width gt _EN lt binpt gt XFix_ lt width gt _0 where width is 8 16 or 32 int lt width gt where width is 8 16 or 32 UFix_ lt width gt _0 where width is 8 16 or 32 uint lt width gt where width is 8 16 or 32 XFix_ lt width gt _0 where width is other than 8 16 or sfix lt width gt 32 UFix_ lt width gt _0 where width is other than 8 16 or ufix lt width gt 32
515. while guaranteeing that the cores are available for downstream synthesis and place and route tools Use XtremeDSP Slice This field specifies that if possible use the XtremeDSP slice DSP48 type element in the target device Otherwise CLB logic are used for the multipliers FPGA Area Slices FFs LUTs IOBs Embedded Mults TBUFs Use Area Above For Estimation These fields are used by the You specify the design sample rates in MATLAB vector format as shown above Any number of ouputs can be specified block The Resource Estimator gives you the ability to calculate the hardware resources needed for your System Generator design If you have placed a Resource Estimator in your design you can use the FPGA Area field to manually enter the FPGA area utilization of a specific block If you do not fill in these values the Resource Estimator will calculate and fill in these values automatically If you wish to manually enter your own values for a specific block then you must check the Define FPGA area for resource estimation box in order to force the Resource Estimator to use your entered values Otherwise the Resource Estimator will recalculate the FPGA Area and overwrite any values that you have entered into this field There are seven values available to enter into the FPGA Area field You must enter or read each value in its correct position If value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 then e value 1 Slices utilized by the block An FPGA slice usu
516. ws e Buffer Depth Number of samples the stream of pixels is delayed e Sample Period Sample rate at which the block will run Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 372 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Virtex2 Line Buffer Virtex2 Line Buffer The Xilinx Virtex2 Line Buffer reference block delays a sequential stream of pixels by the specified buffer depth It is optimized for the Virtex2 family since it uses the Read Before Write option on the underlying Single Port RAM Virtex2 Line Buffer block Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Buffer Depth Number of samples the stream of pixels is delayed e Sample Period Sample rate at which the block will run Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 373 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Virtex2 5 Line Buffer Virtex2 5 Line Buffer The Xilinx Virtex2 5 Line Buffer reference block buffers a sequential stream of pixels to construct 5 lines of output Each line is delayed by N samples where N is the length of the line Line 1 is delayed 4 N samples each of the following lines are delay by N fewer samples and line 5 is a copy of the input This block uses Virtex2 Line Buffer block which is located in the Imaging library of the Xilinx Reference Blockset Virtex2 5 Line Buffer
517. x 7 LT artix7l Artix 7Q 1L T qartix7I Kintex Family Commercial Automotive Defence Grade Kintex 7 T kintex7 Kintex 7Q T qkintex7 Kintex 7 1LT kintex7l Kintex 7Q 1L T qkintex7 Virtex Family Commercial Automotive Defence Grade Virtex 7 T virtex7 Virtex 7QV T qvirtex7 Virtex 7 1L T virtex7l Virtex 7QV 1LT qvirtex7l Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 317 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Chapter 2 Xilinx Reference Blockset The following reference libraries are provided Communication Communication Reference Designs BPSK AWGN Channel Convolutional Encoder Multipath Fading Channel Model White Gaussian Noise Generator Control Logic Control Logic Reference Designs Mealy State Machine Moore State Machine Registered Mealy State Machine Registered Moore State Machine DSP DSP Reference Designs 2 Channel Decimate by 2 MAC FIR Filter 2n 1 tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 2n tap Linear Phase MAC FIR Filter 2n tap MAC FIR Filter 4 channel 8 tap Transpose FIR Filter Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 318 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX DSP Reference Designs An tap MAC FIR Filter CIC Filter Dual Port Memory Interpolation MAC FIR Filter Interpolation Filter m channel n tap Transpose FIR Filter n tap Dual Port Memory MAC FIR Filter n tap MAC FIR Filter
518. x can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follows e Input Bit Width Width of input sample Input Binary Point Binary point location of input e Coefficients Specify coefficients for the filter Number of taps is inferred from size of coefficient vector e Coefficients Bit Width Bit width of each coefficient e Coefficients Binary Point Binary point location for each coefficient e Number of Channels Specify the number of channels desired There is no limit to the number of channels supported e Time Division Multiplexer Front End The TDM front end circuit can be implemented or not if the incoming data is already TDM e Time Division DeMultiplexer Back End The TDD back end circuit can be implemented or not if you desire a TDM output This is useful if the filter feeds another multichannel structure e Input Sample Period Sample period of input Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 347 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mealy State Machine Mealy State Machine A Mealy machine is a finite state machine whose output is a function CurrentState Of State transition for example a function of the machine s current state and current input A Mealy machine can be described with the Inputs i following block diagram Output hdealy State hdachine Inputs Cutput Lege gt Oulputs
519. x3 x2 1 285 9 x9 x4 1 529 10 x10 x3 1 1033 11 x11 x2 1 2053 12 x12 x64 x44 x41 4179 e Scaling Factor h represented in the previous formula as h specifies the scaling factor for the code Ordinarily h is 1 but can be as large as 25 1 where s is the symbol width The value must be chosen so that a is primitive That is h must be relatively prime to 25 1 e Generator Start specifies the first root r of the generator polynomial The generator polynomial g x is given by aki os oe bir j Q x x a A where a is a primitive element of the symbol field and the scaling factor is described below e Symbols Per Block n tells the number of symbols in the blocks the encoder produces Acceptable numbers range from 3 to 25 1 where s denotes the symbol width e Data Symbols k tells the number of information symbols each block contains Acceptable values range from max n 256 1 ton 2 Detailed Implementation tab Implementation Check Symbol Generator Optimization This option is available when Variable Number of Check Symbols option is selected on the GUI o Fixed Architecture The check symbol generator is implemented using a highly efficient fixed architecture o Area The check symbol generator implementation is optimized for area and speed efficiency The range of input ctrl_tdata_n_in is reduced o Flexibility The check symbol generator implementation is optimiz
520. xample Consider the problem of designing a Mealy machine to recognize the pattern 1011 in a serial stream of bits The state transition diagram and equivalent transition table are shown below nput C utgut 0 0 1 Mo part cf y RAND lt 5 ly gt oe EN zeque i o Seenfre FRE D ol 1 AS s ee a ke eon o pe A x ai i 11 14 i r 00 ese a RA 3 i 2 Y 3 0 ie as Buen OTE SA Se2n10 A AE e A s 350 ee Next State Output Table Current S ate Iflnput O Finput 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 370 3 2 0 1 4 Cell Torm at Next Stale Output The table lists the next state and output that result from the current state and input For example if the current state is 3 and the input is 1 the next state is 1 and the output is 1 indicating the detection of the desired sequence The Mealy State Machine block is configured with next state and output matrices obtained from the next state output table discussed above These matrices are constructed as shown below Next State O utput Table Current State If Input 0 lf Input 1 0 050 0 1 2 10 0 nn n 3 2 10 1 Cell Forf et Stats Output A o 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 U 3 uU uU 2 1 0 1 Next State Matrix Output Matrix Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 349 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Mealy State Machine Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clic
521. y double clicking the icon in your Simulink model The next state logic and state register in this block are implemented with high speed dedicated block RAM The number of bits used to implement a Moore state machine is given by the equations ds 2K 1 21 2k i w k N d w k 2k i where N total number of next state logic block RAM bits number of states un x ceil log2 s i number of input bits d depth of state logic block RAM w width of state logic block RAM The following table gives examples of block RAM sizes necessary for various state machines Number of States Nat a Input e 2 5 64 4 1 8 8 6 1536 16 5 2048 32 4 2560 52 1 768 100 4 14336 Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 370 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 XILINX Registered Moore State Machine The block RAM width and depth limitations are described in the core datasheet for the Single Port Block Memory Vivado Designing with System Generator www xilinx com 371 UG958 v2012 3 November 16 2012 E XILINX Virtex Line Buffer Virtex Line Buffer The Xilinx Virtex Line Buffer reference block delays a sequential stream of pixels by the specified buffer depth Virtex Line Buffer Block Parameters The block parameters dialog box can be invoked by double clicking the icon in your Simulink model Parameters specific to this reference block are as follo

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

0044-003-01 User Guide.qxd    USER GUIDE - Maidstone Borough Council  Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB  Toshiba QOSMIO G30 Personal Computer User Manual  Bedienungsanleitung Netzwerk-Kameras    - Eurotherm  Emergency Preparedness Communications Plan (EPCP)  Product News 2009  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file